-------
FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL R.M. YOUNG METEOROLOGICAL SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 4
II. D. 7. R.M. YOUNG METEOROLOGICAL SYSTEM
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide an overview of R.M.
Young Site equipment and operation, to each Site Operator.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to routine site visits performed by the operators of R.M. Young equipped
CASTNET sites.
3.0 SUMMARY
The R. M. Young meteorological system consists of sensors for wind direction and speed,
temperature 1 (T1 at 9 meters), temperature 2 (T2 at 2 meters), relative humidity, and solar
radiation. The sensors are mounted on the meteorological tower, and one-meter solar radiation
support. Signal cables connect the solar radiation sensor to an individual translators located on the
data-logger backplane. All of the individual sensors receive operating power from the Campbell
CR3000 data-logger, which has a regulated 12-volt output. The site operator performs routine
checks on this equipment every Tuesday.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
A generalized list is provided in 3.0 above.
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
See Section II.B.
6.0 PROCEDURE
The following is a brief description of each parameter. There are no operating instructions other
than those provided in Section II.B. "Site Operator Instructions". Those instructions, the
manufacturers manual, and troubleshooting direction given by the MACTEC field operations
group, should be sufficient to perform the required site operator's duties.
6.1 Wind Monitor
The wind sensor is mounted at the top of the meteorological tower. A rod beneath the sensor is
attached to the tower and aligned to either north or south as a reference point. The sensor has both
a lightweight propeller and vane to measure wind speed and direction simultaneously. There is no
circuit to provide heat to the sensor to prevent icing in freezing conditions. The design of the
monitor is such that icing should not occur unless extreme conditions are encountered. The vane
should be free of obstructions, and able to move in a light breeze. In general if there is enough
wind to move the wind speed propeller, the wind direction vane should also be moving, and vice-
versa. The sensor should be in a vertical position on the tower, and the vane should not be
damaged or bent. Perform the current condition checks as described in Section II.B. Wind speed
in miles per hour (mph) is a little more than 2 times wind speed in meters per second (m/s).
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0vAp - I Field SOP\2-D-7.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL R.M. YOUNG METEOROLOGICAL SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 4
Therefore if the data acquisition system (DAS) is recording wind speed as 2 m/s, the equivalent
wind speed is about 5 mph.
6.2 Temperaturel, Temperature_2 and Delta Temperature
Temperature 1 (9meter) and Temperature 2 (2meter) measurements are obtained by using two
identical sensors mounted in aspirated shields on the meteorological tower. Both sensors measure
temperature by means of changes in resistance. Each sensor is measured independently. A
correction is applied to the temperatures reported and Delta Temperature is then computed as the
difference between the temperature indicated by the 9meter (Tl) and 2meter (T2) sensors { Delta
Temperature = Tl - T2}. Be sure both blowers are functioning by direct observation and confirm
through observation of the "blower_rpm" parameter. Perform the current condition checks as
described in Section II.B. As a general rule, the ground should heat up during bright sunny days
with moderate to light winds. Therefore, during the day the delta temperature should be a
negative number (upper sensor subtract lower sensor). At night the ground should cool down and
the delta temperature should be positive. Under overcast, rainy, or well-mixed conditions, the
delta temperature should be near zero.
6.3 Relative Humidity
The relative humidity sensor is mounted in a naturally aspirated shield near the upper temperature
housing. No air is forced past the sensor. During times of light winds, fog, or extended rain, the
sensor may become saturated and require several hours to respond to decreased humidity levels.
Perform the current condition checks as described in Section II.B. Generally humidity increases
at night as the temperature approaches the dew point, with a maximum just before sunrise. Also
warm air can hold more moisture, so if a dry air mass is present and a bright sunny day is
encountered, the humidity level relative to that increase in temperature can be very low.
6.4 Solar Radiation
The solar radiation sensor is mounted to a support usually about one meter in height, in the
southernmost area of the site. It should be in a location where the influence of shadows from
other structures or trees can be avoided. Be sure the sensor is clean and level. Avoid shading the
sensor when inspecting, or performing required maintenance. Perform the current condition
checks as described in Section II.B. A bright, sunny, cloudless day, in the mid latitudes will
produce solar radiation values in the seven to eight hundred watts per square meter range. The
values can be observed to increase and decrease rapidly during cloudy conditions.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\2-D-7.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FIELD OPERATIONS MANUAL R.M. YOUNG METEOROLOGICAL SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 4
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
N/A
9.0 APPENDICES
N/A
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0*Ap - ! Field SOP\2-D-7.docx
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 78
III.
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
J/2-0o^
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
10.0
Attachments
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\PiCASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOPso-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 78
III. FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
site equipment calibration to each Field Calibration Technician.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the semi-annual calibration of ambient air monitoring equipment at all
EPA sponsored Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) sites. All procedures are
performed by technicians approved by the CASTNET Field Operations Manager (FOM).
3.0 SUMMARY
3.1 Network Overview
The goal of CASTNET is to estimate dry deposition velocities and measure spatial and
temporal trends of selected air pollutants at over 50 sites throughout the United States.
MACTEC's analytical laboratory analyzes the filter packs and calculates 7-day average
concentrations of magnesium (Mg2+), calcium (Ca2+), sodium (Na+), potassium (K+), chloride
(CI ), sulfate (S024), nitrate (NO,), ammonium (NH4), sulfur dioxide (S02), and nitric acid
(HNO,). Deposition velocities are estimated based on these concentrations, in conjunction with
the continuous measurements of other parameters and information from land use and site
characteristic data. At each of the dry deposition monitoring sites, continuous measurements
are taken of the following:
• Precipitation
• Wind direction
• Wind speed (scalar and vector averaging)
• Temperature (measured at 9 meters)
• Delta temperature (difference between 9 and 2 meters)
• Shelter temperature
• Relative humidity
• Ozone
• Solar radiation
• Filter pack flow
• Surface wetness
These measurements are recorded by an onsite data acquisition system (DAS), using a data
logger (CASTNET sites use Campbell Scientific CR3000 or ESC8816 data loggers). Data are
collected hourly from each site via an automated polling system at MACTEC. The data are also
recorded by the data-logger to onboard NVRAM. The data are processed, validated, and
delivered to EPA quarterly by the MACTEC CASTNET Data Management Center (DMC).
P: ECM\F CASTNET 4 - transitiorrQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 78
3.2 Biannual Calibration Process
The biannual calibration is a twofold process. Phase one consists of a detailed sensor by sensor
observation. The purpose of these is to determine whether the monitoring equipment is
operating according to its design parameters, and to determine if the data previously collected
meets quality assurance criteria as defined in the QAPP. This phase is referred to as a site audit.
In an audit the equipment performance is observed, recorded and reported. Additionally,
observations of site condition and infrastructure are recorded. Sensor performance is assessed
through comparison with the measurements as determined by a certified transfer standard.
Phase two is a calibration. This phase consists of the repair, replacement or adjustment of all
sensors found to be noncompliant with the performance standards as defined in the QAPP with
the express purpose to bring the measurement capacity of the entire site into full compliance
with the criteria defined in Table 3.4. No calibration, repair, adjustment or replacement
activities shall occur until the full nature of site operation "as found" is recorded.
3.3 The Role of Calibrators
The EPA requires that the data be accurate within standard criteria. In order to attain this
accuracy, the sites are periodically checked and calibrated by MACTEC personnel. Transfer
standards, certified at the MACTEC laboratory, are used for comparison of all site parameters.
Any inaccuracy is corrected by either careful adjustment of existing equipment or replacement
of sensors. During the MACTEC site calibrations, extensive scrutiny is focused on all systems,
and routine preventive maintenance is performed. The calibrator first documents the existing
accuracy of site systems using certified transfer standards. Criteria for quality have been
established that are guidelines for action. If the parameter in question is outside the tolerance
described in Table 3.3, the system must be adjusted, or replaced. Field site personnel are under
no circumstances authorized to leave a site with any inoperative parameter without the express
consent of MACTEC management.
3.4 Calibration Criteria
DAS Voltage
± 0.003 VDC
Wind speed
± 0.2 m/s (< 5 m/s) ± 5% (> 5m/s)
Wind direction
± 3° at all points
Temperature
± 0.15° C
Delta Temperature
± 0.30° C
Shelter Temperature
± 0.30° C
Relative Humidity
± 10% RH units
Precipitation
± 5% (0.48 to 0.52 in.)
Solar Radiation
± 5% of transfer at highest hour and daily average
Ozone
± 5% of actual for any value, r2 > 0.9950,
0.9500 < slope < 1.050
-3.0 ppb < intercept <3.0 ppb
Flow
± 2.0% of transfer target value
Wetness
Correct response for wet/dry conditions ± 0.1 VDC
P: HCM P CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 78
3.5 Maxims for the Calibrator
The purpose of the network is to collect data of the highest quality for the EPA. The
calibrator's role is critical in this endeavor. The following precepts should be kept firmly in
mind while performing this role.
• Data recovery and validation is the ultimate outcome, the bottom line is transparency so
that data validators can make the most informed decision.
• If the data are not accurate or of known quality, there are no data at all, so — document
existing accuracy, then adjust/replace if out of specifications.
• Write relevant observations in the logbook, complete all paperwork and iForms.
• Make sure transfer standards are calibrated before and after a trip.
• Plan trip, call site operators, and call MACTEC FOM or Field Coordinator every day.
• Quality is more important than quantity; do all required maintenance.
• Be careful.
• Do a final hard look around, verify data acquisition.
• Call MACTEC if there are any questions or difficulties and prior to leaving the site.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
See Figures 1 and 2 in Section IV. B. 1. for a complete listing of calibration equipment. In
addition, a complete set of calibration iForms and necessary paper (See Figures 3-14), current
Site Equipment Inventory List (See Figure 2), and a copy of this manual are required.
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
See Subsection 6.0 of this Section for instrument-specific maintenance. See Section IV and
appropriate subsection for detailed repair and maintenance instructions for a given instrument
or procedures.
6.0 PROCEDURE
Record all calibrations on the proper iForm and write in the site logbook all results as specified
by this procedure as well as any other information of note, i.e. weather conditions.
6.1 Arrival at Site
6.1.1 When arriving at a site, take a general look at the site conditions. In the site narrative logbook
record any and all conditions which may affect the measurement process. This includes initial
status of sensors, site conditions, nearby atmospheric conditions such as earthwork, burning of
debris, etc.
6.1.2 Record the following parameters in the site narrative logbook.
6.1.2.1 Time of arrival
6.1.2.2 Name of all personnel on site
6.1.2.3 Time of "Calibrator_OnSite" set to "true".
6.1.2.4 Time and parameter of any channels disabled.
6.1.2.5 Atmospheric conditions
P:\ECM\P CASTNET 4 - transitionQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 78
6.1.3 Use PC200 View to examine data for completeness and reasonability. Refer back through one
week of data. If more than three days have passed since the site observation log in the
Calibration folder was printed call MACTEC to ask if there have been any observations in the
interim. Record any anomalies in the site log book.
6.1.4 Set "Calibrator OnSite" to "true" and record the data-logger timestamp in the site log book.
NOTE: Before any sensor, analyzer, or measurement system accessory is repaired, adjusted or
replaced or modified, the sensor performance must be documented and the DAS voltage
accuracy must be verified.
6.1.5 Set up transfer standards that need warm-up time.
6.1.5.1 Install the transfer solar radiation (SR) system. See Section 6.11 for the proper procedure.
NOTE: The site SR sensor should not be leveled until after unadjusted data are collected.
Position and level the transfer SR sensor alongside the site SR sensor. Be certain
" Calibrator OnSite " is "true " so the data-logger will record five minute averages of transfer
channel values.
6.1.5.2 Install the Ozone (03) transfer standard. See Section 6.8 for the proper procedure.
6.1.5.3 Plug in the Flow transfer and to allow adequate warm up prior to use.
6.1.6 Measure the cross-arm alignment of the wind system. See Section 6.7 or 6.9 for details.
6.2 DAS Voltage Accuracy
Record the ID and certification date of the certified precision voltmeter and certified voltmeter
on the DAS iForm. Record the Data-logger ID as well.
6.2.1 Disable the data-logger measurement channels by setting "Down_All_Channels" to "true".
Enable the proper measurement process by setting "Calibrator jOnSite" to "true
6.2.2 Using a certified voltmeter determine and record the voltage outputs of the 12VDC and 5VDC
ports on terminal block four of the data-logger. Record the results in the remarks section of the
DAS iForm. Remove the analog input terminal blocks - the top two terminal blocks on the
data-logger. Install the data-logger calibration jig included in the calibration equipment box.
6.2.3 Connect the jig leads to a certified precision voltage supply, such as a Datel DVC350A and a
certified voltmeter to the calibration jig. Set the PC200 display resolution to four decimal
places.
6.2.4 Input voltages from 0.000 to 1.000 volts direct current (VDC) in increments of 0.1000 VDC.
For each input voltage value record on the DAS iForm the voltmeter response and the channel
name and voltage value of the channel on the data-logger with the greatest deviation from the
Datel.
6.2.5 Record the full set of data for all channels if any channel(s) differs by 3mV or more from the
Datel. Perform the same check at 2, 3 4 and 5 VDC but only record the values for the following
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 78
channels: Wind Direction, Flow, Wetness, and Shelter Temperature.1 Simultaneously record the
voltmeter response on the DAS iForm for each input voltage.
6.2.6 Note that the data-logger is not field serviceable. If the data-logger is found out of specification,
the entire site audit should be performed. The data-logger should then be replaced and a full
audit/calibration of the new system should be performed. No sensor should be adjusted or
modified prior to full documentation of site performance and data-logger replacement. Upon
replacement tag the defective data-logger and return to MACTEC.
6.2.7 DAS Back-up Battery Check.
6.2.7.1 Record the data-logger operational voltage on the DAS iForm. It should be above 12.7VDC.
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet. Wait one minute then record the operational voltage again.
The voltage should remain above 11.9VDC. If not the internal battery should be replaced.
6.3 Tipping Bucket Rain Gauge
6.3.1 Set "precipitation_down" parameter to "true" (available on 1 Site Operator and 3 Calibration
grids). Note time in logbook.
6.3.2 Measure 231.5 milliliters (mL) of H20 with a graduated cylinder and pour into the separatory
funnel.
6.3.3 Drip this (equivalent to 0.50 inches of precipitation) through the funnel on top of the rain gauge
at a rate of approximately one tip per 15 seconds. Not to exceed one tip per 10 seconds (see
Climatronics Manual).
6.3.4 Afterwards, record the total precipitation measured by the DAS as displayed in the
"PrecipjCheck" parameter (available on 1 Site Operator and 3 Calibration grids). Each tip
equals 0.01 inch of precipitation on the DAS.
6.3.5 If the error is more than ±0.02 inches, repeat the measurement. To do so set
"precipitation_dowrT to "false", then to "true" to reset the "Precip_Check" counter. If the
results are consistent, clean, level and adjust the rain gauge to accuracy.
6.3.6 Two screws on the bottom of the gauge position the resting point of the tipping bucket's
measurement mechanism within. If the gauge is recording too few tips, adjust the screws
clockwise to elevate the bucket rests. If the gauge is recording too many tips, turn the screws
counterclockwise. Test again, and repeat until accurate. Again setting "precipatiton_down" to
'''false" then "true" will reset the totalizer function. Set "precipitation_down" to "false" when
finished. Note time and results in logbook.
6.3.7 Maintenance: (Caution: 120 VAC)
1 Note that a 5VDC signal will be observed on Channels 3H and 3L ("TemplBlowerBad" and
"Temp2_Blower_Bad") at RMY sites which utilize paddle and proximity switch blower status indicators.
After January 2010 these systems will have been upgraded to RPM based blower status indication and
5VDC will not be observed on these channels.
P. ECM P CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0 Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 78
6.3.7.1 Clean the buckets.
6.3.7.2 Inspect the mechanism and wiring for defects.
6.3.7.3 If the temperature is below freezing, check to see if the funnel is warm and the thermostat is
working.
6.3.7.4 Make sure screen is clean and in place during summer months and out during winter months.
6.3.7.5 Make sure thermostat is secured to side of bucket.
6.3.7.6 Use freeze-spray to test the thermostat and heater.
6.4 Wetness
6.4.1 Unadjusted Check (Audit):
6.4.1.1 Set the "wetness_dowri" parameter to "true" (available on 1 Site Operator and 3 Calibration
grids). Note time in site log-book.
6.4.1.2 Check that the sensor is clean; that no weeds are around it, and that the face of the sensor is
oriented north at about a 30-degree (°) angle.
6.4.1.3 Record the DAS voltage for the ambient condition of wet or dry as reported in the
" Wetness_Check" parameter (available on 1 Site Operator and 3 Calibration grids).
6.4.1.4 Induce the opposite condition by either drying or wetting the leaf sensor grid and record DAS
output again for the appropriate condition. Return the sensor to ambient conditions.
6.4.1.5 When dry the sensor should report 0.00±0.02 VDC. When wet the sensor should report 1.00 ±
0.10 VDC.
6.4.2 Additional Check and Adjustment Procedures:
6.4.2.1 Remove the cover from the wetness sensor circuit box. Insert decade box test jack in the
connector labeled test jack.
6.4.2.2 Set the decade box to 235 kfi. The wetness sensor should turn on as indicted by the red LED
and voltage signal. If the sensor does not turn on, adjust the sensitivity potentiometer until it
turns on.
6.4.2.3 Set the decade box to 245 kfi. The sensor should turn off. Adjust the sensitivity potentiometer
until the sensor response is on at 235 kQ and off at 245 kQ.
6.4.2.4 Set the sensor voltage response to 1.000 V using the output or gain potentiometer as recorded
by the DAS when the sensor is on. Replace the sensor cover. If the sensor cannot be made to
output 1.000 ±0.10 VDC while wet, replace it and perform a full audit of the as left sensor
response on the calibration form.
6.4.2.5 Set "wetness _down" parameter to "False" and note time in the logbook. Record all results on
the calibration form.
6.4.2.6 In winter months, at some sites, snow accumulation may prevent access to the sensor.
6.5 Temperature - R.M. Young System
6.5.1 Items needed: ice, water, re-sealable plastic bags, thermos, magnetic stir bar and stir plate,
water heater, certified Resistance Temperature Device (RTD), and rubber mallet.
6.5.2 Record the transfer RTD certification data and probe ID, site probe ID's and as found
temperature rho and alpha values for each site probe on the Temperature iForm. The existing
P:VECM\P CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 8 of 78
temperature probes individual rho and alpha values are found on the "4 Calibration-2" data grid
within PC200 interface. The shelter temperature probe does not use rho and alpha values.
6.5.3 Record the existing rho and alpha values as found in the site narrative logbook.
6.5.4 With the meteorological tower standing record the as-found status of "TempiBlower Bad" and
"Temp2_Blower_Bad" as "true" (inoperative) or "false" (operative). If either indicates "true",
verify and document that the blower motor is actually inoperative and why.
6.5.5 Locate the power cord for the blower motor power supply. This power supply is the green unit
located on the data logger backplane terminal interface strip. The power cord emerges from
behind the backplane and is plugged in near the data-logger.
6.5.6 Down all met channels. Note time and action in logbook.
6.5.7 Unplug the power supply and observe that the green indicator light on the unit goes out. Wait at
least thirty seconds and then record the status of "Tempi_Blower _Bad" and
"Temp2_Blower_Bad" as "true" or "false". Both should read "true" for this operation.
6.5.8 Inspect temperature sensors, blowers and aspirated shield conditions; note whether sensors are
touching the housings and whether airflow is obstructed and if the temperature probes are
installed with the correct length adaptors. Clean blower motors if necessary. Any installation
discrepancies and repair activities including cleaning should be documented.
6.5.9 Crush some ice (in plastic bag with rubber mallet) to a fine consistency. Set up a stirring ice
bath in a thermos. Insert the "temperature" (9m tagged yellow), "temperature2" (2m tagged
red), "shelter Jemperature" (Campbell 107 attached to data-logger backplane) and Transfer
RTD probes into the bath. At least three-quarters of the Transfer RTD and site probes should be
immersed in the bath water. The shelter temperature probe should be immersed to the bottom of
the rubber boot. Ensure that probes are not touching container or one another.
6.5.10 Boil water in an electric kettle in preparation for the next steps.
6.5.11 Allow sufficient time for the probes to equilibrate in the 0 °C ± 0.05 °C stirring bath. Note that
the shelter temperature probe will generally respond less quickly than the meteorological
probes.
6.5.12 Record simultaneous data-logger and transfer RTD measurements in units of degrees Celsius
on the Temperature iForm.
NOTE: The relevant instantaneous data-logger measurements to be recorded are the degrees
Celsius units of "temperature "temperature2 " and "shelterJemperature " as found on either
the "1 Site Operator" or "4 Calibration-2" grid in PC200. Record the transfer RTD value as
displayed on the Temperature iForm.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionQAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 9 of78
6.5.13 The iForm will automatically correct the transfer standard values if the certification data and
proper calibration factors have been input from step 6.5.3.
6.5.14 Transfer all probes to a stirring bath of ambient temperature. Ambient being defined as between
20 °C and 30 °C to ensure data quality for the "shelter Jemperature" probe measurement.
Repeat the measurement process described previously, simultaneously recording
"temperature", "temperature2", "shelter Jemperature" and the transfer RTD output in °C on
the Temperature iForm.
6.5.15 Transfer all probes into a bath temperature of 50 ± 0.5 °C. Allow to equilibrate. In general 120 -
150mL of boiling water will raise the Thermos bath temperature ~10 °C.
6.5.16 Again repeat the measurement process described above, simultaneously recording
"temperature", "temperature!", "shelter Jemperature" and the transfer RTD output. All
recorded units must be in °C.
6.5.17 Following the temperature audit examine the iForm results. If either the "temperature" or
"temperature2" probe measurements vary from the transfer probe value by more than ±0.15 °C
then that probe variance will result in a flagged value in the iForm and the audit must be
extended to include 0, 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 °C. Likewise if the computed "delta Jemperature"
value varies from the corrected transfer RTD measurement by more than 0.3 °C the audit must
as well be extended.
6.5.18 If the "shelter Jemperature" probe measurement varies from the corrected Transfer RTD
values by more than 0.3 °C the audit must be extended to include three points between 20 °C
and 30 °C.
NOTE: If only the "shelterJemperature "fails audit criterion extend the audit as instructed but
do not input "temperature " or "temperature2" measurement data on the iForm. This will
allow the iForm to contain the proper information for data validation without computing a new
rho and alpha value for the meteorological probes.
If six values for the transfer temperature probe and six values for either the "temperature " or
"temperature2 "probe are entered into the iForm a new rho and alpha value will be computed
for that site probe. This will only occur is the values are entered into the "as-left" section of the
iForm.
6.5.19 If an extended audit is necessary, record the audit finding in the "as-left" section of the iForm.
Following the extended audit of six points of data which includes both the meteorological
probes measurements and the transfer measurements the iForm will compute new rho and alpha
values for both the "temperature" and "temperature2" probes. This will only occur if the six
points are recorded in the as-left section of the iForm. If the rho and alpha values for each probe
are valid the new values must be entered into the data-logger and saved. The probes may then
be left as is. If either probe has either a new rho or alpha value that does not meet criterion that
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP 3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
A4ACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 10 of78
parameter will be flagged red and the probe must be replaced. Record new rho and alpha values
in the site log book.
6.5.20 Probe replacement: "temperature" or "temperature2".
6.5.20.1 Replace the probe with a MACTEC certified probe. Enter the rho and alpha value for that
probe as recorded on its' certification form into the data-logger. Repeat the three point audit on
that probe which includes 0 °C, Ambient °C and 50 °C. Record all data and probe ID in the "as
left" section of the Temperature iForm.
6.5.20.2 Re-install the probes on the tower and dress the cables. Be sure sensors are not touching
housings. Inspect wiring and connections. Perform required maintenance.
6.5.20.3 Enable channels when complete or after tower is raised.
6.6 Temperature - Climatronics System
6.6.1.1 Utilize extension cables provided in calibration equipment. Otherwise perform as R.M. Young.
6.6.1.2 Return the sensors to shields, check housings, blowers, and perform required maintenance.
6.6.1.3 Perform maintenance: Clean and inspect the Amphenol connectors including pins. Clean and
inspect wiring (i.e., signal cable terminal strips and Bulgin connectors). Clean and paint the
shields if necessary.
6.7 Wind Direction - R.M. Young System
6.7.1 Record the ID and certification date of the synchronous drive motor on the Wind iForm.
Record the site wind sensor ID and propeller serial number on the Wind iForm.
6.7.2 Record the ID and certification date of the Brunton compass on the iForm.
6.7.3 Set the certified Brunton compass to the correct declination for the site. See Appendix A for the
procedure if necessary. Mount the compass on the tripod.
6.7.4 With the meteorological tower standing, position the compass directly under the cross-arm.
Orient the compass such that when fully opened the mirror is between the compass dial and the
meteorological tower.
6.7.5 Level the compass using the bulls-eye level in the dial face. Rotate the compass until the sight
line in the mirror is parallel to the cross-arm. In this condition the entire length of the cross-arm
will appear centered down the alignment line in the mirror. Ensure the compass is still level.
6.7.6 Record the degree measure indicated by the NORTH (arrow) end of the compass needle in the
"cross-arm alignment" field of the iForm (RMY only). This measurement will depend on the
direction the cross-arm points away from the tower and may read any degrees, but most likely
near 0 or 180 degrees.
6.7.7 Lower the meteorological tower.
6.7.8 Assess the condition of the wind sensor alignment ring making sure that it is tight and will not
move.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPo-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 11 of78
6.7.9 Remove the sensor from the tower by loosening the hose clamp at the sensor base. DO NOT
LOOSEN THE ALIGNMENT RING. Install the rose compass wheel on the mast, mating it to
the alignment ring.
6.7.10 Hold the wind sensor in a vertical position and torque test the wind sensor's wind direction
bearing using the included strain gauge. Record the measured torque on the iForm. Wind
direction bearing torque must be less than 10 g/cm
NOTE: If conditions are too windy to properly test bearing torque wait until after the audit and
then remove the sensor from the wiring and perform the torque test in the shelter out of the
wind. At the same time test the nose cone bearing torque.
6.7.11 Install the wind sensor on the rose compass wheel and tighten.
6.7.12 Rotate the tail of the wind sensor vane over the cross-arm. Align it with the cross-arm using
parallax sighting the tail. Affix the rose compass jig to hold tail in position directly over the
cross-arm.
6.7.13 Record the degree measure indicated by the rose compass wheel on the iForm in the "wheel
indication" field of the iForm (RMY) or "Notch Alignment" field of the iForm (Climatronics).
6.7.14 The "Alignment ring" orientation will then be calculated by the iForm and the "Alignment
Ring" field will be automatically populated. As well the South, East and West values of the
" Wheel Bearing" column of the iForm will be automatically populated with the correct target
wheel values for the audit. These alignment values are to be used for the next step.
6.7.15 Align the wind sensor so the "Wheel Bearing" value for SOUTH as indicated on the iForm
matches the degree indication on the rose compass wheel and affix the wind sensor vane in
place. Record the data-logger degree measure output on the iForm in the "Degrees" column of
the "Data-Logger Output" field.
NOTE: Do not align the wind sensor to 90, 180 and 270 degrees as indicated on the rose
compass wheel. Align the sensor on the rose compass wheel to the degree measures computed
by the iForm in the "WheelBearing" Column.
6.7.16 Repeat the procedure above for the " Wheel Bearing" values as indicated on the iForm for
EAST and WEST. For each point record the data-logger degree measure output in the
corresponding row of the "Degrees" column of the "Data-logger Output" field.
6.7.17 Upon completion of the SOUTH, EAST and WEST points affix the wind sensor vane
approximately 80 degrees NORTH of the WEST target bearing (as indicated on the iForm) on
the rose compass wheel.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 12 of78
6.7.18 Rotate the wind sensor toward the NORTH (clockwise from the top) in one degree increments
as indicated by the rose compass wheel until the maximum degree value as output by the data-
logger is determined.
NOTE: This maximum will occur immediately prior to the wind sensor's directional
potentiometer entering the dead band and should occur at or near 355 degrees for a calibrated
and aligned sensor.
6.7.19 At the maximum degree output reported by the data-logger: Record the rose compass wheel
degree measure in the "Crossover Entry" row of the "Wheel Indication" column. Record the
corresponding maximum degree of data-logger output in the "Crossover Entry " row in the
"Degrees" column of the "Data-logger Output" field.
6.7.20 Rotate the wind vane one more degree and verify that the wind sensor's direction potentiometer
enters the dead band. At this point the data-logger degree output will drop to very near zero.
6.7.21 Continue to rotate the wind sensor vane in one degree increments until the directional
potentiometer exits the dead band.
NOTE: This will occur approximately five degrees clockwise of the entry point (on the rose
compass wheel as from the top). In general terms exit from the dead-band will occur at a data-
logger degree output of approximately 0.016 degrees. Rotating one more degree will produce a
near zero valid measurement. Rotating one more degree will increase the measurement.
6.7.22 Record the rose compass wheel measurement and data-logger output at the dead-band exit point
in the "Crossover Exit" row of the iForm.
6.8 Wind Speed-R.M. Young System
6.8.1 Remove propeller and record propeller serial number and sensor ID number on the iForm.
6.8.2 If not done so already install the torque wheel on the propeller shaft. Test and record the
bearing torque on the iForm.
6.8.3 Attach a variable speed synchronous motor to the propeller shaft. Run the motor at the
following rpms: 0, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3600, and 8600. Record the corresponding DAS
wind speeds on the iForm in units of m/s.
NOTE: If the propeller serial number is less than 53404 it will need to be replaced following
the audit.
6.8.4 If the wind speed is not within specifications replace the sensor and re-audit both the wind
speed and wind direction parameters of the replacement sensor. If the nose cone is replaced,
inspect to ensure it is not bent; no repeat of wind direction calibration is required. This is also
true if just the wind speed bearings are replaced.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 13 of 78
6.8.5 Perform routine maintenance: Check bearing and wiring condition and replace if necessary,
even if not scheduled for routine maintenance. Be sure the unit is properly assembled and
everything is tight. Lubricate the nose cone o-ring with a small amount of high vacuum grease.
Note if any future replacements are needed, such as the vane or signal cable.
NOTE: Bearing torque should be < 0.2 gm/cm.
6.9 Wind Direction - Climatronics
6.9.1 Record the ID and certification date of the synchronous drive motor on the Wind iForm.
Record the ID and certification date of the Brunton compass on the iForm.
6.9.2 Set the certified Brunton compass to the correct declination for the site. See Appendix A for the
procedure if necessary. Mount the compass on the tripod.
6.9.3 With the meteorological tower standing position the compass directly under the cross-arm on
the side with the wind direction sensor. Orient the compass such that when fully opened the
mirror is between the compass dial and the meteorological tower.
NOTE: The Brunton compass MUST be positioned under the crossarm on the side of the
meteorological tower with the wind direction sensor. This should always be the South side to
the tower and will result in a cross-arm alignment measurement of or near 180° The
Climatronics wind sensor should always be mounted on the South end of the cross-arm or
directional measurement will be out by 180° at all points.
6.9.4 Level the compass using the bulls-eye level in the dial face. Rotate the compass until the sight
line in the mirror is parallel to the cross-arm. In this condition the entire length of the cross-arm
will appear centered down the alignment line in the mirror. Ensure the compass is still level.
6.9.5 Record the degree measure indicated by the NORTH (arrow) end of the compass needle in the
"cross-arm alignment" field of the iForm. Since the wind direction sensor is on the South side
of the cross-arm this measurement will be very near 180°.
6.9.6 The cross-arm must be within ±2° of TRUE SOUTH or it will require adjustment.
NOTE: Climatronics wind direction measurement is dependent upon proper orientation of the
cross-arm. Misalignment will result in erroneous measurement even if the sensor calibration is
within specification.
6.9.7 Lower the meteorological tower. Record the site wind sensor ID and serial number of the cups
on the Wind iForm.
6.9.8 Remove the vane from the wind direction sensor. Use extreme care to not loosen the cap upon
which the vane is seated. If such occurs, the audit will be corrupted and six months of data may
be lost.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitior^QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP 3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 14 of 78
6.9.9 Remove the wind direction sensor from the cross-arm and install it on the Climatronics
calibration jig included in the calibration kit. Attach the pigtail connector on the jig to the
connector on the cross-arm.
6.9.10 Attach the rose compass to the sensor. Be certain the keyway on the sensor cap aligns with the
slot in the rose compass.
6.9.11 Spin the rose compass wheel counterclockwise from the top two revolutions to 270° (WEST).
Record the DAS "wind_direction" output in degrees on the iForm.
6.9.12 Turn the rose compass wheel counterclockwise to 180° (SOUTH). Record the data-logger
output on the iForm.
6.9.13 Turn the rose compass wheel counterclockwise to 90° (EAST 1). Record the data-logger output
on the iForm in degrees.
6.9.14 Turn the rose compass wheel counterclockwise to 0° (NORTH). Record the data-logger output
on the iForm in degrees.
6.9.15 Turn the wheel Clockwise back to 90° (EAST 2). Record the data-logger output in degrees on
the iForm.
6.9.16 Inspect the wind direction sensor mounting collar on the cross-arm. Confirm that the engraved
line on the collar is aligned to the South and parallel to the length of the cross-arm. Do not turn
the collar if it is slightly loose. Instead tighten the set screw so as to leave the collar in its
original position.
6.9.17 Cross-arm and Notch Alignment: If the engraved line in the collar is parallel to the length of the
cross-arm, record 0° in the "Notch Alignment" field of the iForm. Then skip to 6.9.17.3.
6.9.17.1 If the engraved line in the collar is not parallel to the length cross-arm retune the wind direction
sensor to the cross-arm mount and reconnect to the site wiring.
6.9.17.2 Re-install the wind direction vane on the sensor but do not tighten.
6.9.17.3 Rotate the wind direction vane such that the tail is directly centered over the crossarm. Use
parallax sighting down the tail to ensure it is centered.
6.9.17.4 While holding the vane directly centered over the cross-arm, apply a piece of tape to the sensor
body and cap to hold the cap in position. Then remove the vane.
6.9.17.5 Record the wind direction indicated by the DAS in this configuration in the remarks section of
the iForm. Label this degree value "Notch alignment check value".
6.9.17.6 Subtract the "Notch alignment check value" from the the jig measurement for 180° and record
the result in the ''Notch Alignment" field of the iForm.
6.9.17.7 Remove the tape from the wind sensor, using caution not to damage the assembly.
NOTE: If the "Notch alignment check value " is greater than the degree measure as found on
the jig measurement at 180° the result will be a NEGATIVE number and should be recorded as
such. If the 'Notch alignment check value " is less than the degree measure as found on the jig
at 180° the result will be a POSITIVE number and should be recorded as such.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACT EC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 15 of78
6.9.18 Reinstall the wind direction sensor if the sensor met specifications. If the sensor did not meet
performance specifications of ±2° at each point, replace it with a MACTEC calibrated unit and
repeat the entire audit for the new sensor, recording the results in the "as-left" section of the
iForm.
6.9.19 Adjust the cross-arm to true South, if necessary.
6.9.20 Perform routine maintenance: Check the vane balance and condition. Be sure the sensor sits
plumb and level. Inspect all wiring and clean or replace as necessary. Make recommendations
regarding future replacements that may be necessary. When installing any sensors for routine
maintenance or repair, always check the setscrews to be sure they are secure.
6.10 Wind Speed - Climatronics
6.10.1 Remove cups, inspect cups, and record the condition in the remarks section of the wind iForm.
6.10.2 Install the variable speed synchronous drive motor assembly to the windspeed sensor.
6.10.3 At zero (0) RPM record the DAS "windspeed" output in m/s in the iForm. Measure the
frequency output of the windspeed sensor and record in the iForm. To measure frequency: Set a
certified multi-meter to measure Hertz. Attach the positive (red) lead to port PI on the third
terminal block of the datalogger faceplate. Attach the ground (black) lead to the G port
(ground) on the terminal block 4 of the data-logger face plate.
6.10.4 Repeat the above step, recording both the DAS windspeed output and frequency measured by
the multi-meter at the following rpms: 100, 200, 300, 400, 800, and 1800.
6.10.5 If the windspeed sensor fails performance criteria replace it with a MACTEC certified unit and
perform the entire audit again recording the new values in the "as left" section of the iForm.
6.10.6 Perform scheduled maintenance: Inspect wiring and Amphenol connectors, bearings, heaters,
and cups.
6.10.7 Replace as necessary, even if not scheduled for maintenance. Note if any future replacements
are needed.
6.10.8 Raise the tower, recheck the cross arm alignment, up Channels 2, 3, 11 (B), and note the time in
the log.
6.11 Relative Humidity
6.11.1 CASTNET sites employ either a Rotronic or Vaisala hygrometer for relative humidity
measurements. Both sensors require 12VDC input and have a 0 to 1VDC output signal directly
proportional to units of percent relative humidity. RH sensors can only be audited in the field.
They cannot be calibrated. Malfunctioning sensors or those not meeting criteria must be
replaced. Any RH sensor replaced in the field should be tagged for post calibration prior to
return to MACTEC.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 16 of 78
6.11.2 Record the laboratory correction factors of the RH transfer sensor on the RH iForm. Record the
transfer and site probe ID's on the RH iForm.
6.11.3 Set the "RHDown" parameter to "true" on the DAS. Note the time in the log.
6.11.4 Place the certified transfer standard alongside the site sensor in like conditions. Record
simultaneous relative humidity readings at different relative humidity levels during the course
of the day. If the site sensor is outside of criteria, replace the sensor. Replace the filter on the
sensor tip as indicated on the maintenance schedule, or if it is heavily soiled.
6.11.5 If conditions render it impossible to test the sensor in ambient range from below 50 percent to
approximately 95 percent, use the portable humidity generator included with the calibration
equipment to complete the audit.
6.11.6 RH audit procedure using portable humidity generator.
6.11.6.1 Unpack the portable humidity lab. Inspect the unit for proper water level, kinks in attached
tubing, and for functional desiccant. DrieRite should be used in the Vaporpak unit as opposed to
silica desiccant. Silica desiccant should be used in the Rense Intruments SA-503. Inspect the
chamber for foreign matter. If necessary add distilled water and new desiccant.
6.11.6.2 Install the RH Transfer probe arm into the appropriate port on the portable humidity generator.
If necessary wrap Teflon tape or Parafilm 1 inch from the transfer probe tip to ensure an airtight
seal is formed. A leaky seal here will allow high deviations between the sensor, transfer sensor
and humidity generator readings. This is particularly true in windy conditions. If necessary
place the portable humidity generator in a Pelican case and close the lid gently to shield from
wind.
6.11.6.3 Install the site sensor into the appropriate port on the portable humidity generator.
6.11.6.3.1 For Vaporpak: If site sensor is a Rotronic probe gently insert it into the front port of the
Vaporpak taking care not to break the RH Transfer probe tip. Tighten the compression nut to
ensure an airtight seal around the Rotronic probe. If the site sensor is a Vaisala probe, insert
the probe through the hole in the provided #5 stopper until it reaches the threads at the probe
base. Insert the probe and stopper into the front port of the Vaporpak and tighten the
compression nut to ensure an airtight seal around both stopper and probe. Use care not to
damage the Transfer probe tip.
6.11.6.3.2 For Rense Instument SA-503: Install site probe in proper fixed port atop unit. Leave all
other ports sealed.
6.11.6.4 Set the portable humidity generator for 20 percent RH and power the unit on. Always start the
portable units at low RH and increase to high RH to avoid condensation forming in the
chamber.
6.11.6.5 Let the unit run at a point below 50 percent until the transfer and the site probe both stabilize.
Once stable, record the site sensor units "relative Jiumidity" as found in either the "7 Site
Operator" or "3 Calibration" grid. Record the RH Transfer sensor value in the RH Calibration
iForm. The iForm will then numerically correct the transfer measurements.
6.11.6.6 Repeat the above procedure for "relativejhumidity" for at total of at least three points detailed
below, allowing both the transfer and site sensors to fully stabilize at each point.
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP^3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 17 of78
RH Field Audit Points
Target RH Transfer Value
Acceptable Site RH Sensor Response Value
Less than 50 percent
All points ±10 percentage units
Between 50 percent and 85 percent
Approximately 95 percent
6.11.6.7 If the site sensor is not within ±10 percentage units replace it. Repeat the audit to include the
new sensor in the "as left" section of the RH iForm. Tag the sensor that was removed and
specify the need for a post calibration check.
6.11.6.8 Perform required scheduled maintenance.
6.11.6.9 Upon completion of the audit turn the RH setting to 0 on the portable humidity generator and let
the unit dry prior to re-packing.
6.11.6.10 Set the "RH_Down" parameter to "false" upon raising the tower.
6.12 Ozone
6.12.1 Set "Calibrator_OnSite" and "Ozone_down" to "true"
6.12.2 If site unit is a Model 49i enable "Service Mode"
6.12.3 Record the site analyzer and transfer analyzer ID's, frequencies, bench temperatures,
spans/offsets, Transfer slope and intercept, cell noise, and cell flows on the iForm.
6.12.4 Install the Transfer ozone analyzer.
6.12.4.1 Remove the cap from the branch side of the union tee fitting on the "sample in" port of the site
analyzer.
6.12.4.2 Connect the calibration test tubing to the branch of the tee and the sample port of the transfer
standard. The transfer standard should be sampling from the same point in the sample train as
the site analyzer. The calibration gas vent should be at the ozone filter inlet on the tower. See
Figure 1- Ozone Calibration Sample Line Configuration.
6.12.4.3 Connect Pins 1 and 2 of the Transfer analyzer I/O terminal block to terminals 41 and 42 on the
data-logger terminal interface strip respectively. The I/O terminal block is included prewired in
the calibration kit.
6.12.4.4 Adjust the transfer analyzer analog voltage output to 0 and 1.000 VDC as measured on the data-
logger.
6.12.5 Thermo Electron Corporation Model 49-103 Analyzer.
6.12.5.1 Record the as-found settings of both the "A" and "B" potentiometers on the Ozone iForm.
6.12.5.2 Record the zero and full scale analog output voltages as displayed on the data logger or a
certified multi-meter on the iForm. The zero and full-scale analog voltage outputs should be 0
and 1.000 VDC respectively. If not, continue with the audit. Do not adjust unless the site
analyzer fails audit criterion.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 18 of 78
NOTE: Detector frequency should be 80-120 kHz at opening temperature. Noise value should
be <4.0 Hz.
6.12.5.3 Place the site analyzer toggle switch for the sample/span solenoid in the "Span/Zero" position.
Push the "Remote" button to activate the zero air pump. Record the zero-air pressure of the site
analyzer on the iForm. If necessary, adjust to 15 psi.
6.12.5.4 Check for excess flow at the sample inlet on the tower.
6.12.5.5 Set the "A/Zero/B" toggle switch to "Zero".
6.12.5.6 Once stable, record the 10 second averages displayed on each instrument simultaneously on the
Ozone iForm. Record the second five minute averages of each instrument on the Ozone iForm.
NOTE: A measurement of or about +5ppb at zero on both units usually indicates a leak in the
sample train. This condition will often coincide with span values that low. Do not repair a leak
at this time.
6.12.5.7 Set the "A/Zero/B" toggle switch to "A". Adjust the "A" potentiometer (dial) for 450 to 475
ppb as displayed by the transfer ozone analyzer. Once stable, record the 10 second averages
displayed on each instrument simultaneously on the Ozone iForm. Record the second five
minute averages of each instrument on the Ozone iForm.
6.12.5.8 Set the "B" potentiometer finish the multi-point audit using the method above at the settings
below. Record the "B" potentiometer setting for each setting in the "Lamp" field of the iForm.
Each concentration target should be taken from the response of the transfer analyzer.
Ozone Audit Concentration Targets By Potentiometer Setting: Model 49-103
"Zero"
"A" Potentiometer
"B" Potentiometer
0 ppb
450 to 475 ppb
300 to 350 ppb
200 to 225 ppb 100 to 120 ppb
50 to 70 ppb
6.12.5.9 Check sample line loss by removing the calibration gas line, which is labeled "cal gas out", and
the sample line from the straight side of the tee connector on the rear of the site analyzer.
Remove the port connector that attaches the tee to the analyzer from the "sample in' port (site
analyzer) and connect it to the "cal gas out" port of the site analyzer. The site analyzer will still
be generating ozone, the transfer standard will be sampling from the "cal gas out" port, and the
vent will be inside the shelter where the site analyzer sample line was connected.
NOTE: Ozone will be venting inside the shelter at this time. Use a concentration of 100ppb to
avoid any possible hazard.
6.12.5.10Report the difference obtained by this connection, and that obtained in the step above at the
100 ppb target (through the entire sample train) as the line loss. Excessive line loss (greater than
5 percent) warrants further investigation as it implies a leak. After completing the line loss test,
return the calibration and sample lines to their original and proper positions. Document the line
loss in the remarks section of the iForm.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.doc.x
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 19 of 78
6.12.5.11 If line loss is greater than 5 percent determine if the leak is within the shelter and note on the
iForm whether the prior data is valid as an ambient sample taken at 10m. Note that the leak will
need repair and a re-audit or full calibration will be necessary.
6.12.5.12 Once fully populated the iForm will display the percent differences between the transfer and site
analyzers as well as the actual ozone concentrations measured. If the zero level has error ±3 ppb
and/or any other level differs by 5 percent the site unit will need calibration.
6.12.5.13 If the line loss test resulted in a criterion failure repair the leak and document fully.
If the site analyzer passed audit got to step 6.12.6.8
6.12.6 Adjustment / Calibration Model 49-103
6.12.6.1 Prior to calibration and following the audit, perform any repairs necessary. Replace the zero -air
desiccant and carbon if necessary. Adjust the site analyzer zero and full-scale analog output
voltages to 0.000 and 1.000 VDC respectively.
6.12.6.2 Fully leak check the entire system prior to calibrating and repair any and all leaks found. Do not
proceed with a calibration if leaks are present.
6.12.6.3 Set the site analyzer "A\Zero\B" toggle switch to "Zero". Allow the concentrations to stabilize.
The transfer should read zero if no leaks are present and the zero-air system is working
properly.
6.12.6.4 Once the transfer analyzer displays zero, adjust the site analyzer "Offset" potentiometer to make
the site unit match the transfer unit corrected response at zero.
6.12.6.5 Set the site analyzer "A\Zero\B" toggle switch to "A". Allow the concentrations to stabilize.
Adjust the "A" potentiometer to produce a transfer analyzer response of 450ppb. Once stable at
450ppb adjust the "Span" potentiometer of the site analyzer until the site analyzer response
matches the corrected transfer analyzer response.
6.12.6.6 Repeat the previous two steps if necessary to produce consistent concentrations of o and 450
ppb responses of the transfer.
6.12.6.7 Repeat the audit process entirely, recording the results in the as left section of the iForm. Record
the new offset and span values for the site analyzer as well as all other parameters of both
instruments in the iForm.
6.12.6.8 Upon completion of the audit and/or calibration, set the site analyzer's A and B potentiometers
to 400 ppb and 90 ppb, respectively, using the response registered by the transfer standard.
6.12.6.8.1 Return the ozone toggle switch to the center (zero) position.
6.12.6.8.2 Return the toggle switch for the sample/span solenoid to the sample position. Put the site
analyzer in "Remote" mode to turn off the zero-air system.
6.12.6.8.3 Initiate a Zero/Span/Precision by setting "OzoneZSP" to "true". Record the results on the
iForm.
6.12.6.8.4 Remove the transfer standard test tubing line, and cap the branch of the union tee.
6.12.7 Thermo Fisher Model 49i
6.12.7.1 Verify the 49i is in "Service Mode".
6.12.7.2 Record the existing percent lamp drive for Levels 1 through 4 in the "Lamp" field of the iForm.
Record the Level 5 percent lamp drive in the "remarks" section of the iForm.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOPv3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 20 of 78
6.12.7.3 Toggle the site analyzer into "Zero" mode using the "run" button and allow the site and transfer
analyzers to stabilize.
6.12.7.4 Simultaneously record the ten second averages of both instruments on the iForm. Record the
second five minute average for each instrument on the iForm.
6.12.7.5 Repeat the above procedure for Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4.
6.12.7.6 Adjust Level 5 of the Site analyzer to produce a concentration of 60ppb and allow the
concentration to stabilize. Record the percent lamp drive for Level 5 at 60 ppb in the "Lamp"
field for the "60" setting level in the iForm.
6.12.7.7 Again simultaneously record the ten second averages of both instruments on the iForm. Record
the second five minute average for each instrument on the iForm.
Ozone Audit Concentration Targets By Level: Model 49i
Zero Level
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
0
450ppb
300 -350ppb
200 - 225ppb
100- 125ppb
50 -70ppb
6.12.7.8 Check sample line loss by removing the calibration gas line, which is labeled "cal gas out", and
the sample line from the straight side of the tee connector on the rear of the site analyzer.
Remove the port connector that attaches the tee to the analyzer from the "sample in' port (site
analyzer) and connect it to the "cal gas out" port of the site analyzer. The site analyzer will still
be generating ozone, the transfer standard will be sampling from the "cal gas out" port, and the
vent will be inside the shelter where the site analyzer sample line was connected.
NOTE: Ozone will be venting inside the shelter at this time. Use a concentration of 100 ppb to
avoid any possible hazard.
6.12.7.9 Report the difference obtained by this connection, and that obtained in the step above at the
100 ppb target (through the entire sample train) as the line loss. Excessive line loss (greater than
5 percent) warrants further investigation as it implies a leak. After completing the line loss test,
return the calibration and sample lines to their original and proper positions. Document the line
loss in the remarks section of the iForm.
6.12.7.10 If line loss is greater than 5 percent determine if the leak is within the shelter and note on the
iForm whether the prior data is valid as an ambient sample taken at 10m. Note that the leak will
need repair and a re-audit or full calibration will be necessary.
6.12.7.11 Once fully populated the iForm will display the percent differences between the Transfer and
Site analyzers as well as the actual ozone concentrations measured. If the zero level has error ±3
ppb and/or any other level differs by 5 percent the site unit will need calibration.
6.12.7.12 If the line loss test resulted in a criterion failure repair the leak and document fully.
If the site analyzer passed audit got to step 6.12.8.8.
6.12.8 Adjustment / Calibration: Model 49i
6.12.8.1 Prior to calibration and following the audit, perform any repairs necessary. Replace the zero -air
desiccant and carbon if necessary.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionvQAPP 6.0 Ap - ] Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 21 of78
6.12.8.2 Fully leak check the entire system prior to calibrating and repair any and all leaks found. Do not
proceed with a calibration if leaks are present.
6.12.8.3 Put the site analyzer in "Zero" mode. Allow the concentrations to stabilize. The transfer should
read zero if no leaks are present and the zero-air system is working properly.
6.12.8.4 Once the transfer analyzer displays zero, adjust the site analyzer "Background" to make the site
unit match the transfer unit corrected response at zero.
6.12.8.5 Put the site analyzer in "Level 5. Allow the concentrations to stabilize. Adjust the "Level 5"
percent lamp drive to produce a transfer analyzer response of 450 ppb. Once stable at 450 ppb
adjust the "Coefficient" of the site analyzer until the site analyzer response matches the
corrected transfer analyzer response.
6.12.8.6 Repeat the previous two steps if necessary to produce consistent concentrations of 0 and
450 ppb responses of the transfer.
6.12.8.7 Repeat the audit process entirely, recording the results in the as left section of the iForm. Record
the new "Background" and "Coefficient" values for the site analyzer as well as all other
parameters of both instruments in the iForm. Record the "Background" and "Coefficient"
values in the site log-book.
6.12.8.8 Upon completion of the audit and/or calibration, set "Level 1" and "Level 5" percent lamp
drives to produce 400 ppb and 90 ppb, respectively in reference to the response registered by
the transfer standard. Record the percent lamp drives in the respective "Lamp" fields of the
iForm.
6.12.8.9 Turn "Service Mode" off.
6.12.8.10 Initiate a Zero/Span/Precision by setting "Ozone ZSP" to "true". Record the results on the
iForm.
6.12.8.11 Remove the transfer standard test tubing line, and cap the branch of the union tee.
6.13 Site Operator Training:
6.13.1 Familiarize the site operator with the sample train changes. It will be necessary for them to
remove the sample inlet to change the inlet filter. They may also be required to replace the
analyzer in the future, and should not be confused by the new tubing attachments.
6.13.2 Teach the site operator to perform a manual zero/span/precision. If the automatic z/s/p does not
function, or indicates a problem, the site operator will be asked to perform a manual check.
6.13.3 Be sure the site operator knows the pressure setting for the zero air regulator should be 15 psi,
and the potentiometer settings should remain unchanged.
6.13.4 Remind the site operator that when changing the desiccant in the zero air system, any leaks will
cause the pressure at the regulator to be too low. The site operator should confirm the z/s/p
results with the field coordinator during the Tuesday call-in.
6.14 Flow
6.14.1 Record the "Flow_FullScale" and "FlowjOffset" on the Flow iForm. These values are found on
4-Calibration-2 grid. Record the Flow transfer certification information: Nexus ID and
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transilion\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP'\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 22 of 78
certification date, and the Bios ID and certification date on the iForm. On the iForra also record
the as-found rotometer value and the MFC model, ID and potentiometer set-point.
6.14.2 Allow the transfer flow meter to warm for at least 1 hour, or until stable. Set "Ozone_down "
and "Flow_down " to "true". Unplug the flow pump. Note the time and hour-meter reading in
the log book.
6.14.3 Lower the flow tower. Remove the filter pack (using gloves or a clean plastic bag). Cap and
store the filter pack carefully in a clean plastic bag.
6.14.4 Perform a pump-on and then pump-off leak check. Record the results on the Flow iForm.
6.14.5 Connect the Flow transfer tubing to the quick connect fitting in the pothead. Connect the
remaining end to the right side of the Nexus unit.
6.14.6 Connect a jumper tube from the left side port of the Nexus to the outlet port on the Bios Dry
Cal. Uncap the Inlet port on the Bios Dry Cal. Connect the Nexus to the Bios Dry Cal using the
supplied parallel cable. Turn the Bios on and verify that it displays "Nexus Control". If "Nexus
Control" is not displayed push the white reset button on the rear of the Bios.
6.14.7 Plug in the flow pump. Start the Flow transfer so as to begin measuring.
6.14.8 Perform a leak check on the Flow transfer by capping the inlet fitting of the Bios Dry Cal. An
acceptable leak check value is anything less than 0.10 liters per minute (Lpm) from the existing
zero value. Record the result in the remarks section of the Flow iForm.
6.14.9 Remove the cap from the inlet port of the Bios Dry Cal and begin taking measurements of the
flow system flow rate.
6.14.10 Once stable readings are obtained, record the average existing flow (VAvg) and the average
existing STP corrected flow (SAvg) as reported by the Nexus on the Flow iForm. Record the
potentiometer set-point on the Flow iForm.
6.14.11 Record the MFC Display voltage as well as the data-logger flow voltage "Jlow_rate_v" as
found on either the 1 -Site Operator or 4-Calibration-2 grid in the Flow iForm.
6.14.12 Repeat the above procedure at one point 0.87 lpm above and one point 0.87 lpm below the
target set-point.
6.14.13 If the target flow rate varies from the Nexus SAvg reading by 2 percent or more, or if any point
varies from the Nexus by 2.5 percent or more the audit must be extended to include six points
detailed below. If any point varies from the Nexus SAvg measurement the MFC System shall
be replaced. See step 6.14.14. Otherwise proceed to step 6.14.15.
Target Calibration Flow Points for Eastern and Western CASTNET Sites (Lpm)
Eastern
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
1.75
2.00
2.25
Western
2.25
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
6.14.14 Following a six point audit the Flow iForm will compute new "Flow_FullScale " and
"FlowjOffset" values, transfer the new values to the data-logger through the 4-Calibration-2
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition'\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 23 of 78
grid. A new target potentiometer setting will also be computed. Record the new full-scale and
offset values in the site log book.
6.14.15 Set the MFC System potentiometer to its maximum value. Record SAvg as reported
Return the MFC System potentiometer to the proper setting: either the as-found for units
passing the three point audit or the iForm computed value for six point audit.
6.14.16 Perform one final audit at the target flow rate. Using the Nexus SAvg value, adjust the MFC
System potentiometer to achieve a flow rate of 1.50 or 3.00 as recorded by the data-logger for
the particular site. Record the result on the Flow iForm.
6.15 Solar Radiation
NOTE: Do not adjust the SR Sensor gain potentiometer when solar radiation values are less
than 300 Watts per square meter (W/m2). Adjustments should be made at the time
corresponding to peak incident solar radiation for the day. Ideally adjustment should occur
when incident SR is at or above 700 W/m2. Doing so will reduce the likelihood of overshoot in
the gain only sensor conditioner. If adjustment does not produce acceptable results, replace the
SR sensor and translator with a spare unit calibrated by MACTEC. Document the use of the
spare parts on the spare parts kit inventory sheet. At times it may not be possible to collect
adequate solar radiation data to perform a useful audit. It is suggested in such cases that the
site sensor be replaced with a calibrated spare unit. The removed system must be tagged for
post-calibration off site. The tag should include the sensor and translator number, site ID, date
of removal, reason for removal, date and name of technician.
6.15.1 Install the SR transfer sensor next to the site sensor. The transfer sensor must be level, secure
and unobstructed. The BNC connector should not contact metal. Do not level or clean the site
sensor prior to a full as-found audit.
6.15.2 Connect the SR Transfer signal wire (typ. red on the translator) to terminal #37 on the data-
logger surge protection terminal strip (adjacent to brown wire). Connect the transfer signal
reference wire (usually black on the translator) to terminal #38 (adjacent to white wire with
brown stripe). Plug the transfer sensor cable BNC connector into the transfer translator box.
6.15.3 Plug the translator power cord into an available wall outlet.
6.15.4 Ensure that "Calibrator OnSite" is "true".
6.15.5 Check for five-minute averages recorded by logger after five minutes have elapsed.
6.15.6 Collect two hours and thirty five minutes of data: thirty-one consecutive data points of five-
minute averages. The data point values should be above 300W/m2.
NOTE: Solar Radiation values less than 300 W/m2 should not be used in the audit process if
possible.
6.15.7 Collect the calibration data (W/m2) and use the "View" function of PC200 to access the
measurements. Omit the first five-minute average, using at least the last thirty values. Record
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 24 of 78
the timestamp of the first average entered and the SR iForm will populate the time values for
consecutive measurements. Record the data on the SR Calibration iForm.
6.15.8 Record the Transfer SR sensor slope, intercept, ID number and calibration date on the SR
iForm. The iForm will automatically correct the SR Transfer values.
6.15.9 The SR iForm will automatically calculate the maximum percent difference, and the percent
difference of the two sensors at max insolation. If either exceeds 5 percent the value will be
flagged in the iForm and the Site SR Sensor must be adjusted.
6.15.10 If weather conditions prohibit collection of peak level data, then the DMC may be contacted to
determine whether the solar radiation system has been matching satellite data. Also, consult
previous calibrations and audits to determine if any questions have arisen in regards to sensor
accuracy.
6.15.11 If all indications suggest proper sensor calibration and solar radiation levels are under
300 W/m2, do not adjust the system. If the accuracy of the system is questionable and the light
levels are too low for adjustment, replace the system with a system that was calibrated at
MACTEC.
6.15.12 Calibration / Adjustment
6.15.12.1 Level and clean the site SR sensor as necessary.
6.15.12.2 Remove the site SR sensor translator housing cover. The site SR Translator is located on the
data-logger backplane.
6.15.12.3 Remove the two screws that hold the translator PCB card in place.
6.15.12.4 Lift and fold the translator card out and down (from the top), out of the housing to expose the
gain potentiometer on the card's backside. Use caution to avoid damaging the solder connection
to the BNC bulkhead inside the translator housing (located at bottom left).
NOTE: Adjustment should ideally be performed at or above 700W/m2 If the system doesn't meet
the calibration criteria, then adjust at the highest light levels possible, preferably at mid-day
when readings are >400 W/m2. If daytime values are <400 W/m2 adjustment decision is left to
the calibrator's professional discretion. The adjustment potentiometer is a gain potentiometer,
so the higher the light level during the time of adjustment, the more accurate the calibration
will be at all light levels.
6.15.12.5 Adjust the gain potentiometer screw until the site sensor output is equal to the Corrected
Transfer SR sensor value. The site solar radiation instantaneous value "solar_radiation " and
"Transfer_SR" are found in the "3-Calibration" grid; however the SR transfer value
"Transfer SR " displayed should be corrected to Corrected Transfer SR value for the best
adjustment. To correct "Transfer SR" to the actual SR value use the following formula:
Corrected Transfer SR = (Tmnsfer SR - Transfer Intercept) / (Transfer Slope) Eq. 1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionVQAPP 6.0VAp - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 25 of 78
6.15.12.6Following adjustment repeat the audit process. Acquire another 31 five-minute averages and
record the results on the "as left" section of the SR iForm. .
6.16 Site Inventory
6.16.1 Using the current site equipment inventory list included in the calibration folder (Figures 2, 13,
and 14), verify that items are present. Note any differences. In addition, verify that a current set
of SOP's, Health & Safety Plan, and an up-to-date Site Narrative Log are present.
Record the serial number of any equipment found which normally or should but does not have
a property tag.
6.16.2 Tag and ship any redundant equipment not in use back to MACTEC. If unused equipment with
a property ID is onsite but not on the inventory list make note and tag and return to MACTEC.
6.17 Departure from site
6.17.1 Verify that "Calibrator_OnSite" is set to "false"
6.17.2 Review the instantaneous unit values of all parameters to ensure all systems are online and
operating properly.
6.17.3 Access the internet via the Raven Modem if the site is so equipped to ensure functional
communications.
6.17.4 Verify that all iForms and relevant paperwork are complete in entirety.
6.17.5 Note time of departure in log book.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1983. Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and
Wastes. (EPA 120.1), EPA-600/4-79-020. http://www.epa.gov/cincl.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiorAQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 26 of 78
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPo-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx MACTEC Engineering and Consulting. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 27 of 78
Figure 1: Ozone Calibration Sample Line Configuration (Page 1 of 2)
RevNo Revision note
Date
Signature Checked
• Sample Inlet
DIAGRAM 1
Troubleshooting Ozone
Ozone Sample Train Architecture
CASTNet Sites (MACTEC Adm)
Oct 9, 2008
Integrity Line I Cal Gas Line
Transports Ozone generated
by analyzer to sample train
for ZSP. Requires 15 PSI
Zero-Air pressure for normal
operation.
B
D
MACTEC Engineering & Consulting
Newberry Florida
I I I
CASTNet Ozone Sampling Architecture as used with
Thermo Model 49i Analyzers and Thomas Pump Zero-Air Systems:
RSM 100908 NOT TO SCALE
I I I I I
Edition
Sheet
1
A
B
C
D
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0VAp - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 28 of 78
Figure 1: Ozone Calibration Sample Line Configuration (Page 2 of 2)
1
I 2
3
I
4
RevNo
Revision note
Date
Signature
Checkec
A
B
C
D
DIAGRAM 2
Troubleshooting Ozone
10-10-08
OZONE SYSTEM ZERO-AIR DELIVERY ARCHITECTURE:
CASTNet sites equipped with Thomas Pumps
O-Rings in cannister caps are a
significant source of leakage and
should be checked when Zero-Air
pressure is less than 15 PSI.
Suction
Minimum Pressure here
Should exceed 15 PSI
MACTEC Engineering & Consulting
Newberry Florida
Thomas Pump
Note:
Pump orientation may be reversed due
to deviations in pump internal flapper orientation
but Air Flow Direction through the cannisters
must be maintained as shown.
The positive pressure side of the pump MUST
be connected to the cannister pair.
rzr
i r
Zero-Air System Plumbing Details
9 RSM 101008 NOT TO SCALE
I I I I "1
Edition
Sheet
A
B
D
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0VAp - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 29 of 78
Figure 2: Site Inventory List
CLEAN AIR STATUS AND TREND NETWORK SITE INVENTORY LIST
Sorted By EPA Bar Code Within Site
Thursday, October 15, 2009
:EPA BAR CODE
CASTNet # a
EQUIPMENT NAME A
: SERIAL #
;SITE IDA
811718
A-ANALYZER, OZONE
49-21969-202
KEF112
810726X
00440
A-PUMP, VACUUM
0000237
KEF112
06438
D-COMPACT FLASH
2469
KEF112
000256
D-COMPUTER, LAPTOP
3KFNHB1
KEF112
000414
D-DATA LOGGER
2537
KEF112
06455
D-MODEM, DIGITAL - RAVEN X CDMA
0808337420
KEF112
665593X
02204
^CONTROLLER, MASS FLOW
AW901294
KEF112
03406
F-POWERSUPPLY/READOUT, FLOW
FP9403009
KEF112
04854
F-PUMP, VACUUM
N/A
KEF112
880493X
03443
F-TOWER, FOLDING
N/A
KEF112
04867
M-MONITOR, AQ-WIND
58323
KEF112
492148X
02164
M-RAIN GAUGE, TIPPING BUCKET
498
KEF112
04726
M-SENSOR, RELATIVE HUMIDITY
80731
KEF112,
04566
M-SENSOR, SOLAR RADIATION
PY10653
KEF112
02999
M-SENSOR, TEMPERATURE
N/A
KEF112
06388
M-SENSOR, TEMPERATURE
13992
KEF112
03881
M-SENSOR, WETNESS
N/A
KEF112
492034X
01399
M-SHIELD, RELATIVE HUM/TEMP
N/A
KEF112
492033X
01398
M-SHIELD, TEMPERATURE
0137
KEF112
492064X
06487
M-TOWER, 10 METER
N/A
KEF112
04340
M-TRANSLATOR, SOLAR RAD
N/A
KEF112
811690
S-SHELTER, 8X8X10, ALUM
2149-14
KEF112
05001
S-UPS
QB0427147491
KEF112
Note: Bar codes are no longer used. Instead, inventory numbers are used to track equipment.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 30 of 78
Figure 3: Site Information Form
SITE INFORMATION
|: SiteName/Numfoer
Calibrator |
Start Date |
Start Time| | End Date |
End Time |
'Met' ManuSactur er
| STK138
AQS |
09/10/2009 || || |
I
R.M. Young
Site Equipment as Found
Parameter
Device
Manufacturer
Model
ID#
Signal Input/Output
Datalogger
Campbell Scientific
3000
000349
Temperature
10-m Thermistor
R.M. Young
43347
006407
2-m Thermistor
R.M. Young
43347
006406
10-m Signal Translator
R.M. Young
Relative Humidity
Sensor
Rotronics
MP-101-A
004602
Wind AQ
Vane
R.M. Young
n/a
Anemometer
R.M. Young
5305
006718
Translator
R.M. Young
Flow
Controller
Mykrolis
000238
MFC Display
MACTEC
004997
Precipitation
Tipping Bucket Gauge
Climatronics
100508-2
006282
Wetness
Sensor
R.M. Young
58101
006158
Ozone
Analyzer
TECO
49i
000373
Solar Radiation
Pyranometer
LiCor
Li-200
006140
Translator
R.M. Young
006633
Type
Calibration Equipment Used
Parameter
Device
Manufacturer
Model
ID#
Last Certificat
Signal Input/Output
Mulitmeter
Fluke
1671
6/5/2009
Voltage Source
Datel
C-350A
3111
8/24/2009
Temperature
RTD
Eutechnics
4600
4644
7/20/2009
Relative Humidity
Hygrometer
Rotronics
gtl
4638
8/24/2009
Humidity Chamber
VaporPak
476
Solar Radiation
Pyranometer
LiCor
Li-200
2694
8/20/2009
Transfer - Translator
6619
Flow
Transfer MFM
BIOS
Dry Cal Lite
4654
4/15/2009
Data Module
BIOS
Dry Cal Nexus
00587
3/23/2009
Ozone
Transfer - Analyzer
TECO
49c
83
8/24/2009
Wind
Transit
Brunton
5006
420
5/6/2009
Synchronous Motor
R.M. Young
6248
4/9/2009
Wetness
Mulitmeter
Fluke
1671
6/5/2009
Decade Box
Remarks"
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
:31 of 78
Figure 4: Calibration Result Summaries Form
Site Name 1
Calibrator
Calibration Date | Data Logger
STK138
AQS j
9/10/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:349
y~\ jr a / vim < f 5 *¦<.+* ^
Calibration Summaryi
Temperature
As Found
Max Error
diff «c
Transfer | 0.03 | [ 21.40 [ [T"
Temperature
0.19
Temperature 2/Delta [ 0.24 | | 21.30 | | 0.24 | | 0.21
Shelter Temperature j -0-08 | | 21.
21.11
Relative Humidity
>85
Transfer | 98.4 |
Site Sensor | 101.3 | ^
Other
68.4
Solar Radiation I Mean
watt/m*
Transfer
c
Max Total
watt/m* watt/m*
Site Sensor | 289 | | 565 [ | 11257 | j j
Wind Direction |
North
deg
Transfer
East
deg
90
South
de*
West
deg
Site Sensor [ 1.3 | [ 87.5
Windspeed
< 5
> 5 Max Error
m/s m/s
Transfer
Site Sensor
4.096
]0fDEfE]I
I 4.100 | | 8.190 | | 4.100 | |
Precipitation |lnehe.
Transfer | 0.50 |
Site Sensor I 0.49 I
Wetness
J
Dry
Transfer
Site Sensor
0.000
]~~
1 0 020 1 1 1 030 II II I
Flow
J
Transfer
Site Sensor
Nominal
tpm
1.485
Low
tpm
High
Ipm
] | 0.936 | [ 2.037 | £
1 I 0 950 I I 2M? I I I
Ozone
J
Max Error
Transfer
Site Sensor
[
Slope Intercept
ppb
1.010
1.000
| 3.1264 | [ 1.020 | [ -0.715 [ | 1.000 |
As Left
Zero Ambient Max Error
°r «r t. d»rrec
~ [
]| II I
]~~
< 50 Other
ii ii i
Mean Max Total
waft/m* watt/m* watt/m* watt/rrf
North East
deg deg
South West
deg deg
~ii90 iiiso ir
0.0
> 5 Max Error
m/s m/s mls
U | 8.192 | | 4.096 | £
Inches inches
inches inches
Dry
]~~
]~~
Nominal Low High
Ipm Ipm Ipm Ipm
~ ~~[111
Max Error Slope Intercept
% ppb
~ ~~~
Remarks
replaced temp blowers and testec
replaced rh tip
very foggy for many hours so light
was low
replaced nosecone for maint.
returning an extra wetness sensor
found at sight that is broken
replaced balston filter, ferrulles,
and dtaphram
replaced charcoal and dessicant
>ite Remarks
DAS Remarks
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 32 of 78
Figure 5: Data Logger Calibration Form
^MACTEC Data Logger Calibration
SiteName
STK138
Calibrator
Calibration Date
AQS
9/10/2009
iForms Ver.
1.2.0.0
Datalogger
As Found
As Left
MultiMeter
Voltage Source
000349
ID#
01671
ID#
03111
MSg./Model
Campbell 3000
M£g.
Fluke
Model
Datel DVC-350A
Cert; Date
6/5/2009
Cert. Date
8/24/2009
Data Logger Signal Accuracy
Voltage Source
Digital MultiMeter
Datalogger Reading As Found
As Left
Output
Reading
Voltage
Diff
Max Channel Diff
Voltage Max Channel
0.0000
0.0000
-0.0005
-0.0005
wdir
0.1000
0.1000
0.0995
-0.0006
wdir
0.2000
0.2000
0.1992
-0.0008
wdir
0.3000
0.3000
0.2997
-0.0003
wetness
0.4000
0.4000
0.3996
-0.0004
wdir
0.5000
0.5000
0.4997
-0.0004
wetness
0.6000
0.6000
0.5995
-0.0005
wdir
0.7000
0.7000
0;6998
-0.0002
flow
0.8000
0.8000
0.7996
-0.0004
wdir
0.9000
0.9000
0.8997
-0.0003
wdir
1.0000
1.0000
0.9998
-0.0002
wdir
"¦ - .
\ -
¦ ••
Backup Battery Volatge
Climatronics Mainframe
Power Supply Voltage
Status Switches
Channels Changed
With Charger
12.9
(+)
As Found
Without Charger
(-)
As Left
Remarks:
jA S/A\A/i ;
Reviewd By:
Date;
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0vAp - ) Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 33 of 78
Figure 6: Temperature Calibration Form
Temperature
SiteName
Calibrator
Calibration Date
:Data^Logger
ilormv Ver.
STK138
AQS
9/10/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:349
1.2.0.0
lO Meter (Tit
X Meter fT*!
As Found
:As Found ;
As Left
06407
06406
Description
RTD
RTD
Manufacturer
R.M. Young
R.M. Young
Model
43347
43347
Ro
Alpha:
Translator Type ¦'.
Transfer Standard
ID#
04644
,v: Manufacturer
Eutechnics
Model
4600
Date of Last Cert*
7/20/2009
Correction
factors
o°
40°
SO°
0.00
0.02
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.02
As Found | Temperature Datalogger Output-
RTD (°C)
Temperature (10m) Output
Temperature 2 (2m) Output
Delta T.
. ShelterTemperature
Uncorrected Cbrrectioir Corrected
Teitip. ; • Factor :: Terrip. (°C)
¦ Raw?; -< V j torre'cted rr. .Rsiw- V;';;Corrected-;
Temp. (°C): TempV (°G) Diff (°C).' 'Diff (°C)-;
: Raw-Xorretted- ;/•; /Corrected •
temp. (^C) fernp; (°C) Diff (?C): ^b^ff :(°C)j:
:., D iff; (°G.
; j:piff ;(°G) V
0.03 0.00 0.03
0.19 0.16
0.24 0.21
-0.05
-0.02
0.04
-0.08 -0.11
21.37 0.03 21.40
21.28 -0.12
21.30 -0.10
21.11 -0.29
50.01 0.02 50.03
49.88 -0.15
49.84 -0.19
49.74 -0.29
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition^QAPP 6.0\Ap - ) Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 34 of 78
Figure 7: Relative Humidity Calibration Form
Relative Humidity
SiteName
Calibrator
Calibration Date
Datalogger
IFormsVer.
STK138
AQS
9/10/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:M9
1.2.0.0
RHSensor:
Humidity Chamber
Transfer Standard
AsFoiuid
r. '—Asi***;:- "
ID #
04602
00476 .
04638
'Description
RH
- Manufacturer
VaporPak
: : Manufacturer
Rotronics
Manufacturer
Rotronics
• ^ Model
Model
MP-101-A
Date of Last Cert;
- Dateof Last Cert.
8/24/2009
Translator ID #
. ¦ Correction Factors
Manufacturer
• io%
V.30%
50%
70%
v'85%;;
¦ Zero .
-0.60.
-0.30
-0.20
-0.30
0.20
0.60
Span- •
AsFound
Relative Humidity Datalogger- Output
Portable Hygrometer:
Correction Factor
Ecjuwalent Relatiye.'Humidity
•P.atalogg^rG^tputy.
Diff
0.6%
-0.3%
-0.3%
98.40%
37.10%
68.40%
2.9%
-0.3%
0.9%
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transit iomQAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOPV3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 35 of 78
Figure 8: Solar Radiation Calibration Form
^MACTEC
11
Site Name
STK138
Calibrator
AQS
Calibration Date
9/10/2009
Data Logger
Campbell 3000 ID:349
Sensor
As Found
As Lett
ID#
06140
-Description
Pyronometer
Manufacturer
LiCor
Model
Li-200
Translator ID #
06633
¦¦.¦¦¦¦ Manufacturer;
R.M. Young
Zero
Span
IForms Ver.
1.2.0.0
Transfer Standard
02694
Manufacturer
LiCor
Model
Li-200
Date of Last Cert.
8/20/2009
Slope
0.97210
Intercept
8.92460
Translator ID #
06619
As Found
Transfer
Sensor:
Time
Transfer
Sensor
Transfer
Sensor
W/m2 ;
W/m2
W/m2
W/m2
W/m"
W/m2
7:00
147
144
8:05
179
172
9:10
296
264
7:05
168
164
8:10
188
181
9:15
354
341
7:10
171
166
8:15
207
200
! 9:20
409
395
7:15
140
135
8:20
223
215
9:25
433
422
7:20
154
148
8:25
217
208
9:30
373
362
7:25
207
201
8:30
236
225
9:35
343
331
7:30
292
288
8:35
292
281
9:40
373
361
7:35
246
241
8:40
.293
281
9:45
459
446
7:40
220
214
8:45
277
266
9:50
490
478
7:45
257
250
8:50
290
279
9:55
531
521
7:50
268
261
8:55
296
286
10:00
574
565
7:55
223
216
9:00
286
275
10:05
542
532
8:00
186
179
9:05
269
255 .
10:10
516
508
As Found
As Left
Transfer
Sensor
% Diff
Transfer
Sensor
% Diff
Total 11625
Total 11257
-3.2%
Total
Total
Adj. Max.
581
Max
565
Adj. Max.
Max
Adj. Average
297.5
Average
288.6
-3.0%
Adj. Average
Average
very foggy for many hours so light was low
f 1
* fl' 0
j
Reviewd By: . ^h^lljf\AA ^
°ate: 9 j 0-3-
o°\
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0 Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
: 36 of 78
winci
| Site Name |
Calibrator • .
Calibration Date
| . Datalogger
| iFormsVer.
[ 5TK138 [
AQS
9/10/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:349
| 1.2.0.0
WindDirection
Windspeed ...
As Found
•• As LeSt
As Found
As LeSt ¦
ID*
06718
06718
06718
Description
Wind AQ
Wind AQ
Wind AQ
Manufacturer
R.M. Young
R.M. Young
R.M. Young
Model
5305
5305
5305
Torque
< 10 g/cm
| < 0.3 g/cm |
< 0.2 g/cm
: Vane/Prop ID # .
n/a
62238
62238
TranslatorID.#
Translator
Manufacturer •
"T3T»e. -;-
¦•':.2^rO¦ •*¦:
¦: .:-'Span-.".;.
Transit
ED#
00420
Manufacturer
Brunton
Model
5006
'Date oSXastCert.
5/6/2009
Synchronous Motor
ID#
06248
Manufacturer
R.M. Young
Model
Date oS Last: Cert*
¦4/9/2009
Wind SystemMSg.
R.M. Young
Magnetic Declination
Degrees
1.0°
Direction-
West
Wind Direction
As Found
As Left
Crossarm Alignment
.Wheel Indication
Alignment King
180°
True
Direction
True
: Bearing.
Wheel
indication
Datalogger Output
. Degrees
Diff
True
: Bearing
Datalogger Output
Degrees
Diff
~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
South
East
West
Crossover Entry
Crossover Exit
180.0°
90.0°
270.0°
357.0°
3.0°
180.0°
90.0°
270.0°
357.0°
3.0°
2.4°
-2.5°
-2.9°
-2.5°
-1.7°
180.0°
90.0°
270.0°
Windspeed
As Found
As LeSt
; PropCorrectionFactor
Prop Correction Factor
0.00512
0.00512'
RPM
•. Frequency
m/s
Datalogger Output
. Frequency
V m/s ..
• Datalogger Output v . -
m/s r |
"V:pp
Diff
0
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
100
0.51
0.51
0.00
0.51
0.51
0.00
200
1.02
1.02
0.00
1.02
1.02
0.00
400
2.05
2.05
0.00
2.05
2.05
0.00
800
4.10
4.10
0.00
4.10
4.10
0.00
1600
8.19
8.19
0.00
8.19
8.19
0.00
3600
18.43
18.43
0.00
18.43
18.43
0.00
8600
44.03
44.03
0.00
44.03
44.03
0.00
Kemarks"
replaced nosecone for maint.
y/jsL/'&l
Revfewd By:
P:\ECM P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ) Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 37 of 78
Figure 10: Precipitation Calibration Form
Pj^gggggfl^
Precipitation
Site Name
STK138
Calibrator
AQS
Calibration Date
9/10/2009
Data Logger
Campbell 3000 ID: 349
TippingBucket Gauge
As Found
As LeSt
Manufacturer
Ctimatronics
Model
100508-2
ID#
06282
IForms Ver.
I
1.2.0.0
Wetness Sensor
As Found
As Left
Manufacturer
R.M. Young
Model
58101
ID#
06158
Tipping Bucket Rain Gauge
Volume >1,0
Time/Tip
Datalogger Output
As Found
As Left
?- ¦.rttL'
| inches :>:i
Seconds
As Found | As Left
231.5
0.50
11.0
0.49
Clean
Yes
Yes
231.5
0.50
Level
Yes
Yes
231.5
0.50
Heater OK
Yes
Yes
231.5
0.50
Screen In
No
Yes
Wetness
Dry
Wet
As Found | As Left
As Found | As Left
Decade Box Test
Output Volts DC
0.015
1.029
On (k<5) Off fkO}
235 245
Output Units
0.020
1.030
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiorr.QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 38 of 78
\ Mass FlowController /
MFC Display
As Found -
: AsFound .
AsXeft •. .-•••••••
ID#
000238
04997
• Description
MFC
Display
Manufacturer
Mykrolis
MACTEC
Model
•• • Serial-#
. aw06273005
Full Scale .
1.080
•. •..••'•::-;'5Cero .
0.000
Pofe Setting ••
273
Rotameter
1.51pm
Pump MaxFlow
5.246 1pm
Transfer Mass Flow Meter;
ID#
4654
Manufacturer
BIOS
Model
Dry Cal Lite
. Date of Last Cert;
4/15/2009
Data Module
lb#
00587
Manufacturer
BIOS
Model
Dry Cal Nexus
Date of Last Cert; •
3/23/2009
¦ Transfer Flow
Site MFC
'•'•.;.:yoItage'-";'
Flow 1pm
."V: % DiH '
Display
STP
Display
Pump Off (Zero Value)
0.000
0.00
0.000
0.000
Leak Check
0.04
0.043
0.046
Exisiting Flow
1.495
1.485
1.38
1.388
1.499
0.9%
Adjusted Zero Value
0.000
Adjusted Leak Check
0.04
0.042
0.046
Pot. Setting 173
0.944
0.936
0.88
0.880
0.950
1.5%
Pot. Setting 373
2.055
2.037
1.89
1.895
2.047
0.5%
Pot. Setting
Flow As Left (Unadj.)
1.513
1.480
1.38
1.387
1.498
1.2%
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 39 of 78
Figure 12. Ozone Calibration Form
Site Name
| v : Calibrator :
j I Calibration Date: : ; I
Data logger
11 iForms Ver.
STK138
| AQS
| 9/10/2009 j
Campbell 3000 ID:349
[ | 1.2.0.0
Setting:
: Lamp:
zero
Setting:
Lamp:
450 ..y!
• Setting:
Lamp:
300 ,:V
: Setting:
Lamp:
200
Setting:
Lamp:
106 •
• Setting:
Lamp:
. 60
37.9% .
. : 30.0% i
i" 24.5% '
a- 18.7% '
15.8% .
Analyzer
.Transfer:
..Analyzer.
. Transfer.i
VA^alyzery
Transfers
Analyzer
Transfer
• Analyzer, -
's»; Transfer?-;
Analyzer.
: Transfer
1
0 0
1 2
451 451
446 447
307 307
306 304
206 206
206 204
104 104
103 103
59 58
60 58
2
1 -1
1 2
452 451
446 447
307 306
305 304
206 206
206 205
103 105
102 103
59 59
59 58
3
0 0
1 2
452 452
446 447
306 307
305 303
206 206
206 204
104 104
103 103
59 59
59 58
4
0 -1
2 2
452 451
446 447
307 306
305 305
206 206
206 204
104 104
102 103
59 58
58 58
5
0 -1
1 2
451 451
446 448
306 307
306 304
206 206
205 205
104 104
102 102
59 59
60 58
Average
0
2
451
447
307
305
206
205
104
103
59
59
Actual
1
442
301
203
101
58
Percent
Difference
1.6 ppb
2.15%
1.71K
1.55%
2.56%
1.65%
Average
0
1.72
451
447
307
306
206
206
106
104
59
59
Actual
0
1.5
451
442.3
307
302.7
206
203.8
106
102.8
59
58.2
Perce rrt
Difference
1.5 ppb
1.97%
1.41%
1.1035
3.13%
1.30%
* Values bated enSminute DAS Averages
Site'Analyzer ¦
Transfer v •
StatfHanf: A-
Site Analyzer
Transfer
¦ As-.Fonnd'v;.::| • \ As-Left:
As Found I.... As Left
Manufacturer
TECO
TECO
Pressure (mmHg)
692 mmHg
.686 mmHg
Model
491
49c
Cell Temperature (°C)
34.5 °C
31.5 «C
ID#
000373
000083
Zero Air Pressure
15 psi
n/a
Voltage
Output
Zero
0.00
0.00
Correlation
1.0103
Full Scale
1.0
1.0
Slope
1.020
-0.715 ppb
1.000
Offset or Bkg.
0
0.2
Intercept
0.1600
Span or Coef.
1.015
1.066
R2
1.0000
A | B | A B
A | B
AutoCal Results
V y^Left - '
Date of Last .Certification:
8/24/2009
Cell Freq. (kHz)
80 . 90
106 98
Cell Noise
0.9 Hz 1.0 Hz
1.0 Hz 1.0 Hz
Zero
Span
Precision
-0.19
Remarks
Cell Flow (Ipm)
0.717 0.714
0.601 0.644
397.0
replaced charcoal and dessicant
Lamp Level
88.2
ReviewdBy: I
Date:
°j iMLlol
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPo-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 40 of 78
Figure 13 Site Condition Checklist
CASTNet Site Condition Checklist
Site Name:
Site Location:
Assessed? Assessed?
(check for yes) Structure Repair needed/comments (check for.yes) Structure Repair needed/comments
Shelter:
Flow Tower:
Roof
Base
Door Hinges
Tower
Door Stop
Guys
Floor
Guy anchors'
Cleanliness
Tubing (teflon or Tygon)
Counters
Pot head secure
Wall Panel Yes/No
Swag line
Fire extinguisher4
Tubing ok at hinge
AJC-
MET Tower:
Ground MET Gear
Base
SR Mount Secure
Tower
SR clean/level
Guys
TB mount secure/level/clean
Guy anchors'
Wetness sensor secure
Cross-arm/
All sensor wiring
North indicator/
tied/protected from
Set screws
weed-eater damage
Wires neat/wire ties
Amphenol connectors
corrosion free
Tower rest (down)
Notes:
1. Please inspect guy anchors just below grade to check corrosion
2, Be sure that all sensor wiring is sheathed and/or tied against mounting pole
3. Check that all wiring inside arid outside is clean and secure.
4. If fire extinguisher charge is ok, invert extinguisher arid tap bottom to mix dry chemicals.
C:\OocumcnU »idSttti;y;s'1jiiiir DtKun>rBls»Sttc Condition Checklist
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 41 of 78
Figure 14 System Audit Form
Systems Audit Form
Site ID: Site Location:
Performed By:
Date: Others Present:
Audit Items
Yes/No
Comment
¦ Does the site appear to be clean, organized, and well
maintained both inside and outside?
«Does the instrument shelter have adequate working
room?
• Has the Site Condition Checklist been completed?
• Is the site properly grounded?
• Does the site appear to be safe and reasonably hazard
free?
• Is a fire extinguisher with current charge present?
• Is a first aid kit present?
• Does the site exhibit adequate spacing from nearby
features, natural or man-made, that may alTect the:
monitored parameters?
(e.g. talfirecbuildings, steep slopes, hotloyvs. parking bis, etc)
• Is the ground surface surrounding the site natural
material?
(e.g. grass, dirt, brush, cSc.)
• Are the wind speed and direction sensors sited so as to
avoid being influenced by any. obstructions?
\l.e. If'S ami WD sensors siwuld be sited on level, open terrain and no closer to
Jtiy obstruction, natural or man-made, than I Ox the height of that obstruction.)
• Are the wind speed and wind direction sensors mounted
so as to minimize tower effects?
(i.e.. WS.and WD sensors should he mourned oh iop of the tower, or oh a boatn
that extends horizontally into ike pre vailing wind, and spaced >Zx the
•riaximimdiumeier of the lower away from the nearest point ontheIbwer.)
• Are the tower and WS/WD sensors plumb?
• Are the temperature probe inlets pointed north or
otherwise positioned to avoid radiated heat sources such
as buildings, walls. etc?
• Are the temperature and RH sensors sited to avoid
unnatural conditions?
Che. Ground surface helow the temperature and JiH sensors must not he
:oncrefc ar asphalt. Sleep slopes, ridges, hollows and areas afstanding water
¦ Is the solar radiation sensor plumb and positioned to
avoid shading, or any artificial or reflected light sources
such as buildings, walls, lamps. etc.?
• Is the rain gauge plumb and positioned to avoid
sheltering effects from buildings, trees, etc?
• Do the sample inlets have at least a 270 degree arc of
unrestricted airflow?
• Do the sample inlets meet acceptable siting Criteria?
(i.e. Vie sample inlets should be 3-15 meters above grvtthd, >J mfrotn aity
rnaior ohsiruciion. anrf >20 hi from trees.)
• Does the site have all the required instrument manuals?
• Are the report forms arid site log properly completed
and current?
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 42 of 78
APPENDIX A:
MAGNETIC DECLINATION ADJUSTMENTS
Current scientific theory states, in essence that the Earth's magnetic field is produced by
complex electric currents generated by the interaction of the planet's solid iron inner core, the
outer core magma and it's insulating mantle. The resulting field is complex (see figure below)
and can be described as various magnetic dipoles, each with a different intensity and
orientation. When a compass needle aligns itself with the magnetic lines of force at a given
location, it's actually reacting according to the sum of the effects of the dipoles at that location.
The difference between the compass reading (magnetic north) and true north (the Earth's
northern rotational axis) is called the magnetic declination.
2000
Declination (degrees east)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOPY3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 43 of 78
If the compass needle points west of true north, the offset is designated as west declination. If it
points east of true north, the offset is designated as east declination.
Declination adjustment
For accurate geographic readings, compass bearings must be adjusted to compensate for
magnetic declination. The procedure varies from compass to compass.
For the Brunton compass, CASTNET procedure is to leave the compass ring with the index pin
at north on the dial and 0° on the alignment ring and add or subtract according to the site
location's known declination. In the example below the index pin is aligned with true north and
the compass needle is pointed toward magnetic north at a site with 15° east magnetic
declination (counterclockwise | add2):
S~
/
2 i.e. add to magnetic compass reading to find true (azimuth) geographic direction. In the example
provided, magnetic north is at 345° and true north is +15° away at 0°.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 44 of 78
In the next example the index pin is aligned with true north and the compass needle is pointed
toward magnetic north at a site with 15° west magnetic declination (clockwise | subtract3):
3 i.e. subtract from magnetic compass reading to find true (azimuth) geographic direction. In the
example provided, magnetic north is at 15° and true north is -15° away at 0°.
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 45 of 78
When performing wind direction calibrations, the compass reading will show the expected magnetic
declination when the cross-arm is aligned with the sight line on the mirror if the cross-arm is properly
aligned with true north. The cross arm at each CASTNET site should be aligned with true north-south.
See the figure below for an example of correct cross-arm alignment at a site with 10° west magnetic
declination:
- Mesp«ticNorth; T- Cross-Am
Cross-arm with correct
orientation to true north-
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 46 of 78
The figure below shows an example of incorrect cross-arm alignment at a site with 10° west magnetic
declination. In this example the cross-arm requires adjustment 5° toward the west to be properly
aligned with true north.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 47 of 78
Appendix B
Installation of Campbell CR3000 Datalogger at CASTNET Sites
Utilizing RM Young Meteorological Sensor Equipment
Scope:
This document details the installation procedure of pre-assembled Campbell CR3000
data-logger units at sites using Thermo-Electron: model 49i ozone analyzers, Models 43C-TLE,
42 CY and 48C-TLE Trace Gas Analyzers, Model 146C Gas Calibrator, and R.M. Young
meteorological sensor equipment. A summary of modifications to currently existing site sensor
equipment required for CR3000 compatibility is included. Supporting documents include wiring
diagrams for the backplane assembly and sensors (attachment 1), communication equipment and
the interface terminal box installed at most sites. Supporting documentation includes
configuration instructions for the 49i Ozone analyzer (appendix 1), configuration instructions for
site laptop computers (appendix 2), data-logger backplane wiring chart (attachment 1), met
interface box wiring chart (attachment 2), model 49i wiring chart (attachment 3), and
communication equipment wiring diagram.
Summary of Site Sensor / Hardware Modification:
In order to install and operate a Campbell CR3000 at a CASTNET site, a variety of
hardware changes need to be made. These are as follows:
1. DATA ACQUISITION
ODESSA DSM 3260, ESC 8816 and H2NS CPP4794 data-loggers will be replaced with pre-assembled
CAMPBELL CR3000 data-logger units, Fig 1. These CR3000 deployment units consist of a fully
assembled module consisting of: backplane, wiring harness, surge protection/sensor interface terminal
strip, shelter temperature sensor, blower motor power supply, modem (either RAVEN X H4222-C
cellular or Campbell COM220 landline), R.M. Young solar radiation translator and analog interface
terminals used for transfer equipment and as back-up connection points for ozone analyzers.
2. WIND SENSOR
The R.M. Young wind AQ sensor does not require a translator circuit when used with the CR3000. The
new sensor configuration will instead use a standard R.M. Young interface card bearing one of the
following part numbers: 05178A (Large) or 05178 (Small). These interface cards must also be equipped
with a pull-down resistor and fully isolated signal reference grounds.
NOTE: Earlier interface cards bearing the same part numbers were equipped with a pull-up resistor, a
wind speed signal filter capacitor and common signal references. Part numbers alone may not
be sufficient to identify the proper interface card; for full details see the CR3000 sensor
hardware modification SOP.
P:\ECM\PvCASTNET 4 - transitionVQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPV3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.doc.x
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 48 of 78
The CR3000 wind sensor configuration will require the retrofit of a six conductor cable with three
individually shielded wire pairs. This is to isolate the signal wires from the excitation pulses sent to the
sensor. Prior installations used four conductor cables with common power and signal ground. The
switched voltage source for these sensors will be provided from the VX port on the data-logger.
Upgraded surge protection is provided on the pre-assembled CR3000 units consisting of SLKK5 series
gas discharge tube (GDT) spark gap arrestors on the following sensor outputs: WD SIG, WD REF and
WD EXC. Prior installations using other data-loggers use SLKK5 series metal oxide varistors (MOVs)
which are incompatible with the CR3000.
3. TEMPERATURE
The R.M. Young temperature sensors do not require translator circuits either. The new sensor
configuration instead uses a standard R.M. Young probe with a PCB/terminal block bearing the part
number 43345B (New style) or NOT BEARING A PART NUMBER (Old style). External translators on
existing temperature probes must be removed as part of this installation. Internally translated temperature
probes will have to be replaced with modified probes lacking this circuitry. The switched current source
for these sensors is provided from the IXC ports on the data-logger.
Upgraded surge protection is also provided for this sensor. It consists of SLKK5 series GDT spark gap
arrestors on the following sensor outputs: SENS +, SENS - and RTD +.
NOTE: A critical note regarding temperature probes installed with CR3000's:
NEVER GROUND THE TEMPERATURE CABLE SHIELD WIRES!
4. ASPIRATED TEMPERATURE SHIELDS
Blower motor power supplies for the R.M. Young aspirated temperature housings are an integral part of
the pre-assembled CR3000 unit. Any blower motor power supply not supplied with the CR3000
backplane unit will need to be removed at the time of the CR3000 installation. Blowers will need to be
wired as N.C. if not already.
CR3(
>00 Blower Power and Status Wiring
N.C.
Green
+5VDC
COM
White
Step Power 15VDC +
"Pos"
Red
Step Power 15VDC Gnd
"Neg"
Black
5. SHELTER TEMPERATURE
Campbell model 107 shelter temperature probes will be installed with each CR3000 unit. This probe will
ship with the CR3000 unit but will not be integrated into the backplane wiring to allow for future
replacement.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0VAp - 1 Field SOP 3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 49 of 78
6. OZONE ANALYZER
Thermo model 49-103 and model 49C ozone analyzers will be replaced by Thermo Model 49i Ozone
analyzers. Additionally Thermo model 491, 42C-TLE, 42CY, 43C-TLE, 48C-TLE analyzers and 146C
gas calibrators will be connected to the CR3000 via RS-232 serial cable. Operation in this mode requires
each instrument to be configured with a unique Instrument Identification Number as specified in the
installation SOP. In all cases the Thermo model 49i ozone analyzer will be connected to the data-logger
using an industry standard DE-9 null-modem serial cable, a standard Ethernet cable and via analog two-
conductor. Each data-logger will be equipped with a Campbell Scientific NL115 Ethernet port adapter to
accommodate IP addressability. Trace gas analyzers and dilution equipment will be daisy-chained to the
49i with industry standard DE-9 straight serial cables.
NOTE: Current production 49i ozone analyzers are experiencing frequent LCD screen failures that also
result in the cessation of digital data transfer over the Ethernet port. Since analogue and RS-232
serial communications are unaffected, a back-up channel is being provided to ensure data
capture. Until the manufacturer resolves this problem, all 49i installations will use Ethernet, RS-
232 serial and analogue data capturing connections.
7. SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
Tipping Buckets, Wetness Sensors, RH Sensors, SR Sensors and Flow systems require no modification.
Wetness, RH, and SR devices will now be powered from the CR3000 12VDC ports.
8. RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Relative Humidity will be measured in the same process as with previous data-logger configurations: as a
single ended measurement. Because current RH sensors use a common signal and power ground however,
the CR3000 RH signal input will have the measurement reference signal tied to power ground. An extra
terminal and associated wiring has been incorporated into the new CR3000 pre-assembled backplane unit
to allow for future upgrade of RH probes to sensors with isolated grounds.
9. MET TOWER INTERFACE BOX
If site is equipped with a meteorological sensor interface box at the met tower base; the terminal strip
inside must be modified to mirror the terminal strip on the CR3000 assembly in accordance with the
diagram in attachment 3, CR3000: RMY Sensor to Met Tower Interface Box Wiring (version
4/22/08). This strip must not use MOVs, only electrically isolated terminal blocks. No shield wires should
reach electrical ground potential in this terminal box. Power supplies (if present) and extraneous hardware
with the exception of extra cables previously installed to facilitate future expansion must all be removed.
CR3000 Pre-assembled Data-Logger Installation Procedure:
Perform a full unadjusted field audit of the existing sensor equipment in accordance with CASTNET
QAPP Rev. 4.0 (or most current).
P:\ECM\P CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 50 of 78
Remove the existing surge protection assembly, translators, terminal blocks, data logger, printer,
communication equipment, ozone analyzer (if not model 49i), Wind AQ, Temperature probes and any
sensor found to be inoperative. Remove any extraneous wiring accessories as well. The following items
should be left intact if found operational: Flow systems, pumps, zero air canisters, plumbing and extra SR
or sensor back up cables. Any item bearing E.P.A. property tag that is removed should be noted on the
site inventory sheet as removed. Such property must also be tagged. Tags should include site number,
date and reason for removal as well as the operational condition as found. This equipment should be
shipped to MACTEC, Inc.
Mount the pre-packaged CR3000 assembly directly to the shelter wall using the supplied toggle bolts and
jam nuts at a location which allows for sufficient strain relief of cables and convenient access to the
assembly. If the wall or only available mounting location is metal, the pre-assembled backplane must be
electrically isolated from Line A/C ground. All wiring should be neatly routed and securely mounted to
the pre-assembled data-logger unit. A six foot length of Panduit, mounting hardware and swiveling ty-rap
anchors are included with each installation kit to facilitate neat organization of wiring.
Attach the DIN mounted backplane grounding terminal (# 44 green/yellow terminal block) directly to an
exterior Vi" x 8' copper plated steel grounding rod using 10GA wire and a 5/8" grounding lug. If site has
no grounding rod at shelter; one must be installed at a convenient location.
NOTE: NEVER attach the backplane ground to an A/C ground, A/C conduit or power line service
panel.
All sites will receive a router at minimum. Mount router and Raven modem (if Verizon or AT&T cellular
access available) on the shelter wall near the data-logger such that the activity lights of both units may be
observed. Cables are as short as 16". Connect the router to the site equipment according to Attachment 4.
Install the Raven Modem antenna, using Ace View to test various locations for the best signal strength
(RSSI) prior to permanent installation. It is critical to establish communications as early as possible in the
installation process. This will allow early remote confirmation of site and communications operations to
facilitate departure from the site.
Existing sensor cables should be replaced with pre-tagged cables included in the installation kit. The
supplied installation kit contains cables appropriate for sites using swag lines or met interface boxes as
necessary. In some cases however the new cables must be made on site due to unusual site layouts or
other factors. See attachment 1, CR3000: RMY to CR3000 Backplane Wiring (version 4/22/08) for
appropriate tag colors for each signal cable. New cables for the ozone analyzer and the flow system are
included with the CR3000 installation kit as well.
NOTE: Replace existing four-conductor wind sensor cable with six-conductor.
If site is equipped with a met tower interface box; install new cables on the meteorological tower using
the supplied pre-tagged cables. Cables should be installed in like manner to cables as found. Some may
utilize buried conduit while others may simply hang from the tower. See attachment 3, for appropriate tag
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 51 of 78
colors and terminal locations. Install/Reconfigure DIN Rail terminal block assembly in the met interface
box as detailed in this attachment. Shields must not be grounded within the met tower interface box or to
any sensor Earth/Ground. Shield wires must pass through this terminal block strip and only be connected
to Earth on the CR3000 backplane terminal strip.
Replace the R.M. Young wind AQ Sensor/Translator assembly and four conductor wiring with a CR3000
compatible R.M. Young wind AQ and six conductor cable with individually shielded twisted pairs. Install
the new wiring in accordance with diagrams presented in attachments 1 and 3.
Replace any internally translated temperature probes with CR3000 compatible probes. Ensure that
temperature probe cables are long enough to allow the probes to be brought into the shelter a distance
sufficient to allow the shelter temperature probe and both temperature probes to be located together near
an electrical outlet for audit.
Organize sensor cables in shelter and connect to CR3000 terminal strip according to "Campbell CR3000
to R.M. Young Wiring Installation Chart 1: Data-Logger Assembly".
NOTE: Do NOT connect the temperature 1 or temperature 2 cable shield wires to the backplane
assembly.
Install Thermo-Electron Corporation Model 49i Ozone analyzer in accord with attachment 2, CR3000:
49i Analyzer to Zero-Air Relay Box (version 4/22/08). If site is equipped with an uninterruptible power
source (UPS), plug the ozone analyzer into the UPS, otherwise plug it into a surge protected A/C outlet.
The data-logger backplane comes pre-wired with a DE9F serial cable. Connect the cable to the outboard
DE9M serial port on the 49i back panel. Plug both DB37 terminal blocks into the corresponding port on
the analyzer rear panel: These are labeled "Digital Inputs" and Digital Outputs" and ship as a pre-
assembled unit. The analyzer ships pre-configured but proper configuration should be verified as
documented in appendix 1, Configuration of Thermo-Electron Model 49i Ozone Analyzer for use
with Campbell CR3000 D.A.S. and Externally Switched Zero-Air Pumps.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPG-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 52 of 78
If trace gas analyzers are present at the site, daisy chain the analyzers to each other and the ozone analyzer
using "straight" DE9F to DE9F cables. Ensure D.I.P. switches are set to enable serial operation. Set the
Baud Rate to 9600 for each analyzer. Set the instrument I.D. for each analyzer as:
Ozone & Trace Gas Instrument Identification Numbers for Serial Installation
Model Parameter Instrument ID
49i Ozone 49
43 S02 43
42 NOy 42
48 CO 48
146 Dynamic Dilution System 46
49i / 49C Transfer Ozone Analyzer 50
Verify proper operation of all sensors and analyzers: Perform a full field calibration in accordance with
CASTNET QAPP Rev. 4.0 (or most current). Verify proper polling operation and obtain confirmation of
proper data transfer prior to departure from site.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 53 of 78
Appendix 1
Configuration of Thermo-Electron Model 49i Ozone Analyzer for use with Campbell
CR3000 D.A.S. and Externally Switched Zero-Air
SYNOPSIS:
Configuration Details: 49i used with CR3000 and Thomas Pump. This configuration is not suitable for
use with compressor driven Zero-Air Systems, or with analyzers with modified internal plumbing. The
Analyzer must have a Thomas pump to supply zero-air and a jumper tube installed between the "OUT"
and "IN" ports on the rear panel for this configuration to work properly.
1. Set the Instrument baud rate to "9600".
2. Set the "Instrument ID" to "49" (factory default).
3. Set the "Communication Protocol" to "CLINK" (factory default).
4. Set the "RS-232 / 485 Selection" to "RS-232" (factory default). NOTE: NEVER CHANGE
THIS PARAMETER WITH A SERIAL CABLE ATTACHED TO INSTRUMENT.
5. Set the "TCP/IP Settings" as: "IP address" set to "192.168.0.49" and "Gateway IP address" set
to "192.168.0.1"
6. Turn the "Ozonator Solenoid" "OFF". This is a critical element of the proper operation of the
analyzer.
7. Connect the sample input tube to the "Sample" port on the back panel of the analyzer.
8. Connect the integrity line (cal gas out) to the "Ozone" port on the back panel of the analyzer.
9. Cap off the "Vent" port located on the back panel of the analyzer.
10. Connect the zero-air supply tube coming from the charcoal canister to the "Zero-Air" port on
the back of the analyzer.
11. Connect the DE9F Serial cable prewired to the backplane assembly to one of the "RS-232/485"
ports on the analyzer rear panel. The left port (from the back) is the standard port. If this cable
is not pre-wired connect the Tx (Pin 2) usually red wire to CI. Connect Rx (Pin 3) usually
orange wire to C2, and connect G (Pin 5), usually green wire to a "GND" terminal on the
CR3000. In almost all cases this cable is pre-wired into the CR3000 backplane assembly.
12. "Output Relay Settings" for relay 1 (pins 1& 2 ofD/O Board) set to: "1 NCL SAMPLE"
13. Connect the pre-wired i-series I/O and D/O 37 pin terminal blocks to their ports on the rear
panel of the analyzer: These ports are labeled "Digital Inputs" and "Digital Outputs"
respectively. These terminals will come prewired with two coiled cables that should be left
unconnected to the data-logger unless there is a catastrophic serial communication failure. It is
critical to ensure that the screws used to attach each terminal block to the analyzer pass through
the collars of the wire ties installed in the assembly. If not the terminals may become unseated
and disable the zero-air system. Wiring details of the pre-assembled terminal boards is
documented in attachment 3.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - i Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, hie.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 54 of 78
MODEL 491 OZONE ANALYZERS AS DEPLOYED WITH CR3000 DATA-LOGGERS WILL
BE CONFIGURED TO:
1. Utilize RS-232 serial communication CLINK protocol via industry standard DE-9 cables.
2. Export internally generated ozone used in detector calibration checks (ZSP's) through the length
of the sample train and back into the analyzer via the "Sample" port. In operation this is identical
to the process of collecting ambient ozone with the exception that generated ozone traverses an
extra length of tubing (integrity line) for which scrubbing is accounted for through in situ
calibration.
3. The default method of operation of 49i analyzers is to bypass all external plumbing and perform
such detector checks independent of external plumbing. Unlike the 49C models used in CASTNet
operations, in which internal plumbing was modified to ensure external plumbing integrity
checks; the 49i needs no plumbing modification. Instead the "Ozonator Solenoid" MUST be
turned OFF. This function is now menu driven. Once the "Ozonator Solenoid" has been disabled
or turned OFF, internally generated ozone will be pumped out of the unit through the "Ozone"
port and will traverse the integrity line, the inlet filter and the sample train prior to reaching the
detector. The inlet filter is vented to the atmosphere. This configuration allows the factory port
labels found on the rear panel of the analyzer to function as described in the manual.
4. Use zero-air supplied by a 5LPM minimum diaphragm type "Thomas" pump. The zero air pump
is activated any time the 49i is not in "Sample" mode. This system is designed to supply 24VDC
from Pin 24 of the D/I Board through relay 1 (Pin 1 & 2 on the D/I Board) of the analyzer to an
external relay assembly for switching 115VAC to the pump. In this mode of operation both the i-
Series D/O and D/I 25 pin interface terminals are connected to the analyzer and wired per
attachment 3.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transit ion.QAPP 6.0Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 55 of 78
Figure 1:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 56 of 78
Attachment 1:
CR3000: RMY to CR3000 Backplane Wiring Version 4/22/08
Blower 2 (2m)
Rod
15V*
15
|Red
NC
N/A
Black
15V GND
16
iBIack
NC
N/A
White
CC Status 1 [_
Temp 2 (2m)
Precip
Four Conductor
Tagged Clear White
Wire NC
Four Conductor
Tagged Blue
2 or 4 conductor
Tagged White
Direct to Logger From
Translator
Red/Orange
Black/Orange
5V+
3L
Orange
White/Orange
Orange/Red
Orange/Black
4H
4L
IX2
IXR
Gray
White/Gray
White/Red/Black
Black
5H
NC
12V+
G
NC
jjSji
A
Blue
White/Blue
Red/Blue
Black/Blue
5L
5 Gnd
12v+
12V Gnd
Lt Blue
White I Lt Blue
P2
P2 Gnd
Tan
White/Tan
Red/Tan*
Black/Tan*
6H
6L
12V+
12V Gnd
ShelterTemp
Red
Purple
Black
Clear
Sig +
Sig Gnd
Power +
Power Gnd
*kkzmmm
"A H
:-34-K®tg
s i,
Red/Purple
Purple/Red
Black/Purple/Red
White/Purple/Black
1L
1 Gnd
VX2
VX2 Gnd
Flow Sig +
Flow Sig Ref
Purple
White/Purple
10H
10 Gnd
NC
NC
SR T Sig +
SR T Sig Ref
Brown
White/Brown
7H
7L
Ozone Analog
B/U
NC
NC
B/U 03 Sig +
B/U 03 Sig Ref
Blue/Pink*
Pink/Blue*
8H
8L
Ozone Trans
Analog B/U
NC
NC
03 Tran Sig+
03 T ran Ref
Purple/Pink*
Pink/Purple*
9H
9L
Communication
Raven Modem
Raven Power
Cable
Power
Power Gnd
reci 10 Logger rrc
Raven Modem
Direct to 115 Unit
Cable (Female End)
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 5
Rx
Tx
Gnd (5)
Direct to Logger From
Analyzer Serial Port (Null
Modem DE9)
Backplane Earth to Grounding Rod via Green 10GA / NO Ground
G Lug
KEY
fnlnr
Device
Stock Number
Identifying Marks
round Clamp
401-006
Green and Yellow
GDT
Not Yet Assigned
Black wI Green/Yellow Ground, Marked 110VAC
MOV
401-010
Black w/ Green/Yellow Ground, Marked 12VDC
Terminal
401-005
w/ one terminal per side
i
uouble Terminal
Gray w/ two terminals per side
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionv.QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 57 of 78
Attachment 2:
CR3000: 49i Analyzer to Zero-Air Relay Box Version 4/22/08
iSeries Connector Board I/O iSeries Connector Board D/O
Analog and Relay Module (FEMALE) Digital I/O Module (MALE)
Connect Black wire from relay box to
Pin 24.
Pin / Fen
Fen / Pin
13
1 (Analog +)
14
2 (Analog -)
15
g
3
16
4
17
%
5
18
6
19
«
1
7
(Ground) 20
it
8
V
a.
8
21
9
22
10
23
1
11
;• inr^ O 1
|
12
Jumper Pin 24 to Pin 2 with a 6" Red
wire. Connect Red or Clear wire
from relay box to Pin 1
Pin / Fen Fen / Pin
¦ M
12|
1
24 (24 VDC +)
1l|
1
23
io|
j
22
9
&
1
21
8
&
%
1
20
7
19
6
18
5
17
4
i
1
16
3
s
shi
15
(Relay 1 B) 2
1
Isfl
14
(Relay 1 A) 1
|
13
See Page 2-5 of Model 49i Instruction Manual 26May2006 for full pinout details
49i Configuration Details (Thomas Pump Sites)
1.) Ozonator Solenoid turned OFF
2.) Instrument ID set to "49"
3.) Serial protocol set to "CLINK"
4.) Sample tube connected to "SAMPLE"
5.) Cal Gas Out tube connected to "OZONE"
6.) "Vent" should be capped
7.) Zero-Air System Tube connected to "ZERO/AIR"
8.) "IN" port connected to "OUT" port with short length of tube on analyzer back
panel.
9.) Output Relay Settings to activate zero-air pump
"1 NOP Sample"
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOPV3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 58 of 78
Attachment 3:
KEY
Device
Stock Number
Identifying Marks
Terminal
401-005
Gray UKK Front 4 Terminal
Shields should be grounded only to Logger Terminal Strip at locations marked X
P:\ECMVP\CASTNET 4 - transition'.QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 59 of 78
Attachment 4:
CR3000: Router to Equipment RJ45 Ethernet Connections, Version 4/22/08
I[ Internet / WAn
Router Port I
D-Link EBR-
2310 Ethcrnot
Router
Router Port 2
Router Port 3
Router Port 4
V Cut to length -16"
i
Raven X Modem
3' Cut to length -16"
NL 115 CF
14'
Yellow
7' or 10'
•i
Laptop
Not Connected
'Preferred part number for this cable is Emerson 73-7793-7
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 • transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ) Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx MACT EC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 60 of 78
Appendix 2
Configuration of CASTNET Site Laptop Computers for Use with
Campbell CR3000 Data-Loggers.
Prior to field deployment with CR3000 data-loggers all CASTNET site laptop computers must
be configured with the proper software, IP address and firewall settings. At a minimum TightVNC and
AceView software must be installed. If the site laptop is to be used in assessing modem performance then
Wireless Ace or Ace Manager should also be installed. Additionally Windows Firewall settings must be
configured to allow Tight VNC Server network access. In order to enable IP addressing of site equipment
the laptop must also be configured with the proper address.
1) Configure the laptop IP addresses using the following procedure.
a) Click Start - Settings - Network Connections
i) Right click on Local Area Connection then click Properties.
v Netwoik fonnprhons
Mjjjjjjgij^
j File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help
JOjxj
m
MS
mm
' Search
Folders
cm-
j Address pD; Network Connections
gg Create a new
connection
Change Windows
Firewall settings
(t| Disable this network
device
(g|j Rename this connection
H| Change settings of this
connection
Uthei Places
Q* Control Panel
iB My Network Places
"3
Name
I Type
LAN or High-Speed Internet
LAW or Highspeed Internet
U'-1- cneed Internet
Network
Not connected, Firewalled
Network cable unplugged; Fir;
Disconnected, Firewailed
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - fransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
: 61 of78
2) The Local Area Connection Properties box will appear.
i) Ensure Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) is checked, then highlight it and click the Properties
button.
esse
General J Authentication J Advanced j
Sj} Broadcom MeC-'treme 57»: Gigabit C
This connection uses the following items
Configure... ~|
[?• File and Punter Sharing for Microsoft Networks
HTjoS Packet Schea®
Internet Protocol [TCP/IP)
['e.cnpt.nn
Transmission Contfol Protocol/Internet Protocol. The default
wide area network protocol that provides communication
across diverse interconnected networks.
r Show icon in notification area when connected
P" Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity
OK
Cancel
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 62 of 78
3) The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties box will appear.
i) Check the " Use the following IP addressradio button.
Internet Protocol (,Tf P IP) Prn|« ilws
Jiiil
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports
this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for
the appropriate IP settings.
C Obtain an IP address automatically
HJse the following IP adgeS
IP address:
Subnet mask:
Default gateway:
Obto'.-DM? .e.-i-e; 3alc-ilt j
-(* Use the following DNS server addresses:—
Preferred DNS server: J
Alternate DNS server: | 7
Advanced...
OK
Cancel
ii) Fill out the Internet Protocol (I CP/'JP) Properties box according to the t> pe of Raven as
described below.
AT&T Raven
Verizon i
Rnutci Only
IP address
192.168.0 20
192.1(58 0 20 :
192 168 0 20
Subnet mask
255.255.25S 0
255 255 255 0 i
255 255 255 0
Default
192.168.0 1
192 168.0 1
192.168.0 1
Preferred
66.209.10.201
6G 174.95 14 ¦
Blank
Alternate
66.209.10.202
66 174.96.14
Blank
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 63 of 78
For AT&T Raven sites enter the following addresses:
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports
thi; capability Other wire you need to ack your network administrator for
the appropriate IP settings.
C Obtain an IP address automatically
-(* Use the following IP address:
IP address: | 192 . 16
Subnet mask: [ 255 " 255 255 . 0
Default gateway: | 192 . 168 . 0 T"
?J X
General |
—i* Use the following DNS server addresses:
Preferred DNS server:
j 66 . 203 . 10 . 201
Alternate DH^ -erver
j 66 : 209 10 7202
OK | Cancel
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0-Ap - i Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 64 of 78
For Verizon Raven sites enter the following addresses:
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if .your network supports
this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for
the appropriate IP settings.
r Obtain an IP address automatically
• U :e the tullowinj IP address:
|Paddress: - f~\32~ 168 ,~T™~2oT
Subnet mask: • J 255 . 255 . 255 ! 0
Default gateway: j 132 . 168. 0 . 1
f"* Obtai-:DfsS ser-/'e' addressc'jto.r'ctca.iy
-i* Use the following DNS server addresses:— - -
Preferred DNS server: j 66 .174 95 44
Alternate DNS server: J 69 . 78 96 . 14|
tM.
JIM
General j
Advanced... |
OK | Cancel
Note: The Verizon Raven Modem can be identified by the lack of a sim card slot as well as the name
:Raven V".
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 65 of 78
For sites not equipped with Raven Modem enter the following addresses:
You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports
this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for •
the appropriate IP settings.
Obtain an IP jddreis automatically
—(* Use the following IP address: ——
IP address: |~192 . 168 . 0 .20
Subnet mask: • J 255 . 255 . 255 0
Default gateway: j 192 . 168 . 0 ! 1~~~
fCDNS s-rve* =>2dres*:
-<*" Use. the following DNS server addresses:— — i
Preferred DNS server j .
Alternate DNS server: j ' " ~~~
¦R
m
?l X
Advanced... |
OK | Cancel
4) When finished entering IP addresses and DNS server addresses click OK to save and return to the
Local Area Network Connections Properties dialog box. Click OK again to exit.
5) The IP address is now configured properly.
P:\ECM1P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP'\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 66 of 78
6) To install TightVNC from the CR3000 installation kit thumb-drive:
a) Double click the TightVNC.exe file on the thumb-drive.
b) If the following warning appears click Run.
* *
The publisher could not he verified. Are you sure you want to
lun this software?
Name: tightvnc-l,3.9-setup.exe
Publfiher Unknown Publisher
Type: Application
From: C:\Documents and Settings\rsmcewan\Desl
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
; 67 of 78
d) Click the Next button.
Setup - TightVNC
Information
Please read (he following important information before continuing.
When you are ready to continue with Setup, click Neat.
Ifcllils jj
TightVNC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
under the terms of the GNU General Public License. While you can
use the software freely, please consider making a small tlomiti - >i
to support our project. See more details here:
htt p: //www, t i g ht vn c. c o rn/d o n at e. ht m I
TightVNC on the Web |f||
To get more information about TightVNC, visit our ho me page on
+ U.-. \ fJ
,, ,;h a L-.; ^L.., ... ,-j
Select Destination Location
Where should TightVNC be installed?
Setup will install TightVNC inlu II.l- fulluwing fclder
To continue, click Next. If mu would like to select a different folder click Browce.
Eiowie
At least 0.1 MB of free disk space is required.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
: 68 of 78
f) Click the Next button.
Setup - TightVNC
ItlllHil
Select Components
Which components should be installed?
Select the components you want to install; clear the components you do not want to
install. Click Next when you are ready to continue.
Full installation
171 TightVNC Server
m
PI Web pages and documentation
0.7 MB
1.3 MB
Current selection requires at least 2.4 MB of disk space.
g) Click the Next button.
h)
Setup - TightVNC
Jmn
- X
Select Stait Menu Folder
Where should Setup place the program's shortcuts?
Setup will create the program's shortcuts in the following Start Menu folder.
To continue, click Next. If you would like to select a different folder, click Browse.
Brow-.e
TiohtVNC
f*~ Don't create any icons
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 69 of 78
i) Check the box next to Register new TightVNC Server as a system service then click the Next
button.
Select Additional Tasks
Which additional tasks should be performed?
Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing TightVNC,
then click Next.
File associations:
p Associate ,vne files with TightVNC Viewer
jie.a JiahjVH L_S crver a:
' Start nr re-tart IightVNC ierviLe
j) Click the Install button.
. -1^1 x<
Ready to Install
Setup is now ready to begin installing TightVNC on your computer.
Click Install to continue with the installation or click Bocl. it you want to review or
change any retting"
De-.tinahon location
C \Progrcim Fik-sVTigWHC
Setup type
Full installation
Selected cnmpnnpr it;
TightVNC Server
TightVNC Viewer
Web page^ and documentation
Start Menu tolder
TightVNC
Lii ' '
J
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 70 of 78
k) During the file transfer process you may observe a transient warning and a transient command
prompt box. The warning below will then appear. Click the OK button.
msasMWffiMmmmammmMmEsmi•m-i;. *i
f\ WARNING ; This machine has no default password set. WinVNC will present the Default Properties dialog now to allow one to be enteied.
1) The TightVNC Server: Default Local System Properties box will then appear. Type the Primary
and View-only passwords as "castnet" then click the Apply button. Then click the OK button.
TightVNC Server: Default I ¦¦¦ .il Prupei
IBM
Server I Hooks | Display | Query | Administration ]
Incoming connections
p Accept -ocl-et connexions
Primary password:
View-only password:
HI
r- Input handling : —
P B lock ren iote inp>jt evi=nt?
P" Block remote input on local activity
iac!ivity iiroeoul: pT seconds
No local input during client £e;nons
r Blank screen on client connections
- Display or port numbers to use—
(* Auto r Display: |0 ~i
-When last client disconnects
Do nothing
C Lock workstation
C Logoff workstation
W Enable file transfers
P" Remove desktop wallpaper
01
Cancel
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 71 of 78
m) Click the Finish button and the installation will be complete.
lip Setup -TightVNC
»J..eI
Completing the TightVNC Setup
Wizard
Setup has finished installing TightVNC on your computer. The
application may be launched by selecting the installed icons.
Click Finish to exit Setup.
n) I lii.' iiir>t;illaliiui is now compk-lo.
Knrh
%
7) To install AceView
a) Double click AceView.exe in the thumb-drive directory.
b) If the following warning appears click the Run button.
wmmsm
^mMm:
¦ x]
The publisher could not be verified. Are you suit; you want to
run this software?
N ame: AceView, exe
Publirher Unknown Publisher
T>,'|:e Application
F"om C:\D&cunr,ents and Sefctinqs\isnncewan\Deskb:ip
P" Always ask before opening this file
*
This file does not have a valid digital signature that verifies its
publisher You chould only run sort wore from publisher; you tru:-t
How can I decide what software to run?
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition'QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP.3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 72 of 78
c) If the following message appears click the Yes button.
InstallShield
2£j
AceView optionally uses the Microsoft (R) .NET 1,1 Framework, Would you like to install it now?
d) Click the Next button.
Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for
AceView
The InstallShield(R) Wizard will install AceView on your
computer. To continue, click Next.
WARNING: This program is protected by copyright law and
international treaties.
BSilBa
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.doc.x
MACTEC Engineering and Consul ling. Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 73 of 78
e) The default user name and organization (if populated) work fine. Click the Next button.
AceView - InstallShield Wizard
Customer Information
Please enter your information.
fRobert Scott McEwan
Organization:
SMACTEC, Inc
Install this application for:
(* Anyone who uses this computer (all users)
¦'' r>nly for me (Robert Scott McFwan)
SiSSIiBii
f) tlTck"thc"Ar^YZ buiioii."
Destination Folder
click Next to install to this folder, or click Change to install to a different folder, jht -
Wtm
-j Iriitcill Ace View Lu:
J C:\Proqfdin fi!e-i.'iAiniriklAceViei'V\
Change...
jftlfljllis
\ j
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 74 of 78
g) Click the Install button
Ready to Install the Program
The wizard is ready to begin installation.
Click Install to begin the installation.
If you want to review or change any of your installation settings, click Back. Click Cancel to
e-;t the '.'juard.
h) theinslallalion-Tnlfcompfclo automatically:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap: 1 Field SOP\:
\3-
l-A Main Body Field Calibration Manuai.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 75 of 78
8) To configure Windows Firewall Settings:
a) Click Start - Settings - Control Panel. From within Control Panel double-click Windows
Firewall OR from Local Area Network Connections Properties Click the Advanced tab then click
Settings.
b) The Windows Firewall box will then appear,
i) Click the Exceptions tab.
f" Windows Firewall
¦WW
General ¦ J Advanced j
s settings are controlled by Group Policy
Windows Firewall helps protect your computer by preventing unauthorised users
from naming access to your computer through the Internet or a network.
£» Ori {recommended}
This setting blocks all outside sources from connecting to this
cunipu'cr 'A'llh the ;_->:c<_-pl,on uf lhu,<_ .l-IucIlJ un thi. ExcL-pliun, tub
P7 I) ori'l allow exceptions ;
Select this when you connect to public networks in less secure
locations, such as airports. You will not be notified when Windows
Firewall blocks programs. Selections on the Exceptions tab will be
Off (not recommended)
Avoid using this setting. Turning off Windows Firewall may make this
computer more vulnerable to viru:e: and intrudes
Window: Tirewall i; unngyour ncri-domain setting:.
QK
Cancel
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 76 of 78
c) From the Exceptions tab make sure the following boxes are checked: Internet Explorer, Remote
Assistance, and Remote Desktop.
i) Then click the Add Program button.
Windows Firewall
General Exception: , Advanced |
Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections including the
programs and services selected below.
Programs and Services:
Name
Group Policy
~ File arid Printer Sharing
0 Internet Explorer
0 Remote Assistance
0 Remote Desktop
OUPnP Framework
No
No
No
No
No
y C11_|_'I d nutihCdtiun when Window; Firewdll bloc! i a program
What are the risks of allowing exceptions?
01
Cancel
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTECEngineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 77 of 78
d) From the Add a Program box: scroll to and highlight Launch TightVNC Sender. Click the OK
button. The Add a Program box will disappear.
Add a Program
To allow communications with a program by adding ft to (he Exceptions list,
select the program, or click Browse to search for one that is not listed.
fHI Image Viewer
j\ IriterActual Player
"iff' InterActual Player Uninstall
Internet Explorer
a&aL _ ,
LabelCreator Pro
|fiCauncM I igntVNL Server;
MSN
Outlook Express
f&PC200W
PC400
Path: C:\Program Files\TightVNC\WinVNC.«
C ope... |
Br.
a
zl
Cancel
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
FIELD CALIBRATIONS MANUAL
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 78 of 78
e) Back at the Windows Firewall box Exceptions tab verify that Launch TightVNC Server is checked
and then click the OK button to exit.
Windows Firewall
xl
General Exceptions j Advanced j
Windows Firewall is blocking incoming network connections including the
piograms and services selected below.
Programs and Services:
Name
Group Policr'
~ File and Printer Sharing
HVl Internet Expluiei
No
"Wcr
"0!Launch TightVNC Server
0 Remote Assistance
0 Remote Desktop
~ IJPnP Framework
No
No'
No
No
Add Pfng;arn
Add Port...
SiSS
itSfeiSiSi
P Display a notification when Windows Firewall blocks a program
What are the risks of allowing exceptions?
f) The configuration of Windows Firewall is now complete.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPN3-A Main Body Field Calibration Manual.docx
MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (SO,) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 1 of 17
III. FIELD MANUAL
A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 1: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE
ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
AUTOMATED EQUIVALENT METHOD: EQSA-0486-060
Effective
Date:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations
Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECMVP\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP\3-A Attach I 43C-TLE S02 V-).docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 2 of 17
III. A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 1: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE
ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) MONITOR
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent
guidance for the operation of Thermo Model 43C-TLE S02 Monitors.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to enhanced trace level S02 monitors operating at CASTNET sites.
3.0 SUMMARY
Thermo 43C-TLE Enhanced Trace Level Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Analyzer
Sulfur Dioxide (S02) is a colorless, nonflammable gas that has a strong suffocating
odor. S02 originates from fuel containing sulfur (mainly coal and oil) burned at power
plants and during metal smelting and other industrial processes. High levels of S02 can
result in temporary breathing impairment for asthmatic children and adults who are
active outdoors. Long-term exposure to high levels of S02, in the presence of high
levels of particulate matter, may aggravate existing cardiovascular disease and
respiratory illness.
The Thermo Model 43C-TLE combines proven detection technology and advanced
diagnostics for the determination of trace levels of S02. This SOP will detail the
operation, preventive maintenance, cautions and health warnings.
The Detection Limit (DL) for a non-trace level S02 analyzer is 10 parts per billion (ppb)
(Code of Federal Regulations, Volume 40, Part 53.23c, or, in the shortened format used
hereafter, 40 CFR 53.23c). However, the 43C-TLE has an estimated DL of 200 parts
per trillion (ppt, 10 sec, avg. time), which is accomplished by an increased detector
sensitivity, as well as increasing the length of the standard instrument's optical bench.
This document will discuss the Trace Level Enhanced (TLE) operating procedures in
detail. (USEPA, Thermo S02 SOP Version 2.1)
The Thermo 43C-TLE operating principle is based on measuring the fluorescence of
SO, when excited by ultraviolet (UV) radiation. Pulsating UV light is focused through a
narrow band-pass filter allowing only light wavelengths of 190 to 230 nanometers (nm)
to pass into the fluorescence chamber. S02 absorbs light in this region without any
quenching by air or most other molecules found in polluted air. The S02 molecules are
excited by UV light and emit a characteristic decay radiation. A second filter allows
only this decay radiation to reach a photomultiplier tube (PMT). Electronic signal
processing transforms the light energy impinging on the PMT into a voltage which is
directly proportional to the concentration of S02 in the sample stream being analyzed.
This pulsed fluorescence principle of operation was accepted by EPA under
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4.transition\OAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-l.docx MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (SOz) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 3 of 17
equivalency specifications defined in the February 18, 1975, Federal Register.
Volume 40, No. 33.
3.1 Thermo 43C-TLE Enhanced Trace Level S02 Analyzer Overview and Set Points
Note: Standard local time is used for monitoring and updated by the data logger.
Page 1-3 of the instrument manual presents the Thermo 43C-TLE specifications. Refer
to page 3-1 of the instrument manual (Thermo p/n 101312-00, 2004) for graphic
representation of the front controls and indicators. The controls and indicators on the
front of the Thermo 43C-TLE analyzer (from top to bottom and left to right) are as
follows: The display panel, POWER switch, RUN pushbutton, MENU pushbutton, ~
pushbutton, ENTER pushbutton, HELP pushbutton, ^ pushbutton, 4 pushbutton, and
the pushbutton. The vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) indicates the concentration
reading of input gases or sample. Output voltages are adjusted to match the zero and full
scale of the instrument and are used as the true indicator of concentration for the data
acquisition system (DAS).
Refer to page 2-2 of the instrument manual for graphic representation of the rear
connections. The connections on the rear panel of the analyzer (from left to right) are as
follows: a terminal strip for recorder outputs and status outputs (newer models have
two plug-in strips) and two male DB9 connectors (see Appendix B of the Thermo
manual). Tubing ports for EXHAUST and SAMPLE (center); a fused power connector,
and a fan/filter.
Refer to page 3-2 for a description of the pushbutton operation and page 3-3 of the
instrument manual for the flowchart of the menu-driven software. This flowchart gives
a quick reference to all the menus and submenus available to the operator.
3.1.1 Mode Setting
Mode should be set on RUN with the S02 concentration and the time displayed. If not,
correct by pressing the RUN pushbutton and mark in site logbook.
3.1.2 Range Setting
Press MENU pushbutton, use the and pushbuttons to scroll to RANGE and press
ENTER. Range should be set at 100 ppb; if not, correct the setting by scrolling to the
units and press ENTER, then scroll to the correct units (PPB) and press Enter. If the
PPB range is not correct, scroll to Range and press Enter, then scroll to the proper units
and press Enter. Press MENU to escape back to the main screen and note in site
logbook. Any data recorded in range other 0 to 100 ppb must be clearly identified.
3.1.3 Averaging Time
Press MENU pushbutton, scroll to AVERAGING TIME and press ENTER. Averaging
time should be set on 30 sec; if not, use the ~ and 4 pushbuttons to select the correct
time and Press Enter to correct the setting and note in site logbook.
3.1.4 Voltages*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
VOLTAGES and press ENTER. Observe the voltage readings on the front panel and
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOPV3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 4 ofl7
record on the site service log. The Lamp voltage should be between 750 and 900V and
the PMT voltage should be between -600 and -900.
3.1.5 Temperatures* (Internal and Chamber)
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
TEMPERATURE and press ENTER. Observe the temperature readings on the front
panel and record on the site service log. The internal temperature should be between
25 °C and 40 °C. The chamber temperature should be between 43 °C and 47 °C.
3.1.6 Pressure*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
PRESSURE and press ENTER. Observe the pressure reading on the LED panel and
record in the site logbook. If not within limits (400 - 1000), corrective action must be
taken. A pressure of less than 400 indicates a blocked sample line, or a pump problem.
Note initial and corrected pressure in site logbook.
3.1.7 Flow*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
FLOW and press ENTER. Observe the sample flow on the screen and record the
unadjusted flow. Flow rates around 0.5 liters per minute (LPM) are acceptable. If the
flow is unacceptable, corrective action must be taken. Note in the site logbook the initial
and corrected flow rate.
3.1.8 Lamp* (Intensity and Voltage)
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
LAMP INTENSITY and press ENTER. Observe the reading on the front panel and
record on the site service log. The intensity should be between 10,000 and 20,000 Hz.
* These parameters (and the actual SO2 concentration) have alarm messages that, if
enabled, can appear on the front panel when they drift out of specified ranges. Please
refer to the instrument manual pp. 3-47 through 3-61 for additional information.
3.2 Health and Safety Warnings
Note: To prevent personal injury, please heed these warnings concerning the
43C-TLE.
3.2.1 Always use a third ground wire on all instruments.
3.2.2 Always unplug the analyzer when servicing or replacing parts.
3.2.3 If it is mandatory to work inside an analyzer while it is in operation, use extreme
caution to avoid contact with high voltages. The analyzer has a 110 volt Volts
Alternating Current (VAC) power supply. Refer to the manufacturer's instruction
manual and know the precise locations of the VAC components before working on the
instrument.
3.2.4 Avoid electrical contact with jewelry. Remove rings, watches, bracelets, and necklaces
to prevent electrical burns. (USEPA, Thermo S02 SOP Version 2.1, Sec. 3.4)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach I 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 5 of 17
3.3 Cautions
To prevent damage to the 43C-TLE delicate internal parts, all cautions should
immediately precede the applicable step in this SOP. The following precautions
should be taken:
• Wear an anti-static wrist strap that is properly connected to earth ground (note
that when the analyzer is unplugged, the chassis is not at earth ground);
• If an anti-static wrist strap is not available, be sure to touch a grounded metal
object before touching any internal components;
• Handle all printed circuit boards by the edge;
• Carefully observe the instructions in each procedure specified in Chapter 7 of the
manual;
TM
• Normally, if Teflon filters are used in the sample train, cleaning the optical
bench will not be required. However, in the event that the bench is cleaned, be
careful to avoid damaging the interior of the sample chamber. Use extreme
caution when cleaning or servicing the sample chamber(s). In addition the mirrors
are very fragile; avoid jarring the instrument. This may damage, misalign or crack
the mirrors and cause expensive repairs;
• Keep the interior of the analyzer clean;
• Inspect the system regularly for structural integrity;
• To prevent major problems with leaks, make sure that all sampling lines are
reconnected after required checks and before leaving the site;
• Inspect tubing for cracks and leaks;
• It is recommended that the analyzer be leak checked after replacement of any
pneumatic parts;
• If cylinders are used in tandem with Mass Flow Control (MFC) calibrators, use
and transport is a major concern. Gas cylinders can sometimes contain pressures
as high as 2000 pounds per square inch (psi). Handling of cylinders must be done
in a safe manner. If a cylinder is accidentally dropped and valve breaks off, the
cylinder can become explosive or a projectile;
• Transportation of cylinders is regulated by the Department of Transportation
(DOT). It is strongly recommended to contact the DOT or Highway Patrol to
learn the most recent regulations concerning transport of cylinders;
• It is possible (and practical) to blend other compounds with S02. MSDS for all
compounds must be made available to all staff that use and handle the cylinders or
permeation tubes; and
• Shipping of cylinders is governed by the DOT. Contact the DOT or your local
courier about the proper procedures and materials needed to ship high-pressure
cylinders.
Source: (USEPA, Thermo SO2 SOP Version 2.1, Sec. 3.5)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0'Ap - i Field SOP\3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-l.docx
MACT EC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (SOz) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 6 of 17
3.4 Interferences
The most common source of interference is from other gases that fluoresce in a similar
fashion to SO2 when exposed to UV light. The most significant of these is a class of
hydrocarbons called polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAH); of which naphthalene
is a prominent example. Xylene is another hydrocarbon that can cause interference.
These hydrocarbons are removed via the hydrocarbon "kicker".
Nitrogen oxide (NO) fluoresces in a spectral range close to SO2. Interference from NO
is addressed by the presence of the band pass filter, which allows only the wavelengths
emitted by the excited SO molecules to reach the PMT.
3.5 Personnel Qualifications
The person(s) chosen to operate the Thermo 43C-TLE should have an understanding of
basic chemistry and electronics. The understanding of digital circuitry is helpful, but not
required Source: (USEPA, Thermo SO2 SOP Version 2.1, Sec. 3.7)
4.0 EQUIPMENT AND REAGENTS
4.1 Thermo 146C calibration system
Must produce a NIST-traceable calibration test atmosphere generated in accordance
with procedures stated in Section 2.6.1, of 40CFR part 58, Appendix A. S02
Calibrations are performed according to the QA Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Volume II.
4.2 SOz, NO, and CO Calibration Gas Certification
The calibration gas being used for this project will be NIST-traceable in accordance
with the requirements of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Establishing True
Concentrations of Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Air Pollution Analyzers
(Protocol No. 2), June 1979. New gas cylinders require a re-certification at 6 months
and then every 24 months.
4.3 Thermo 111C zero air system with compressor.
This is the Zero Air source used by the 146C to reduce ppm level standard cylinder
concentration in order to produce ppb level calibration stream within zero to 80 percent
of selected range. For S02 the range is set at zero to 100 ppb.
4.4 Monitor calibration forms
5.0 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
5.1 Monthly and Semiannual Checks to Table 1 for a complete checklist of scheduled
maintenance. Refer to equipment manuals as necessary
5.2 Supporting Test Equipment
The monitoring instrument, calibrator, supporting equipment, and recording device are
housed in a temperature-controlled shelter. The shelter is insulated and equipped with
lockable doors and an air conditioner and/or heater.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0'Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 7 of 17
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Calibration
Periodic calibrations are required to be performed according to the procedures outlined
in this section. The outlines presented in this section describe procedures to be followed
during adjusted and unadjusted calibrations of the Thermo 43C-TLE analyzer. There are
a number of conditions which should be met prior to a calibration or a zero, precision,
span (ZPS) check.
~ First the analyzer must reach equilibrium (allowed to run overnight from
initial power-up).
~ Second, the range used during the calibration or ZPS check must be the
same as the monitoring range.
~ Third, all operational adjustments to the analyzer should be completed prior
to calibration.
~ Fourth, all parts of the gas flow system, such as sample lines, particulate
filters, etc., which are used during the normal sample monitoring must be
used during the calibration.
~ Finally, all recording devices and outputs used during normal monitoring
must be calibrated prior to the instrument calibration and be used during
calibration or ZPS checks. The sit temperature should be between 20 °C
and 30 °C plus or minus 2 degrees.
The field technician will record all results on the respective analyzer calibration form.
All calibration activities will be recorded in the site logbook.
6.1.1 Calibration Techniques Description
6.1.1.1 Thermo 146C Calibration System:
a. Prior to changing the normal sampling configuration, clearly record in the
logbook all channels affected by the calibration sequence.
b. Pneumatic Connections
No connections are necessary for ZPS or a full calibration. A typical CASTNET
site configuration has the outlet of the Thermo 146C routed to a 10m high
manifold where the samples are collected. In order to check for line losses
through the 10m + Teflon line all the way to the inlet point, the outlet line of the
146C must be disconnected and replaced with a short piece of !4 inch tubing
connected directly to the back of the analyzer. Results should be within 2 ppb of
results obtained through the normal sampling train. This check should be
performed during semi-annual multi-point calibrations. Feeding of the various gas
blends must be done via an open tee to avoid pressurizing the system.
P: HCM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP-3-A Attach I 43C-TLE S02 V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 8 of 17
c. Gas Cylinder, Zero Air, and Regulator Preparation
CASTNET sites are configured to automatically run daily ZPS checks. Each site
has a permanent 146C dynamic dilution box, a 111 zero air generator and a
standard aluminum cylinder. Follow the procedure below if the standard
cylinder's certification has expired or been consumed.
~ Connect the stainless-steel regulator to the span gas cylinder. Do not use
below 200 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) of pressure.
TM
~ Connect a %-inch Teflon line from the regulator to the calibrator
bulkhead fitting marked GAS A. Adjust the regulator output pressure to
25 psig and check all fittings for leaks using a suitable detergent solution.
Verify that the compressor feeding ambient air to the 111 box is set to 40-50 psig
and that the delivery pressure of the Thermo 111 is set to 25 psig.
6.1.1.2 Thermo 43C-TLE Analyzer:
~ Instrument must be in RUN mode
~ RANGE is set to 100 ppb
~ TIME CONSTANT at 30 sec.
6.1.2 Adjusted Calibration Procedure:
Note: It is MANDA TOR Y to perform an UNADJUSTED calibration (record the
signal values for a challenge range w/o forcing the zero or 80% of range values)
prior to performing the ADJUSTED calibration (i.e. forcing instrument calibration
using the Zero and/or 80 percent of range values).
6.1.2.1 Before calibrating, record all information requested on the top portion of the Thermo
48C-TLE calibration form. A filled example is shown in appendix A.
6.1.2.2 Down affected channel in data logger. Clearly mark the logbook that the SO2 channel is
marked DOWN to prevent calibration data from being included in the daily data
summary.
6.1.2.3 Set the calibrator to deliver zero air to the Thermo 48C-TLE:
1. Press the* pushbutton to switch the unit into local mode,
2. Toggle between the RUN screens and select "GAS OFF?" by placing the *by the
words using ~-f-,
3. Select CO? using 4" and press enter. This activates the standard cylinder valve in
the 146C as well as the flow of calibration gases into the analyzer.
4. Select SPAN 0 (zero air only) using *
The 146C needs to be programmed to recognize SO2 as a valve reference as well as
the standard tank concentration. SPANS 0 through 5 are also programmable to
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOP\3-A Altach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-I.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 9 of 17
deliver preselected concentrations and total flows within the capabilities of the
MFC in the box. Refer to the SOP or manual for the 146C, pp.3-14 to 3-18 to alter
these if necessary. Typical preset values are as follows: Span 0 —>zero air, Span 1
—>10ppb, Span 2 —> 20ppb, Span 3 -MOppb, Span 4 —>60ppb and Span 5 —>80
ppb (80 percent of scale). Total flow —> Typically 3.6 LPM in order to satisfy the 0
.5 LPM demand of the analyzer as well as staying within the diluting capabilities of
a 0 to 100/0 to 10,000 std. gas/ZA MFC combo.
Allow at least 15 minutes for the Thermo 43C-TLE to stabilize between SPANS.
5. Select SPANS 1 through 5 and record signal values (in ppb) on the Thermo 48C-
TLE calibration form (appendix A).
6.1.2.4 If the zero value for the analyzer is not within ±0.3 ppb, adjust the ZERO. Press
MENU, then select Calibration and press ENTER. Select Calibrate Zero and Press
Enter. Press Enter again to force the instrument to read zero while measuring zero air.
Set the 146C to SPAN 5 (the 80 percent of scale value) and following the same
procedure force the instrument to read 80 ppb while receiving the 80 ppb stream (or
approximation) by entering this value and pressing ENTER. A reading with 5 percent
of the value is acceptable.
6.1.2.5 Select SPANS 0 through 5 and verify the instrument's linearity and zero stability.
Record all values on the Thermo 43C-TLE calibration form (Appendix A). A filled
example is shown in Appendix A. A paper copy of the completed audit/calibration
must be placed in the site file.
Always compare the instrument's readings with the data logger to verify similarity.
If manual mixing is desired, a seventh option (MANUAL) under "GAS A" menu is
available. Calculate the required dilution air and gas flow necessary to obtain a desired
range of concentrations using the following formula:
Cone x P sas
SO? ppm = =
Fair + F gas
Where:
ConCgas = Span gas cylinder concentration
Fgas = Flow of span gas
Fair = Flow of the dilution air
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0>Ap - 1 Field S0P3-A Attach ! 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page lOof 17
Example: Calibration Gas Mixing Ratios
so2
Calibration
Point:
Gas Calibrator
Cone (ppb)
Zero-air
(seem)
Gas
(seem)
zero
0
3600
0.0
1
10
3588
12.7
2
20
3575
25.4
3
40
3550
50.8
4
60
3524
76.2
5
80
3450*
100.0
Note: SCCM = Standard Cubic Centimeters per minute
* Total flow reduced in order to not exceed range of std. gas MFC
Source Gas Cone (ppb):
2833
No further adjustments should be made to the Thermo 43C-TLE analyzer.
6.1.2.6 All documents related to the calibration will be signed by the field technician. The
calibration must be checked and verified by the field manager.
6.1.2.7 Return the Thermo 146C to STANDBY mode by pressing the MENU pushbutton,
select GAS OFF and press ENTER. This turns off all flow out of the 146C.
6.1.2.8 Up affected channel in data logger. Clearly note in the logbook that the S02 channel is
UP to allow ambient data to be included in the daily data summary. Affix an adjusted
calibration
6.2 Zero, Precision and Span Checks
In the event the field engineer must conduct a manual ZPS, follow these procedures.
6.2.1 Zero (±0.8 ppb), span (80 ppb), and precision (40 ppb) checks will be performed every
other day. These will be automated checks that will use Spans 1 and 5 . No automated
adjustment will be performed. The precision data point will be collected but results will
not be used for data validation. Span checks must be within ±10 percent of true value;
span checks greater than ±10 percent are a warning that will alert the field engineer to
examine and correct the system as are zero checks above 0.8 ppb or below -0.8 ppb.
Span checks greater than ±15 percent and zero checks greater than ±1.5 ppb will
invalidate associated data unless the site analyzer is shown to be within the criterion
(i.e. the problem is not within the sampling system).
6.2.2 Physical integrity of the analyzer will be checked and the findings documented on the
service log for the analyzer.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOPV3-A Attach I 43C-TLE S02 V-i.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 11 of 17
6.2.3 All site activities and observations will be annotated in the site logbook.
6.3 Calculations
6.3.1 For each of the calibration points, calculate the percent error using the following
formula:
Percent error = ——— f100)
where: ^'
X\ = known concentration (ppb), and
Yi = analyzer response (ppb).
Enter the appropriate values on the calibration form.
6.3.2 For multi-point calibrations, if any one point exceeds the 5 percent error band, perform
an adjusted calibration. Perform a linear regression on data. Slope should be between
0.85 and 1.15, the intercept should be within ±2 percent of full scale, and correlation
should be greater than 0.995. For any calibration or verification, all points must be
within ±2 percent of full scale of the best-fit straight line. Zero should read between -0.3
and 0.3 ppb.
6.4 Documentation
Field technicians will record all activities in the site log. Copies of calibration and
certification sheets will be stored onsite.
6.5 Support Equipment Calibration
6.5.1 It is essential that each piece of data acquisition and support test equipment's calibration
status be known and certified at all times. Calibration against a source traceable to a
national standard for test equipment (i.e., scopes, multimeters, frequency counters)
should be made at least every 12 months.
The following equipment calibration procedure applies to any piece of test equipment
used as a transfer standard for calibration of monitoring system instrumentation.
6.5.2 Calibration Records
Associated with each piece of test equipment is an equipment calibration and
maintenance record, indicating the last calibration date and the next due date. These
records are maintained in the project test equipment file.
6.5.3 Scheduled Calibration
Test equipment will be calibrated using NIST-traceable equipment at least every 12
months. Calibration will be verified using NIST-traceable standards prior to use in the
field.
6.5.4 Unscheduled Calibration
Test equipment will be calibrated by site personnel or by a qualified service
organization with NIST-traceable equipment, when:
• A piece of test equipment does not have a valid calibration sticker,
P:\ECrtf\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach i 43C-TLE S02 V-l .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 12 of 17
• A calibration seal is broken, or
• A unit is found to be out of calibration or is performing erratically.
Unscheduled 2-point adjustments will be performed by the site operator and
recorded on a simplified calibration form.
6.5.5 Calibration Requirements - The calibration service organization will provide a record
of calibration data and a certification that calibrations are traceable to NIST.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (SOz) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 13 of 17
Table 1. Ambient Monitoring Equipment Operations and Maintenance Schedule
Operation
Frequency
Reference
All analyzers
a.
b.
e.
f.
l.
J-
Zero check/adjust
Dilution air check
Check span response
(circa 80 ppb)
Check precision response Weekly
(circa 40 ppb)
Multipoint calibration
Line loss check
Replace probe line
Clean fan filter
Check 10 m inlet filter
Each site visit
Each site visit
(or by remote activator)
Weekly
(or by remote activator)
SOP
SOP
SOP
SOP
Quarterly* SOP
Semiannual* SOP
as needed SOP
as needed Thermo
Monthly Thermo
(change as required)
Zero, span (80 ppb), and precision (40 ppb) checks will be performed every
other day
Thermo Model 146C multigas calibration system
a. Check cylinder pressure
b. Check line pressure
c. Audit/Calibrate the mass
flow controllers
d. Clean fan filter
e. Check system for leaks
Each site visit SOP
Each site visit SOP
Quarterly SOP
as needed Thermo
Prior to each analyzer SOP
calibration
Note: ppm = parts per million
* or more frequently as needed.
Source: MACTEC E&C.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach ] 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 14 of 17
Table 2. S02 Calibration Criteria Table
Type of
check
ZPS Unadjusted Calibration
Corrective action*
Adjusted
Calibration
Analyzer Response
Field
Data
Acceptable
Analyzer
Zero
0.000 and ± 0.8 ppb
none
none
Between 0.000
and
± 0.8 ppb
From ±0.8 ppb to ± 1.5 ppb
Perform Zero
adjustment
Adjust
>±1.5 ppb
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Precision
± 5% between
Known and
Observed
Concentrations
Span
< ±10% between Known and Observed
Concentrations
none
none
> ± 10% and < ± 15% % between Known
and Observed Concentrations.
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
none
> ± 15% % between Known and
Observed Concentrations.
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Correlation
Coefficient
> 0.995
none
none
> 0.995
< 0.995
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Frequency of analyzer checks
ZPS
One ZPS every other day
On demand to facilitate troubleshooting
Following a multipoint calibration prior to leaving the site
Calibration
Minimum one multipoint calibration every 6 months, including line loss check
As required per QC results
Adjusted Calibration must occur within 24 hours of the unadjusted calibration
General
1. Unadjusted Calibration does not have to be followed by an Adjusted Calibration only if all analyzer responses are
in a 2 percent of full scale range.
2. Line loss check results should be within 2 ppb or corrective action is required.
3. Shelter Temperature acceptable range: 20 - 30 deg C (± 2 deg C)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transilion\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP\3-A Attach I 43C-TLE S02 V-l.doc.x MACTEC Inc
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 15 of 17
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for
Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State
and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance
for Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods.
EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements.
EPA-600/4-82-060.
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 53.23c
The National Air Monitoring Strategy, Final Draft, 4/29/04,
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/monstratdoc.html
Thermo Scientific Instruction Manual, Model 43C Trace Level SO2 Analyzer
EPA Office of Air Quality, Planning and Standards, Emission, Analysis and Monitoring
Division, Thermo Electron Corporation Model 43C-TLE Trace Level Sulfur Dioxide
Instrument Version 2.1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach I 43C-TLE S02 V-l .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (S02) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 16 of 17
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1 Model 43C Trace Level-Enhanced Flow Schematic
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 43C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL SULFUR DIOXIDE (SOz) ANALYZER
Revision No. 2
November 2009
Page 17 of 17
9.0 APPENDICES
Appendix A - Thermo 43C-TLE Calibration Form
MACTEC Engineering & Consulting, Inc.
SQ2 Trace Level Calibration
Adjusted / Unadjusted:
ADJUSTED [S02 Gas Vendor:
Scott-Marrin
PMT V:
S02 Gas S/N:
CC40024
DC Lamp
Project Name:
CASTNET
S02 Gas Exp:
24-Jan-06
5V {+):
Project Number:
6064068006
S02 Gas Tank PSl:
1800
15V (+):
Site Name:
BEL116
S02 Gas Work PSl:
35
15V (-):
Site Location:
Beltsville ,MD
S02 Gas ppb Cone:
2611
Batt V:
Analyzer Manufacturer:
Analyzer Model:
Analyzer S/N:
Last Calibration:
Dilution Cal Manuf:
Dilution Cal Model:
Dilution Cal S/N:
Dilution Cal last Cal:
Thermo Shelter Temp (DegC):
43C-TL Barometer (Inches):
146C
000168
4-Aug-06
S02 slope:
S02 int:
S02 corr:
Sample Flow:
Int Temp:
Chamber Temp:
Chamber Pres:
Lamp Int:
Range:
Avg Time:
S02 bkg:
S02 coef:
AS LEFT
PMT V:
DC Lamp V:
5V {+):
15V (+):
15V (-):
Batt V:
Sample Flow:
Int Temp:
Chamber Temp:
Chamber Pres:
Lamp Int (kHz):
Range:
Avg Time:
S02 bkg:
S02 coef:
Calibration Point:
Gas Calibrator
Cone (ppb)
DAS S02 response
(ppb)
S02 % error
zero-air (cc/min)
Gas (cc/min)
Time Set:
Time Taken:
I zero
0^00^""
0.1
0
1
88.35
93.9
6.3%
2741
96
2
70.83
75.0
5.9%
3443
96
3
38.51
40.5
5.2%
3474
52
4
25.83
27.4
6.1%
3503
35
5
12.85
13.6
5.9%
3521
17
Notes:
Technician: [ R. D. Dickens |Date: | 7-Aug-06 {Reviewer: Q
Signature: | j
P:\ECMVP\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 1 43C-TLE S02 V-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page I of 19
III. FIELD MANUAL
A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 2: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE
ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
AUTOMATED EQUIVALENT METHOD: RFCA-0981-054
Effective
Date:
H/i/2-Q
a ^
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations
Manager
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
—=gif—H-
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 2 of 19
III. A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 2: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE
ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide uniform guidance
for the operation of Thermo Scientific Model 48C-TLE CO Monitors.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to enhanced trace level CO monitors operating at CASTNET sites.
3.0 SUMMARY
Thermo 48C-TLE Enhanced Trace Level Carbon Monoxide (CO) Analyzer
Carbon Monoxide (CO), a colorless, odorless, tasteless, highly poisonous gas that has
detrimental effects on human health. CO originates from the partial oxidation of
hydrocarbon fuels, such as gasoline and coal. CO affects the oxygen carrying capacity
of the blood. CO can diffuse through the alveolar walls of the lungs and compete with
oxygen for one of the four iron sites in the hemoglobin molecule. The affinity of the
iron site for CO is approximately 210 times greater than oxygen. Low levels of CO can
cause a number of symptoms including headache, mental dullness, dizziness, weakness,
nausea, vomiting and loss of muscular control. In extreme cases, collapse,
unconsciousness and even death can occur.
The Thermo model 48C-TLE is a state of the science instrument for the determination
of trace levels of CO in ambient air. Its principle of operation is Non-Dispersive
Infrared Spectrophotometry (NDIR) coupled with Gas Filter Correlation (GFC). This
SOP will detail the use, calibration, preventive maintenance, cautions and health
warnings of this equipment.
The CO Limit of Detection (LOD) for non-trace level instruments is 1.0 part per million
(ppm) (Code of Federal Regulations, Volume 40, Part 53.23c, or, in the shortened
format used hereafter, 40 CFR 53.23c). The 48C-TLE, however, is capable of
measuring levels as low as 40 parts per billion (ppb) in the atmosphere. This is
accomplished by modifications to the Federal Reference Method (FRM) instrument.
This document will discuss the Trace Level (TL) equipment operating procedures in
detail. (USEPA, Thermo CO SOP Version 1.1, Sec.3.1).
The Model 48C-TLE is based on the principle that CO absorbs infrared radiation at a
wavelength of 4.6 microns. Because infrared absorption of CO in the atmosphere is a
non-linear measurement technique, it is necessary for the instrument electronics to
transform the basic analyzer signal into a linear output. The Model 48C-TLE uses an
exact calibration curve to accurately linearize the instrument output over any range up
to a concentration of 10,000 ppm.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 3 of 19
The sample is drawn into the Thermo 48C-TLE through the SAMPLE bulkhead fitting
as shown (in simplified from) in the instruction manual, page 1-2 (Figure 1-1). As it
enters the instrument, the sample first passes through a permeation drier in order to
reduce atmospheric humidity. Upon exiting, a valve in the plumbing directs the sample
air to the optical bench either directly or through a CO scrubber. Radiation from an
infrared source is passed through a gas filter alternating between CO and N2 by means
of a chopping wheel. The light then passes through a narrow band-pass interference
filter and enters the optical bench where absorption by the sample gas occurs. The
infrared light then exits the optical bench and falls on an infrared detector.
The CO gas filter acts to produce a reference beam which cannot be further attenuated
by CO in the sample cell. The N2 filter is transparent to the infrared radiation and
therefore produces a measured beam which can be absorbed by CO in the cell. The
difference between the two signals is proportional to the concentration of CO in the
sample cell (optical bench). Other gases do not cause interference with the detector
signal since they interact with the reference and measured beams equally. Thus the
GFC system responds specifically to CO. The Thermo 48C-TLE displays the CO
concentration at the front panel and sends a proportional signal to the analog output or a
digital signal to the serial port. The 48C-TLE has four distinct features that allow it to
measure CO at low ppb levels:
• The humidity of the sample air is reduced by passing though a permeation
dryer.
• The baseline (zero signal value) is adjusted hourly (automatically zeroed) by
passing the sample air through a heated Carolite catalytic converter that
eliminates any CO signal in the sample stream.
• The instrument has an ultra-sensitive or "hot" detector.
• The correlation wheel is constantly flushed with zero air.
3.1 Thermo 48C-TLE Enhanced Trace Level CO Analyzer Overview and Set Points
Note: Standard local time is used for monitoring and updated by the data logger.
Page 1-3 of the instrument manual shows the Thermo 48C-TLE analyzer specifications.
Refer to page 3-1 of the instrument manual (Thermo Scientific part # 102255-00 20 Dec
2007) for a graphic representation of the front panel features and controls. The controls
and indicators on the front of the Thermo 48C-TLE analyzer (from top to bottom and
left to right) are as follows: The display screen, POWER switch, RUN pushbutton,
MENU pushbutton, ~ pushbutton, ENTER pushbutton, HELP pushbutton, M
pushbutton, pushbutton, and the "4 pushbutton. The large vacuum fluorescent display
(VFD) (on the front) shows the concentration reading of ambient air CO and that of
standard dilutions for calibration purposes. For data collection via the analogue ports,
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - lransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 4 of 19
output voltages are adjusted to match the zero and full scale readings of the instrument
and are used as the true indicator of concentration for the data logger.
Refer to page 2-3 of the instrument manual (Thermo Scientific part # 102255-00 20 Dec
2007) for graphic representation of the rear panel controls and indicators. The
connections and controls on the rear panel of the analyzer at the top right are the
EXHAUST bulkhead fitting connector (where the sample pump is attached), the
SAMPLE bulkhead connector and the ZERO/SPAN auto calibration ports. The
SAMPLE and ZERO/SPAN fittings are connected inside the instrument to a 3-way
solenoid valve that can select between them. This feature is not used because
CASTNET trace level instruments are supplied calibration and challenge gases near the
collection inlet, 10 m above ground and far removed from the instrument itself. The
model TLE self zeroes hourly by passing the sample through a scrubber to eliminate
any CO signal. A fitting labeled PURGE is a zero air/nitrogen supply that bathes the
chopper box to induce a cleaner signal. The lower connections on the left from top to
bottom are as follows: ANALOG OUTPUT connectors, voltage and current (see
manual pages 3-7 & 9-6 for pin identifications), a DB25 connector for remote activation
of features via contact closures and two male DB9 serial connectors (see Thermo
manual Appendix B). The remaining features on the rear are a fused power connector
and the inlet and exhaust fans (with filters).
Refer to page 3-3 of the Model 48C-TLE instrument manual for the flowchart of the
menu-driven software. This flowchart gives a quick reference to all the menus and
submenus available to the operator.
3.1.1 Mode Setting
Mode should be set on RUN with the CO concentration and the time displayed. If not,
correct and mark in site logbook.
3.1.2 Range Setting
Press MENU pushbutton, scroll to RANGE and press ENTER. Range should be set at
2 ppm; if not, use the * and ~ pushbuttons to correct the setting and note in site
logbook. Any data recorded in other than the 0.0 to 2.0 ppm range must be clearly
identified.
3.1.3 Averaging Time
Press MENU pushbutton, scroll to AVERAGING TIME and press ENTER. Averaging
time should be set on 10 sec; if not, use the ~ and J- pushbuttons to correct the setting
and note in site logbook.
3.1.4 Voltages*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
VOLTAGES and press ENTER. Observe the voltage readings on the front panel and
record on the site logbook. The Bias voltage should be between -105 and -115V.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ! Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 5 of 19
3.1.5 Temperatures*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
TEMPERATURE and press ENTER. Observe the temperature readings on the front
panel and record on the site logbook. The internal temperature should be between 25 °C
and 40 °C. The chamber temperature should be between 40 °C and 50 °C.
3.1.6 Pressure*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
PRESSURE and press ENTER. Observe the pressure reading on the display panel and
record on the site logbook. If not within limits (400 - 1000), corrective action must be
taken. Pressure of less than 400 indicates a blocked sample line. Note initial and
corrected pressure in site logbook.
3.1.7 Flow*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
FLOW and press ENTER. Observe the sample flow on the screen and record the
unadjusted flow. Flow rates between 0.35 and 2.5 Lpm are acceptable. If the flow is
unacceptable, corrective action must be taken. Note the initial and corrected flow on the
site logbook.
The model TLE has its chopper box purged with zero air. This flow rate not monitored
electronically but must be kept near but under 140 ml/min. Faster flows may impair the
ability of the IR source to reach operating temperature. For a "green" restrictor a head
pressure of 15 pounds per square inch (psi) results in the desired flow.
3.1.8 Sample/Reference Ratio
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
SAMPLE/REF. RATIO and press ENTER. Observe the reading and record on the site
logbook. The ratio should be between 1.14 and 1.18. If the ratio is off by more than .02;
the correlation wheel may need to be replaced.
3.1.9 AGC Intensity*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
AGC INTENSITY and press ENTER. Observe the reading on the front panel and
record on the site logbook. The intensity should be between 200,000 and 300,000 Hz.
3.1.10 Motor Speed*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
MOTOR SPEED and press ENTER. Observe the reading on the front panel and record
in the site logbook. The speed should be 100%. If not; the correlation wheel motor or
control board may need replacing.
* These parameters have alarm messages that, if enabled, can appear on the front panel
when they drift out of specified ranges. Please refer to the instrument manual pp.3-48
through 3-61 for additional information.
P:\ECM\P CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0vAp - I Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 6 of 19
3.2 Health and Safety Warnings
Note: To prevent personal injury, please heed these warnings concerning the
48C-TLE.
CO is a poisonous gas. Vent any CO or calibration span gas to the atmosphere rather
than into the shelter or other sampling area. If this is impossible, limit exposure to CO
by getting fresh air every 5 to 10 minutes. If one experiences light headedness,
headache or dizziness, leave the area immediately. The Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA) limits long-term workplace exposure levels to 35 ppm.
3.2.1 The IR source is a filament resistor that has an electrical current running through it. The
IR source can become very hot. When troubleshooting, allow the instrument to cool off
especially if you suspect the IR source as the cause of trouble.
3.2.2 Always use a third ground wire on all instruments.
3.2.3 Always unplug the analyzer when servicing or replacing parts.
3.2.4 If it is mandatory to work inside an analyzer while it is in operation, use extreme
caution to avoid contact with high voltages. The analyzer has a 110 volt Volts
Alternating Current (VAC) power supply. Refer to the manufacturer's instruction
manual and know the precise locations of the VAC components before working on the
instrument.
3.2.5 Avoid electrical contact with jewelry. Remove rings, watches, bracelets, and necklaces
to prevent electrical bums.
Source: (USEPA, Thermo CO SOP Version 1.1, Sec.3.4)
3.3 Cautions
To prevent damage to the 48C-TLE delicate internal parts, all cautions should
immediately precede the applicable step in this SOP. The following precautions
should be taken:
• Wear an anti-static wrist strap that is properly connected to earth ground (note
that when the analyzer is unplugged, the chassis is not at earth ground);
• If an anti-static wrist strap is not available, be sure to touch a grounded metal
object before touching any internal components;
• Normally, if Teflon™ filters are used in the sample train, cleaning the optical
bench will not be required. However, in the event that the bench is cleaned, be
careful to avoid damaging the interior of the sample chamber. This instrument
has a series of mirrors that deflect the light in order to increase the path length.
The mirrors are aligned at the factory and are very fragile. If the mirrors become
misaligned, the IR light beam will not be properly directed at the detector
resulting in loss of sensitivity. Use extreme caution when cleaning or servicing
the sample chamber. Avoid jarring the instrument. This may damage, misalign or
crack the mirrors and require expensive repairs.
P: ECMP\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'\Ap - I Field SOP to be updated'3-A Attach 2 48C-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 7 of 19
• Keep the interior of the analyzer clean.
• Inspect the system regularly for structural integrity.
• To prevent major problems with leaks, make sure that all sampling lines are
reconnected after required checks and before leaving the site.
• Inspect tubing for cracks and leaks. Check the areas of the permeation dryer
where they come into contact with other parts.
• It is recommended that the analyzer be leak checked after replacement of any
pneumatic parts.
• If cylinders are used in tandem with Mass Flow Control (MFC) calibrators (e.g.
the Thermo 146C dynamic dilution system), use and transport of cylinders is a
major concern. Gas cylinders can sometimes contain pressures as high as 2000
psi. Handling of cylinders must be done in a safe manner. If a cylinder is
accidentally dropped and valve breaks off, the cylinder can become explosive or a
projectile. This can be a lethal situation.
• Transportation and /or shipping of cylinders is regulated by the Department of
Transportation (DOT). It is strongly recommended to contact the DOT or
Highway Patrol to learn the most recent regulations concerning transport of
cylinders.
• CO is a highly poisonous gas. Long term exposure can cause problems with motor
coordination and mental acuity. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be
available at all locations where CO cylinders are stored or used. MSDS can be
obtained from the DOT or from the vendor the CO was obtained.
• It is possible (and practical) to blend other compounds with CO. If this is the case,
MSDS for all compounds must be made available to all staff that use and handle
the cylinders or dynamic dilution devices.
Source: (USEPA, Thermo CO SOP Version 1.1, Sec.3.5)
3.4 Interferences
3.4.1 Water Vapor:
Studies have shown conclusively that NDIR analyzers have interference from water
vapor. Water absorbs very strongly across several bands of IR spectra. Water vapor
interference occurs because water vapor absorption of light in the region of 3.1, 5.0-5.5
and 7.1 -10.0 jam in the IR region. Since water vapor absorbs light in this region, this
has a quenching effect on the absorption of light by CO. The Thermo 48C-TLE is
equipped with a permeation drier, which effectively scrubs all water and water vapor.
No maintenance is required on the dryer but it should be replaced every two years or
earlier if water interference is suspected.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
PageS of 19
3.4.2 Carbon Dioxide:
CO2 absorbs in the IR spectrum at 2.7, 5.2, and 8.0 to 12.0 (am. This is very close to the
regions that CO absorbs within as well. However, since atmospheric carbon dioxide is
much higher in concentration than CO, this UV spectral range must be avoided. To
prevent interference from light in this spectral region, the Thermo 48C-TLE analyzer
has a band pass filter that blocks these wavelengths. The 4.5 p.m band is used for CO
measurements.
Source: (USEPA, Thermo CO SOP Version 1.1, Sec.3.6)
3.5 Personnel Qualifications
The person(s) chosen to operate the Thermo 48C-TLE should have a minimum
understanding of basic chemistry and electronics are a must. The understanding of
digital circuitry is helpful, but not required.
Source: (USEPA, Thermo CO SOP Version 1.1, Sec.3.7)
4.0 EQUIPMENT AND REAGENTS
4.1 Thermo 146C calibration system
Must produce a NIST-traceable calibration test atmosphere generated in accordance
with procedures stated in Section 2.6.1, of 40CFR part 58, Appendix A. CO
Calibrations are performed according to the QA Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Volume II.
4.2 SO„ NO, and CO Calibration Gas Certification
The calibration gas being used for this project will be NIST-traceable in accordance
with the requirements of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Establishing True
Concentrations of Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Air Pollution Analyzers
(Protocol No. 2), June 1979. Gas cylinders will require certification every 12 months.
4.3 Thermo 111C zero air system with compressor.
This is the Zero Air source used by the 146C to reduce ppm level standard cylinder
concentration in order to produce calibration streams within zero to 80 percent of the
selected range. For CO the range is set at zero to 2 ppm.
4.4 Monitor calibration forms
5.0 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
5.1 Monthly and Semiannual Checks on the Analyzers, Calibrator, and Zero Air
Supply
Refer to Table 1 for a complete checklist of scheduled maintenance. Refer to equipment
manuals as necessary.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0-Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 9 of 19
5.2 Calibration Gas Certification
The calibration gas being used for this project will be NIST-traceable by following the
requirements of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Establishing True Concentrations of
Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Air Pollution Analyzers (Protocol No. 2),
June 1979. New gas cylinders will require certification after 6 months and then every 24
months, if concentrations are found to be stable.
5.3 Supporting Test Equipment
The monitoring instrument, calibrator, supporting equipment, and recording device are
housed in a temperature-controlled shelter. The shelter is insulated and equipped with
lockable doors and an air conditioner and/or heater.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Calibration
Periodic calibrations are required to be performed according to the procedures outlined
in this section. The outlines presented in this section describe procedures to be followed
during adjusted and unadjusted calibrations of the Thermo 48C-TLE analyzer. There are
a number of conditions which should be met prior to a calibration or a zero, precision,
span (ZPS) check.
~ First the analyzer must reach equilibrium (allowed to run overnight from initial
power-up).
~ Second, the range used during the calibration or ZPS check must be the same as
the monitoring range.
~ Third, all operational adjustments to the analyzer should be completed prior to
calibration.
~ Fourth, all parts of the gas flow system, such as sample lines, particulate filters,
etc., which are used during the normal sample monitoring must be used during
the calibration.
~ Finally, all recording devices and outputs used during normal monitoring must
be calibrated prior to the instrument calibration and be used during calibration or
ZPS checks. The site temperature should be between 20°C and 30°C plus or
minus 2 degrees.
The field technician will record all results on the respective analyzer calibration
form. All calibration activities will be recorded in the site logbook.
6.1.1 Calibration Techniques Description
6.1.1.1 Thermo 146C Calibration System:
a. Prior to changing the normal sampling configuration, clearly record in the
logbook all channels affected by the calibration sequence.
b. Pneumatic Connections
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0-Ap - I Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 10 of 19
No connections are necessary for ZPS or a full calibration. A typical CASTNET
site configuration has the outlet of the Thermo 146C routed to a 10m high inlet
where the samples are collected. In order to check for line losses through the 10m
Teflon line all the way to the inlet point, the outlet line of the 146C must be
disconnected and replaced with a short piece of !4 inch tubing connected directly
to the back of the analyzer. Results should be within 0.2 ppm of results obtained
through the normal sampling train. This check should be performed during semi-
annual mutli-point calibrations. Feeding of the various gas blends must be done
via an open tee to avoid pressurizing the system.
c. Gas Cylinder, Zero Air, and Regulator Preparation
CASTNET sites are configured to automatically run daily ZPS checks. Each site
has a permanent 146C dynamic dilution box, a 111 zero air generator and an
aluminum standard cylinder. Follow the procedure below if the standard
cylinder's certification has expired or been consumed.
~ Connect the stainless-steel regulator to the span gas cylinder. Do not use
below 200 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) of pressure.
TM
~ Connect a %-inch Teflon line from the regulator to the calibrator bulkhead
fitting marked GAS A. Adjust the regulator output pressure to 25 psig and
check all fittings for leaks using a suitable detergent solution.
~ Verify that the compressor feeding ambient air to the 111 box is set to 40-50
psig and that the delivery pressure of the Thermo 111 is set to 25 psig.
6.1.1.2 Thermo 48C-TLE Analyzer:
~ Instrument must be in RUN mode
~ RANGE is set to 2.0 ppm
~ TIME CONSTANT at 10 sec.
6.1.2 Adjusted Calibration Procedure:
Note: It is MANDA TOR Y to perform an UNADJUSTED calibration (record the
signal values for a challenge range w/o forcing the zero or 80% of range values)
prior to performing the AD JUSTED calibration (i.e. forcing instrument calibration
using the Zero and/or 80 percent of range values).
6.1.2.1 Before calibrating, record all information requested on the top portion of the Thermo
48C-TLE calibration form. A filled example is shown in appendix A.
6.1.2.2 Down affected channel in data logger. Clearly mark the logbook that the CO channel is
marked DOWN to prevent calibration data from being included in the daily data
summary.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - iransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 48C-TLE CO SOP.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 11 of 19
6.1.2.3 Set the calibrator to deliver zero air to the Thermo 48C-TLE:
1. Press the^ ^ pushbutton to switch the unit into local mode,
2. Toggle between the RUN screens and select "GAS OFF?" by placing the *by the
words using #
3. Select CO? using 4 and press enter. This activates the standard cylinder valve in
the 146C as well as the flow of calibration gases into the analyzer.
4. Select SPAN 0 (zero air only) using 4"
The 146C needs to be programmed to recognize CO as a valve reference as well as
the standard tank concentration. SPANS 0 through 5 are also programmable to
deliver pre-selected concentrations and total flows within the capabilities of the
MFC in the box. Refer to the SOP or manual for the 146C, pp.3-14 to 3-18 to alter
these if necessary. Typical preset values are as follows: Span 0 —> zero air, Span 1
—>0.1 ppm, Span 2 —>0.2 ppm, Span 3 ->0.4 ppm, Span 4 ->0.8 ppm and Span 5 —>
1.6 ppm (80 percent of scale). Total flow —> Typically 3.6 LPM in order to satisfy
the 0.5 LPM demand of the analyzer as well as staying within the diluting
capabilities of a 0 to 100/0 to 10,000 std. gas/ZA MFC combo.
Allow at least 15 minutes for the Thermo 48C-TLE to stabilize between SPANS.
5. Select SPANS 1 through 5 and record signal values (in ppb) on the Thermo 48C-
TLE calibration form (Appendix A).
6.1.2.4 If the zero value for the analyzer is not within ±0.15 ppm, adjust the ZERO. Press
MENU, then select Calibration and press ENTER. Select Calibrate Zero and Press
Enter. Press Enter again to force the instrument to read zero while measuring zero air.
Set the 146C to SPAN 5 (the 80% of scale value) and following the same procedure
force the instrument to read 1.8 ppm while receiving the 1.8 ppm stream (or
approximation) by entering this value and pressing ENTER. A reading with 5 percent
of the value is acceptable.
6.1.2.5 Select SPANS 0 through 5 and verify the instrument's linearity and zero stability.
Record all values on the Thermo 48C-TLE calibration form (Appendix A). A filled
example is shown in Appendix A. A paper copy of the completed audit/calibration
must be placed in the site file.
Always compare the instrument's readings with the data logger to verify similarity.
If manual mixing is desired, a seventh option (MANUAL) under "GAS A" menu is available.
Calculate the required dilution air and gas flow necessary to obtain a desired range of
concentrations using the following formula:
Cone xF
CO ppm = —
Fair + F gas
Where:
Concgas= Span gas cylinder concentration
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 48C-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 12 of 19
Fgas = Flow of span gas and
Fair = Flow of the dilution air
Example: Calibration Gas Mixing Ratios
CO
Calibration
Gas Calibrator
zero-air
Gas
Point:
Cone(ppm)
(seem)
(seem)
zero
0.0
3600
0.0
1
0.1
3794
5.9*
2
0.2
3788
11.7
3
0.4
3777
23.4
4
0.8
3754
46.8
5
1.6
3704
93.6
Note: SCCM = Standard Cubic Centimeters per minute
* value below the recommended usable range of the MFC
Source Gas Cone (ppm): 61.5
6.1.2.6 All documents related to the calibration will be signed by the field technician. The
calibration must be checked and verified by the field manager.
6.1.2.7 Return the Thermo 146C to STANDBY mode by pressing the MENU pushbutton,
select GAS OFF and press ENTER. This turns off all flow out of the 146C.
6.1.2.8 Up affected channel in data logger. Clearly note in the logbook that the CO channel is
UP to allow ambient data to be included in the daily data summary. Affix an adjusted
calibration sticker to the Thermo 48C-TLE. Record the activities in the site logbook.
6.1.3 Auto Zero and scrubber efficiency validation
The 48C-TLE is equipped with a function to run an auto zero at a predetermined time.
The CO analyzer will be controlled by the data logger to perform an auto zero once an
hour, in which the analyzer redirects the sample flow through a heated Carolite CO
scrubber for 5 minutes and self calibrates the zero value. The 48C-TLE then resumes
ambient sampling. This feature must be disabled from instrument control. Refer to the
manual pp. 4-12 through 4-16. The CO scrubber is designed to reduce the CO signal of a
0.1 ppm stream by 95%. Refer to the manual pp. 3-78 through 3-83. The model 48C-
TLE,is equipped with a specific menu entry that allows direct control of the "zero" valve
(see diagram) in order to perform this test. Select TEST SCUBBER EFF under the
SERVICE menu (p. 3-3, fig. 3-2). Select SCRUB SPAN GAS and enter 0.1 ppm, select
SCRUB TEST DURATION and enter a suitable time (e.g. 5 min.). Open the "zero"
valve by selecting SCRUBBER TEST ON/OFF and toggling between TURN ON? and
OFF? The instrument calculates the % difference from the entered value and the signal
display.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 13 of 19
Record results in instrument log and electronic calibration form (Appendix A) "Notes"
section.
6.2 Zero, Precision and Span Checks
In the event the field engineer must conduct a manual ZPS, follow these procedures.
6.2.1 Zero (±0.05 ppm), span (1.8 ppm), and precision (0.25 ppm) checks will be performed
every other day. The precision data point will be collected but results will not be used
for data validation. These will be unadjusted checks and will use Span 3 and Span 5 in
the unadjusted calibration procedure above. Span checks must be within ±10 percent of
true value; span checks greater than ±10 percent are a warning that will alert the field
engineer to investigate and correct the system as are zero checks above 0.05 ppm or
below -0.05 ppm. Span checks greater than 15 percent will invalidate associated data
unless the site analyzer is shown to be within the criterion (i.e. the problem is not within
the sampling system).
6.2.2 Physical integrity of the analyzer will be checked and the findings documented on the
service log for the analyzer.
6.2.2.1 All site activities and observations will be annotated in the site logbook.
6.3 Calculations
6.3.1 For each of the calibration points, calculate the percent error using the following
formula:
Percent error = ^1 ^1 (100)
X,
where:
Xi = known concentration (ppm), and
Yi = analyzer response (ppm).
Enter the appropriate values on the calibration form. The calibration from performs this
calculation automatically
6.3.2 For multi-point calibrations, if any one point exceeds the 5-percent error band, perform
an adjusted calibration. Perform a linear regression on data (automatic in form). Slope
should be between 0.85 and 1.15, the intercept should be within ±2 percent of full scale,
and correlation should be greater than 0.995. For any calibration or verification, all
points must be within ±2 percent of full scale of the best-fit straight line. If not perform
adjusted calibration. Zero should read between -0.05 ppm and 0.05 ppm.
6.4 Documentation
Field technicians will record all activities in the site log. Copies of calibration and
certification sheets will be stored on site.
6.5 Support Equipment Calibration
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'^p - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOX1DE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 14 of 19
6.5.1 It is essential that each piece of data acquisition and support test equipment's calibration
status be known and certified at all times. Calibration against a source traceable to a
national standard for test equipment (i.e., scopes, multimeters, frequency counters)
should be made at least every 12 months.
The following equipment calibration procedure applies to any piece of test equipment
used as a transfer standard for calibration of monitoring system instrumentation.
6.5.2 Calibration Records
Associated with each piece of test equipment is an equipment calibration and
maintenance record, indicating the last calibration date and the next due date. These
records are maintained in the project test equipment file.
6.5.3 Scheduled Calibration
Test equipment will be calibrated using NIST-traceable equipment at least every 12
months. Calibration will be verified using NIST-traceable standards prior to use in the
field.
6.5.4 Unscheduled Calibration
Test equipment will be calibrated by MACTEC, Inc. personnel or by a qualified service
organization with equipment traceable to NIST, when:
~ A piece of test equipment does not have a valid calibration sticker,
~ A calibration seal is broken, or
~ A unit is found to be out of calibration or is performing erratically.
Unscheduled 2-point adjustments will be performed by the site operator and
recorded on a simplified calibration form.
6.5.5 Calibration Requirements
The calibration service organization will provide a record of calibration data and a
certification that calibrations are traceable to NIST.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -
Field SOP to be updated .3-A Attach 2 48C-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 15 of 19
Table 1. Ambient Monitoring Equipment Operations and Maintenance Schedule
Operation
Frequency
Reference
All analyzers
a. Zero check/adjust
Each site visit
SOP
b. Dilution air check
Each site visit
SOP
(or by remote activator)
c. Check span response
Weekly
SOP
(1.8 ppm)
(or by remote activator)
d. Check precision response
Weekly
SOP
(0.25 ppm)
e. Multipoint calibration
Quarterly*
SOP
f. Line loss check
Semi-annual*
SOP
g. Change sample air scrubber
Annually*
Thermo
h. Replace probe line
as needed
SOP
i. Clean fan filter
as needed
Thermo
j. Check inlet filter
Each site visit
Thermo
(change monthly)
k. Zero, span (1.8 ppm), and precision (0.25 ppm) checks will
be performed every
other day.
2. Thermo Model 146C multigas calibration system
a.
Check cylinder pressure Each site visit
SOP
b.
Check line pressure Each site visit
SOP
c.
Audit/Calibrate the mass flow
Quarterly
controllers
d.
Clean fan filter as needed
Thermo
e.
Check system for leaks Prior to each analyzer
SOP
calibration
Note: ppm = parts per million.
* or more frequently if needed.
Source: MACTEC E&C.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 16 of 19
Table 2: CO Calibration Criteria Table
Type of
check
ZPS
Unadjusted
Calibration
Corrective action *
Adjusted
Calibration
Analyzer Response
Field
Data
Acceptable Analyzer
response
Zero
0.000 and ± 0.05 ppm
None
None
Between 0.000 and ±
0.05 ppm
From > ± 0.05 ppm to > ± 0.15 ppm
Perform Zero
adjustment
Adjust
> ± 0.15 ppm
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Precision
+ 5 percent between
known and observed
concentrations
Span
< ± 10% between known and
observed concentrations
None
None
> ± 10% and < ± 15% between
known and observed concentrations
Perform
adjusted
calibration
None
> ± 15% between known and
observed concentrations
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Correlation
Coefficient
> 0.995
None
None
< 0.995
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
>0.995
Frequency of analyzer checks
ZPS
One ZPS every other day
On demand to facilitate trouble shooting
Following a multipoint calibration prior to leaving the site
Calibration
Minimum one multipoint calibration every 6 months, including line loss check
As required per QC results
Adjusted calibration must occur within 24 hours of the unadjusted calibration
General
1. Unadjusted calibration does not have to be followed by an adjusted calibration only if all analyzer responses are in a
2 percent of fall scale range.
2. Line loss check results should be within 0.2 ppm or corrective action is required.
3. Shelter Temperature acceptable range: 20 - 30 deg C (± 2 deg C)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'Ap - I Field SOP to be updated 3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 17 of 19
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for
Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State
and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance
for Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods.
EP A-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements.
EPA-600/4-82-060.
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 53.23c
Merck Index, twelfth edition 1996, page 296
Seinfeld, John H., Atmospheric Chemistry and Physics of Air Pollution, 1986, page 54
The National Air Monitoring Strategy, Final Draft, 4/29/04,
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/monstratdoc.html
Thermo Scientific Instruction Manual, Model 48C Trace Level CO Analyzer
EPA Office of Air Quality, Planning and Standards, Emission, Analysis and Monitoring
Division, Thermo Electron Corporation Model 48C-TLE Trace Level CO Instrument
Version 1.1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updatedV3-A Attach 2 48C-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOXIDE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 18 of 19
8.0 FIGURES
Figure IModel 48C Trace Level-Enhanced Flow Schematic
Electronics
White Cell
T-—IR Detector
4
Filter
IR Sourc
4
N2 j *
Gas Filter Wheel
Chopper
Chopper Motor
4
Flow
Sensor
Pressure
Sensor
V
L
r
A
-{>-
Zero Valve
A
CO Scrubber
Capillary
Permeation Drier
Pump
Source: Thermo Scientific
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 4SC-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 48C-TLE ENHANCED TRACE LEVEL CARBON MNOX1DE (CO) ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 19 of 19
9.0 APPENDICES
Appendix A - Thermo 48C-TL Calibration Form
CO Trace Level Calibration
AS FOUND AS LEFT
Adjusted / Unadjusted:
ADJUSTED |CO Gas Vendor:
Scott-Marrin
Bias Voltage:
-114.4
Bias Voltage:
CO Gas S/N:
CC40024
5V (+):
5V (+):
Project Name:
CASTNET
CO Gas Exp:
24-Jan-06
15V (+):
15V (+):
Project Number:
6064068006
CO Gas Tank PSI:
1800
15V (-):
15V (-):
Site Name:
BEL116
CO Gas Work PSI:
35
Batt V:
Batt V:
Site Location:
Beltsville, MD
CO Gas ppm cone:
50.6
S/R Ratio:
1.145969
S/R Ratio:
Int Temp:
Int Temp:
Analyzer Manufacturer:
Thermo
Shelter Temp (DegC):
28.0
ChamberTemp:
47.0
ChamberTemp:
Analyzer Model:
48C-TL
Barometer (Inches):
29.89
Chamber Pres:
738.0
Chamber Pres:
Analyzer S/N:
000145
Sample Flow:
0.535
Sample Flow:
Last Calibration:
13-Dec-05
AGC Int:
198K
AGC Int:
Motor Speed:
100.0%
Motor Speed:
Dilution Cal Manuf:
Thermo
Dilution Cal Model:
146C
CO slope:
1.0050
CO Range:
2
CO Range:
Dilution Cal S/N:
000168
CO int:
-0.0007
CO bkg:
3.279
CO bkg:
Dilution Cal last Cal:
4-Aug-06
CO corr:
1.0000
CO coef:
1.01
CO coef:
Calibration Point:
Gas Calibrator
Cone (ppm)
DAS CO response
(ppm)
CO % error
zero-air (cc/min)
Gas (cc/min)
Time Set:
Time Taken:
zero
0.000
0.000
3535
0 * "
1
1.719
1.730
0.7%
2742
96
2
1.387
1.390
0.2%
3443
97
3
0.746
0.748
0.3%
3481
52
4
0.496
0.495
-0.3%
3502
35
5
0.247
0.250
1.4%
3527
17
Notes:
Technician: |R. D. Dickens |Date: I 7-Aug-06|Reviewer: 1 |Date: [
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ) Field SOP to be updated\3-A Attach 2 48C-TLE CO SOP.docx
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 1 of 19
III. FIELD MANUAL
A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 3: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY
NO/NOy ANALYZER
Effective
Date:
Reviewed by:
///i/xoot
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations
Manager
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 2 of 19
III. A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 3: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY
NO/ NOy ANALYZER
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent
guidance for the operation of Thermo Scientific (Thermo) Model 42CY NO/NOy
Analyzer.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to enhanced monitoring for NO/NOy performed at CASTNET sites.
3.0 SUMMARY
Reactive nitrogen compounds (NOy) have been identified as precursors for both ozone
and fine particulate matter (PM2.5). Measurements of NOy constitute a valuable adjunct
to current nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) monitoring because the
individual species comprising NOy include not only NO and NO2 but also other organic
nitroxyl compounds that have recently been shown to play a significant role in the
photochemical ozone (O3) formation process.
NOy consists of all oxides of nitrogen in which the oxidation state of the N atom is +2
or greater, ie, the sum of all reactive nitrogen oxides including NOx (NO + NO2) and
other nitrogen oxides referred to as NOz. The major components of NOz include nitrous
acids [nitric acid (HNO3), and nitrous acid (HONO)], organic nitrates [peroxyl acetyl
nitrate (PAN), methyl peroxyl acetyl nitrate (MPAN), and peroxyl propionyl nitrate,
(PPN)].
NO + N02 + NOz = NOy
The model 42CY is an instrument for the determination of trace levels of NOy by its
chemiluminescent reaction with O3. This SOP will detail the operation, calibration,
preventive maintenance, cautions and health warnings.
The analytical principle is based on the chemiluminescent reaction of NO with an
excess of O3. This reaction produces a characteristic near infrared luminescence with an
intensity that is linearly proportional to the concentration of NO present. Specifically,
NO + O3 -> N02* + 02
N02*^ N02 + hv
Where:
hv = emitted photon energy
The reaction results in electronically excited NO2 molecules which revert to their
ground state, resulting in an emission of light or chemiluminescence.
To determine the concentration of NO, ambient air is blended with O3 containing air in
a reaction chamber. The chemiluminescence that results from the reaction is monitored
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 3 of 19
by an optically filtered high-sensitivity photomultiplier. The optical filter and
photomultiplier respond to light in a narrow-wavelength band unique to the
NC>2*emission. The electronic signal produced in the photomultiplier is proportional to
the NO concentration.
To measure NOy, sample air is passed through a chemical reduction converter and the
nitroxyl compounds present are reduced to NO. The sample is then blended with O3 and
the chemiluminescent response is proportional to the concentration of NO entering the
converter. The chemical reduction converter uses heated molybdenum to convert
non-NO NOy species to NO. Specifically,
NO2/2 + Mo —> NO + M0O3
Where:
Mo = heated molybdenum reductant
The concentration of NO2 + NOz = (DIF) is calculated as the difference between a
measured NOy value and a measured NO value representing approximately the same
point in time. This procedure is similar to the current methodology used to measure
NOx, however, the converter temperature is higher in order to enhance conversion of
NOz species. In addition, the converter has been moved from inside the instrument to
the sample inlet mounted at 10 meters in order to avoid line losses of "sticky" NOy
species such as HNO3.
A diagram of the 42CY instrument is presented in Figure 1. For the 42CY, ambient
TM
sample is first drawn through a short Teflon sample line and split into two parallel
flow channels using a !4 inch stainless steel cross. Channel 1 passes directly to the
monitor. Channel 2 first goes through a catalytic converter before going to the monitor.
Both streams are microfilered to prevent unwanted deposits on sensitive internal parts in
the analyzer. The fourth port in the cross is for through-the-probe calibration gas
insertions. Flow from each channel is alternately fed to the reaction chamber to detect
the NO. In addition to alternating flows from Channel 1 and Channel 2 to the reactor,
the analyzer also redirects combined sample flow through a pre-reactor in order to
produce an attenuated signal response for establishing its zero value. The signal from
this pre-reactor stream is also used to correct for analyzer drift, and allows the analyzer
to achieve very low detection limits (0.05 ppb) when set to 120 sec averaging time.
Source: (EPA, Thermo NOy SOP Version 1.1, Sec 3.1 and 3.2)
Page 1-5 of the instrument manual (Thermo p/n 4195) presents the Thermo 42CY
analyzer specifications. Refer to page 3-1 of the instrument manual for graphic
representation of the front panel controls and indicators. The controls and indicators on
the front of the Thermo 42CY analyzer (from left to right) are as follows: The display
screen, POWER switch, RUN pushbutton, MENU pushbutton, # pushbutton, ENTER
pushbutton, HELP pushbutton, pushbutton, ~ pushbutton, and the pushbutton.
The large vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) (on the front) indicates the concentration
reading of input gases or sample. Output voltages are adjusted to match the zero and full
\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition .QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 4 ofl9
scale of the instrument and are used as the true indicator of concentration for the
datalogger. Instruments at CASTNET sites are connected serially to the datalogger.
Refer to page 2-3 of the instrument manual for graphic representation of the rear panel
controls and indicators. The connections and controls on the rear panel of the analyzer
(from top left to right) are as follows: bulkhead connectors, CHAMBER (exhaust),
DRY AIR (in), NOy and NO sample inlets. The connectors on the lower left from top to
bottom are as follows: ANALOG OUTPUT, CURRENT OUTPUT, I/O (DB25) and
two male DB9 connectors (see Thermo manual pp. 9-6, 9-8 & Appendix B). The
remaining features on the rear are a controlled fused power connector for the external
converter heater, a screw terminal for the converter's temperature sensor, a/c power in
and 2 fans with filters.
Refer to page 3-3 of the Thermo 42CY instrument manual for the flowchart of the
menu-driven software. This flowchart gives a quick reference to all the menus and
submenus available to the operator.
3.1 Thermo 42CY Analyzer Overview and Set Points
Note: Standard local time is used for monitoring and updated by the data logger.
3.1.1 Mode Setting
Mode should be set on RUN with the NO and NOy concentration and the time
displayed. If not, correct by pressing the RUN pushbutton and mark in site logbook.
3.1.2 Range Setting
Press MENU pushbutton, use the ~ and ~ pushbuttons to scroll to RANGE and press
ENTER. Range should be set at 100 part per billion (ppb); if not, correct the setting by
scrolling to the units and press Enter, then scroll to the correct units (PPB) and ENTER.
If the PPB range is not correct, scroll to RANGE and press ENTER, then scroll to the
proper units and press ENTER. Press MENU to escape back to the main screen and note
in site logbook. Any data recorded in other than the 0 to 100 ppb range must be clearly
identified.
3.1.3 Averaging Time
Press MENU pushbutton, scroll to AVERAGING TIME and press ENTER. Averaging
time should be set on 10 sec; if not, use the ~ and ~ pushbuttons to select the correct
time and Press ENTER to correct the setting and note in site logbook.
3.1.4 Instrument Controls
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to INSTRUMENT CONTROLS and press ENTER.
Check the following items to make sure they are turned ON: OZONATOR, PMT
SUPPLY, TEMPERATURE CORRECTION, and PRESSURE CORRECTION. Check
that the AUTO/MANUAL mode is in AUTO.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 5 of 19
3.1.5 Voltages
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
VOLTAGES and press ENTER. Observe the voltage readings on the front panel and
record on the site logbook. The PMT voltage should be between -90 and -1000.
3.1.6 Temperatures*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
TEMPERATURE and press ENTER. Observe the temperature readings on the front
panel and record on the site logbook. The internal temperature should be between 25°C
and 40°C. The chamber temperature should be between 40 and 50 °C. The PMT cooler
temperature should be between -8 and -14 °C. The external converter temperature
should be at approximately the same temperature as the converter set point (325 °C).
3.1.7 Pressure*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
PRESSURE and press ENTER. Observe the pressure reading on the VFD panel and
record on the site logbook. If not within limits (150-300 mm Hg), corrective action must
be taken. A pressure less than 150 mm Hg indicates a leak in the system, or a pump
problem. Note initial and corrected pressure in site logbook.
3.1.8 Flow*
Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER, scroll to
FLOW and press ENTER. Observe the sample flow and the ozonator flow on the screen
and record the unadjusted flow. Flow rates between 0.5 and 0.75 Lpm are acceptable for
the sample. The ozonator flow should be approximately 120ccm. Depending on the
software version this may say "OK". If the flows are unacceptable, corrective action
must be taken. Note the initial and corrected flows on the site logbook.
*These parameters have alarm messages that, if enabled, can appear on the front panel
when they drift out of specified ranges. Please refer to the instrument manual pp.3-47
through 3-63 for additional information. An alarm cam also be enabled for specific
concentration ranges.
3.2 Health and Safety Warnings
NOTE: To prevent personal injury, please heed these warnings concerning the 42CY.
3.2.1 Nitrogen oxides are a poisonous gas. Vent any nitrogen oxide or calibration span gas to
the atmosphere rather than into the shelter or other sampling area. If this is impossible,
limit exposure to nitrogen oxide by getting fresh air every 5 to 10 minutes. If the
operator experiences light headedness, headache or dizziness, leave the area
immediately.
3.2.2 Always use a third ground wire on all instruments.
3.2.3 Always unplug the analyzer when servicing or replacing parts.
3.2.4 If it is mandatory to work inside an analyzer while it is in operation, use extreme
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 6 of 19
caution to avoid contact with high voltages. The analyzer has a 110 volt Volts
Alternating Current (VAC) power supply. Refer to the manufacturer's instruction
manual and know the precise locations of the VAC components before working on the
instrument.
3.2.5 Avoid electrical contact with jewelry. Remove rings, watches, bracelets, and necklaces
to prevent electrical burns.
3.3 Cautions
To prevent damage to the 42CY, all cautions should immediately precede the
applicable step in this SOP. The following precautions should be taken:
3.3.1 Wear an anti-static wrist strap that is properly connected to earth ground (note that
when the analyzer is unplugged, the chassis is not at earth ground);
3.3.2 If an anti-static wrist strap is not available, be sure to touch a grounded metal object
before touching any internal components;
• Keep the interior of the analyzer clean.
• Inspect the system regularly for structural integrity.
• To prevent major problems with leaks, make sure that all sampling lines are
reconnected after required checks and before leaving the site.
• Inspect tubing for cracks and leaks.
• It is recommended that the analyzer be leak checked after replacement of any
pneumatic parts.
• If cylinders are used in tandem with Mass Flow Control (MFC) calibrators, use
and transport is a major concern. Gas cylinders can sometimes contain pressures
as high as 2000 pounds per square inch (psi). Handling of cylinders must be done
in a safe manner. If a cylinder is accidentally dropped and valve breaks off, the
cylinder can become explosive or a projectile.
• Transportation of cylinders is regulated by the Department of Transportation
(DOT). It is strongly recommended that all agencies contact the DOT or
Highway Patrol to learn the most recent regulations concerning transport of
cylinders.
• Low levels of nitrogen oxides in the air can irritate your eyes, nose, throat, and
lungs, possibly causing you to cough and experience shortness of breath,
tiredness, and nausea. Exposure to low levels can also result in fluid build-up in
the lungs 1 or 2 days after exposure. Breathing high levels of nitrogen oxides can
cause rapid burning, spasms, and swelling of tissues in the throat and upper
respiratory tract, reduced oxygenation of body tissues, a build-up of fluid in your
lungs, and death.
• It is possible (and practical) to blend other compounds with NO. If this is the
case, it is recommended that Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 7 of)9
compounds be made available to all staff that use and handle the cylinders or
permeation tubes. CASTNET sites typically have a CO, SO2 and NO blend.
• Shipping of cylinders is governed by the DOT. Contact the DOT or your local
courier about the proper procedures and materials needed to ship high-pressure
cylinders.
3.4 Interferences
3.4.1 Ammonia:
Depending on the converter temperature, the converter may convert a small amount of
ammonia (NH3) to NO, resulting in increased NO readings. However, under normal
circumstances NH3 concentrations are low compared to NO and this positive
interference is negligible. Nonetheless, care should be taken when siting the monitor to
be sure that it is not located near significant NH3 sources which could cause elevated
NH3 concentrations (e.g., concentrated animal feeding operations).
3.5 Personnel Qualifications
The person(s) chosen to operate the 42CY should have a minimum of qualifications.
The understanding of basic chemistry and electronics are a must. The understanding of
digital circuitry is helpful, but not required.
4.0 EQUIPMENT AND REAGENTS
4.1 Thermo 146C calibration system
Must produce a NIST-traceable calibration test atmosphere generated in accordance
with procedures stated in Section 2.6.1, of 40CFR part 58, Appendix A. NO
Calibrations are performed according to the QA Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Volume II.
4.2 S02, NO, and CO Calibration Gas Certification
The calibration gas being used for this project will be NIST-traceable in accordance
with the requirements of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Establishing True
Concentrations of Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Air Pollution Analyzers
(Protocol No. 2), June 1979. Gas cylinders will require certification every 12 months.
4.3 Thermo 111C zero air system with compressor.
This is the Zero Air source used by the 146C to reduce ppm level standard cylinder
concentration in order to produce ppb level calibration stream within zero to 80 percent
of selected range. For NO the range is set at zero to 100 ppb.
4.4 Monitor calibration forms
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0VAp - 1 Field SOP'\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 8 of 19
5.0 GENERAL MAINTENANCE
5.1 Monthly and Semiannual Checks on the Analyzers, Calibrator, and Zero Air
Supply
Refer to Table 1 for a complete checklist of scheduled maintenance. Refer to equipment
manuals as necessary.
5.2 Calibration Gas Certification
The calibration gas being used for this project will be NIST-traceable by following the
requirements of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Establishing True Concentrations of
Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Air Pollution Analyzers (Protocol No. 2),
June 1979. New gas cylinders will require certification at 6 months and then every
24 months.
5.3 Supporting Test Equipment
The monitoring instrument, calibrator, supporting equipment, and recording device are
housed in a temperature-controlled shelter. The shelter is insulated and equipped with
lockable doors and an air conditioner and/or heater.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Calibration Procedures for Thermo 42CY NO/NOy Analyzer
Periodic calibrations are required to be performed according to the procedures outlined
in this section. The outlines presented in this section describe procedures to be followed
during adjusted and unadjusted calibrations of Thermo 42CY analyzer. There are a
number of conditions which should be met prior to a calibration or a zero, precision,
span (ZPS) check.
" First the analyzer must have been warmed up a sufficient amount of time.
" Second, the range used during the calibration or ZPS check must be the same as the
monitoring range.
¦ Third, all operational adjustments to the analyzer should be completed prior to
calibration.
¦ Fourth, all parts of the gas flow system, such as sample lines, particulate filters, etc.,
which are used during the normal sample monitoring must be used during the
calibration.
" Finally, all recording devices and outputs used during normal monitoring must be
calibrated prior to the instrument calibration and be used during calibration or ZPS
checks. The site temperature range should be between 20°C and 30°C. The field
technician will record all results on the respective analyzer calibration form. All
calibration activities will be recorded in the site log.
6.1.1 Calibration Techniques Description
6.1.1.1 Thermo 146C Calibration System:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 9 of)9
a. Prior to changing the normal sampling configuration, clearly record in the
logbook all channels affected by the calibration sequence.
b. Pneumatic Connections
No connections are necessary for ZPS or a full calibration. A typical CASTNET
site configuration has the outlet of the Thermo 146C routed to a 10 meter (m)
high manifold where the samples are collected. In order to check for line losses
I'M
through the 10m Teflon line all the way to the inlet point, the outlet line of the
146C must be disconnected and replaced with a short piece of !4 inch tubing
directly to the back of the analyzer. Results should be within 2 ppb of results
obtained through the normal sampling train. This check should be performed
during semi-annual multi-point calibrations. Feeding of the various gas blends
must be done via an open tee to avoid pressurizing the system.
c. Gas Cylinder, Zero Air, and Regulator Preparation
CASTNET sites are configured to automatically run daily ZPS checks. Each site
has a permanent 146C dynamic dilution box, a 111 zero air generator and a
standard aluminum cylinder. Follow the procedure below if the standard
cylinder's certification has expired or been consumed.
• Connect the stainless-steel regulator to the span gas cylinder. Do not use
below 200 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) of pressure.
TM
• Connect a V* inch Teflon line from the regulator to the calibrator
bulkhead fitting marked GAS A. Adjust the regulator output pressure to
25 psig and check all fittings for leaks using a suitable detergent solution.
Verify that the compressor feeding ambient air to the 111 box is set to
40-50 psig and that the delivery pressure of the Thermo 111 is set to
25 psig.
6.1.1.2 Thermo 42CY Analyzer:
• Instrument must be in RUN mode
• RANGE is set to 100 ppb
• TIME CONSTANT at 10 sec.
6.1.2 Adjusted Calibration Procedure
Note: It is MANDA TOR Y to perform an UNADJUSTED calibration (record the
signal values for a challenge range w/o forcing the zero or 80% of range values)
prior to performing the ADJUSTED calibration (Le. forcing instrument calibration
using the Zero and/or 80 percent of range values).
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 10 of 19
6.1.2.1 Before calibrating, record all information requested on the top portion of the Thermo
42CY calibration form. A filled example is shown in appendix A.
6.1.2.2 Down affected channel in data logger. Clearly mark the logbook that the appropriate
channels are DOWN to prevent calibration data from being included in the daily data
summary.
6.1.2.3 Set the calibrator to deliver zero air to the Thermo 42CY:
1. Press the^ ^ pushbutton to switch the unit into local mode,
2. Toggle between the RUN screens and select "GAS OFF?" by placing the *by the
words using
3. Select GAS A? using ^ ^ and press enter. This activates the standard cylinder valve
in the 146C as well as the flow of calibration gases into the analyzer.
4. Select SPAN 0 (zero air only) using 41
The 146C needs to be programmed to recognize NO as a valve reference as well as the
standard tank concentration. SPANS 0 through 5 are also programmable to deliver
pre-selected concentrations and total flows within the capabilities of the MFC in the
box. Refer to the SOP or manual for the 146C, pp.3-14 to 3-18 to alter these if
necessary. Typical preset values are as follows: Span 0 —>zero air, Span 1 —> 10 ppb,
Span 2 —>20 ppb, Span 3 —>40 ppb, Span 4 —> 60 ppb and Span 5 —> 80 ppb (80
percent of scale). Total flow Typically 3.6 LPM in order to satisfy the 3 LPM
demand of the analyzer's external "manifold" as well as staying within the diluting
capabilities of a 0 to 100/0 to 10,000 std. gas/ZA MFC combo.
Allow at least 15 minutes for the Thermo 48C-TLE to stabilize between SPANS.
5. Select SPANS 1 through 5 and record signal values (in ppb) on the Thermo
48C-TLE calibration form (Appendix A).
6.1.2.4 If the zero value for the analyzer is not within ±0.3 ppb, adjust the ZERO. Press
MENU, then select Calibration and press ENTER. Select Calibrate Zero and Press
Enter. Press Enter again to force the instrument to read zero while measuring zero air.
Set the 146C to SPAN 5 (the 80% of scale value) and following the same procedure
force the instrument to read 80 ppb while receiving the 80 ppb stream (or
approximation) by entering this value and pressing ENTER. Select CALIBRATE NOy
and repeat the process above. A reading with 5% of the value is acceptable.
The 49CY can be adjusted to correct for impurities in the calibration gas that may
enhance the NOy signal. These can be subtracted form the actual NOy signal by using
the menu option "CALIBRATE NOY" and forcing a concentration value that includes
these impurities. This, of course, is done while the instrument is reading a cal gas
blend (typically 80% of full scale). Since CASTNET sites use a certified standard gas
cylinder there are no other Nitrogen species present that can elevate the NOy signal
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP'\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 11 of 19
when the standard gas is passed through the converter. In this case the "CALIBRATE
NOY" option should be set to the same concentration as the certified NO standard.
6.1.2.5 Select SPANS 0 through 5 and verify the instrument's linearity and zero stability.
Record all values on the Thermo 42CY calibration form (Appendix A). A filled
example is shown in Appendix A. A paper copy of the completed audit/calibration
must be placed in the site file.
Always compare the instrument's readings with the data logger to verify similarity.
If manual mixing is desired, a seventh option (MANUAL) under "GAS A" menu is
available. Calculate the required dilution air and gas flow necessary to obtain a desired
range of concentrations using the following formula:
Where:
ConCgas = Span gas cylinder concentration,
Fgas = Flow of span gas
Fair = Flow of the dilution air
A r _ , Cone x Fgas
NO ppb = —
Fair + Fgas
Example: Calibration Gas Mixing Ratios
NO
Calibration
Gas Calibrator
zero-air
Gas
Point:
Cone (ppb)
(seem)
(seem)
zero
0
3600
0.0
1
10
3588
12.7
2
20
3575
25.4
3
40
3550
50.8
4
60
3524
76.2
5
80
3450*
100.0
Note: SCCM = Standard Cubic Centimeters per minute
* Total flow reduced in order to not exceed range of std. gas MFC
Source Gas Cone (ppb):
2833
No further adjustments should be made to the Thermo 42CY analyzer.
6.1.2.6 All documents related to the calibration will be signed by the field technician. The
calibration must be checked and verified by the field manager.
6.1.2.7 Return the Thermo 146C to STANDBY mode by pressing the MENU pushbutton,
select GAS OFF and press ENTER. This turns off all flow out of the 146C.
6.1.2.8 Up affected channel in data logger. Clearly note in the logbook that the appropriate
channels are UP to allow ambient data to be included in the daily data summary. Affix
an adjusted calibration sticker to the Thermo 42CY. Record the activities in the site
logbook.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 12 of 19
6.2 Zero, Precision and Span Checks
In the event the field engineer must conduct a manual ZPS, follow these procedures.
6.2.1 Zero (±0.8 ppb), span (80 ppb), and precision (40 ppb) checks will be performed every
other day. These will be unadjusted checks and will use Span 3 and Span 5 in the table
above. Span checks must be within ±10 percent of true value; span checks greater than
±10 percent are a warning that will alert the field engineer to examine and correct the
system as are zero checks above 0.8 ppb or below -0.8 ppb. Span checks greater than ±
15 percent and zero checks greater than ±1.5 ppb will invalidate associated data unless
the site analyzer is shown to be within the criterion (i.e. the problem is not within the
sampling system).
In order to ascertain the proper function of the heated molybdenum converter, an NPN
stream of approximately 70 ppb is automatically sent to the instrument while the NOy
channel is monitored. This happens along with the ZPS check. The check result should
be within ±10 percent of the supplied concentration. Manual operation of this flow is
described below in sec. 6.3.2.2.
6.2.2 Physical integrity of the analyzer will be checked and the findings documented on the
service log for the analyzer.
6.2.3 All site activities and observations will be annotated in the site logbook.
Unscheduled 2-point adjustments will be performed by the site operator and
recorded on a simplified calibration form.
6.3 Calculations
6.3.1 For each of the calibration points, calculate the percent error using the following
formula:
where:
Percent error = ——— 100)
X,
Xi = known concentration (ppb), and
Yi = analyzer response (ppb).
Enter the appropriate values on the calibration form.
6.3.2 For multi-point calibrations, if any one point exceeds the 5 percent error band, perform
an adjusted calibration. Perform a linear regression on data. Slope should be between
0.85 and 1.15, the intercept should be within ±2 percent of full scale, and correlation
should be greater than 0.995. For any calibration or verification, all points must be
within ±2 percent of full scale of the best-fit straight line. Zero should read between -0.3
and 0.3 ppb.
NPN Converter Efficiency Test
6.3.2.1 Once the NO multipoint calibration is completed, a conversion efficiency test with
n-propyl nitrate (NPN) gas must be performed to determine the DIF response and the
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 13 of 19
converter efficiency.
6.3.2.2 Procedure is identical as for NO delivery except that GAS B must be selected on the
146C in order to switch cylinders as NPN is housed in a separate cylinder than the cal
gases. This cylinder is connected to port "B" on the rear of the 146C.
6.3.2.3 Generate NPN gas flow blends to obtain span values of approximately 20 & 90 ppb.
6.3.2.4 Make no adjustments to the ZERO or SPAN.
6.3.2.5 Calculate the efficiency of the conversion. Concentration (as NO) value through the
converter divided by the concentration of the blend input. The minimum criterion is
90 percent. If too low, raise the temperature set point in 5 °C increments until the
criterion is met. If the set point exceeds 399 °C before the criterion is met replace the
converter.
6.3.2.6 All documents related to the calibration will be signed by the field technician. The
calibration must be checked and verified by the field manager or designee.
6.3.2.7 Return the both Thermo 146C and 42CY to REMOTE mode by pressing the ^ and ^
pushbutton on the top line of the main menu, select flow mode and press ENTER, select
zero air and press ENTER, wait 1 minute to purge the system then press MENU, select
flow modes and press ENTER, select standby and press ENTER. Press the RUN and
then the ENTER pushbutton to place the Thermo 146C in the remote mode.
6.3.2.8 Up the affected data logger channels. Clearly mark in the logbook that the NO/DIF/NOy
channels are UP to allow ambient data to be included in the daily data summary. Record
the activities in the site logbook.
6.4 Documentation
Field technicians will record all activities in the site log. Copies of calibration and
certification sheets will be stored onsite.
6.5 Support Equipment Calibration
6.5.1 It is essential that each piece of data acquisition and support test equipment's calibration
status be known and certified at all times. Calibration against a source traceable to a
national standard for test equipment (i.e., scopes, multimeters, frequency counters)
should be made every 6 months.
The following equipment calibration procedure applies to any piece of test equipment
used as a secondary standard for calibration of monitoring system instrumentation.
6.5.2 Calibration Records
Associated with each piece of test equipment is an equipment calibration and
maintenance record, indicating the last calibration date and the next due date. These
records are maintained in the project test equipment file.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
M.ACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 14 of 19
6.5.3 Scheduled Calibration
Test equipment will be calibrated using NIST-traceable equipment at least every 12
months. Calibration will be verified using NIST-traceable standards prior to use in the
field.
6.5.4 Unscheduled Calibration
Test equipment will be calibrated by MACTEC, Inc. personnel or by a qualified service
organization with equipment traceable to NIST, when:
• A piece of test equipment does not have a valid calibration sticker,
• A calibration seal is broken, or
• A unit is found to be out of calibration or is performing erratically.
6.5.5 Calibration Requirements - The calibration service organization will provide a record of
calibration data and a certification that calibrations are traceable to NIST.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 15 of 19
Table 1. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Program—Ambient Monitoring Equipment
Operations and Maintenance Schedule
Operation Frequency
Reference
1. All analyzers
a.
Zero check/adjust
Each site visit
SOP
b.
Dilution air check
Each site visit
SOP
(or by remote activator)
c.
Check span response
Each site visit
SOP
(0.080 ppm)
(or by remote activator)
d.
Check precision response Weekly
SOP
(0.040 ppm)
e.
Multipoint calibration
Quarterly*
SOP
f.
Line loss check
Semi-annual*
SOP
g-
Replace probe line
as needed
SOP
h.
Clean fan filter
as needed
Thermo
i.
Check 10m inlet filter
Monthly
Thermo
(change as required)
j. Zero, span (80 ppb), and precision (40 ppb) checks will be performed every
other day along with an NPN challenge to NOy converter.
2. Thermo 146C multigas calibration system
a.
Check cylinder pressure
Each site visit
SOP
b.
Check line pressure
Each site visit
SOP
c.
Audit/Calibrate the mass
flow controllers
Quarterly
SOP
d.
Clean fan filter
as needed
Thermo
e.
Check system for leaks
Prior to each analyzer
SOP
calibration
Note:
ppm = parts per million.
* or more frequently as needed.
Source: MACTEC E&C.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 16 of 19
Table 2. NO/NOy Calibration Criteria Table
Type of
check
ZPS
Unadjusted Calibration
Corrective action*
Adjusted
Calibration
Analyzer Response
Field
Data
Acceptable
Analyzer
Zero
0.000 and ± 0.8 ppb
none
none
Between 0.000
and
± 0.8 ppb
From ±0.8 ppb to ± 1.5 ppb
Perform Zero
adjustment
Adjust
> ±1.5 ppb
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Precision
± 5% between
Known and
Observed
Concentrations
Span
< ±10% between Known and Observed
Concentrations.
none
none
> ± 10% and < ± 15% % between Known
and Observed Concentrations.
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
none
> ± 15% % between Known and
Observed Concentrations.
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Correlation
Coefficient
> 0.995
none
none
> 0.995
< 0.995
Perform
Adjusted
Calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Frequency of analyzer checks
ZPS
One ZPS every other day
On demand to facilitate troubleshooting
Following a multipoint calibration prior to leaving the site
NPN challenge to NOy converter, signal enhancement observation every other day
Calibration
Minimum one multipoint calibration and line loss check every 6 months
As required per QC results
Adjusted Calibration must occur within 24 hours of the unadjusted calibration
Converter efficiency test, output (NO) / input (NPN) = 0.9 or better
General
1. Unadjusted Calibration does not have to be followed by an Adjusted Calibration only if all analyzer responses are
in a 2 percent of full scale range.
2. Line loss check results should be within 2 ppb or corrective action is required.
3. Shelter Temperature acceptable range: 20 - 30 deg C (± 2 deg C)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOyANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 17 of 19
REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for
Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State
and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance
for Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods.
EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements.
EPA-600/4-82-060.
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 53.23c
Merck Index, twelfth edition 1996, page 296
Seinfeld, John H., Atmospheric Chemistry and Physics of Air Pollution, 1986, page 54
The National Air Monitoring Strategy, Final Draft, 4/29/04,
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/monstratdoc.html
Thermo Scientific Instruction Manual, Model 42CY Trace Level NO/ NOy Analyzer
EPA Office of Air Quality, Planning and Standards, Emission, Analysis and Monitoring
Division, Thermo Electron Corporation Model 42CY Trace Level Reactive Nitrogen
Compounds Instrument Version 1.1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field S0P\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOy ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 38 of 19
7.0 FIGURES
Figure 1. Simplified Flow Diagram of 42CY NOy Monitor
Source: (EPA, Thermo NOy SOP Version 1.1, Sec 3.1 and 3.2)
Calibration
Gas
Inlet
Teflon
Filters
CONV
Converter
Enclosure
PUMP
CHARCOAL
vVWW
"mm
PUMP
PRESS
PRE-
REACTOR
CELLS,
PMJ
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
APPENDICES
THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 42CY NO/NOyANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 19 of 19
Appendix A Calibration Form
MACTEC Engineering & Consulting. Inc.
NO/NOv Calibration
Adjusted / Unadjusted:
ADJUSTED
NO Gas Vendor:
Scott-Marrin
PMT V:
-1006.0
NO Range:
100
PMT V:
NO Range:
NO Gas S/N:
CC40024
5V {+):
NO Bkg:
0.49
5V (+):
NO Bkg:
Project Name:
CASTNET
NO Gas Exp:
24-Jan-06
15V(+):
NO coef:
0.998
15V {+):
NO coef:
Project Number:
6064068006
NO Gas TankPSI:
1800
15V (-):
15V {-):
Site Name:
BEL116
NO Gas Work PSI:
35
Batt V:
NOy Range:
100
Batt V:
NOy Range:
Site Location:
Bellsville, MD
NO Gas ppb cone:
2702
NOy Bkg:
0.93
NOy Bkg:
NOy coef:
0.883
NOy coef:
Analyzer Manufacturer:
Thermo
NPN Gas Vendor:
Scott-Marrin
Sample Flow:
1.220
Sample Flow:
Analyzer Model:
42C-TL
NPN Gas S/N:
CC87784
NO Bypass:
Avg Time:
|NO Bypass:
Avg Time:
Analyzer S/N:
000165
NPN Gas Exp:
20-Jan-06
NOy Bypass:
NOy Bypass:
Last Calibration:
l3-Dec-05
NPN Gas Tank PSI:
450
NPN Gas Work PSI:
35
Int Temp:
32.8
Int Temp:
Dilution Ca! Manuf.
Thermo
NPN Gas ppb cone:
2278
Chamber Temp:
49.5
Chamber Temp:
Dilution Cat Model:
146C
Converter T emp:
323.0
Converter Temp:
Dilution Cal S/N:
000168
Shelter Temp (DegC):
28.0
Cooler Temp:
-13.0
Cooler Temp:
Dilution Cal last Cal:
4-Aug-06
Barometer (Inches):
29.89
Chamber Pres:
330.0
Chamber Pres:
Calibration Point:
Gas Calibrator
Cone(ppb)
DAS NO response
DAS NOy
DAS DIF 'esponsel % ^
NOy % error
zero-air
(cc/min)
Gas (cc/min)
Time Set:
Time Taken:
GAS A / zero
0.00
•0.1
-0.2
-0.1
3531
0
GAS A 11
91.10
89.1
88.9
-0.2
-2.29
2739
96
GAS A / 2
73.46
71.7
71.5
-0.2
-2.4*5
3442
96
GAS A / 3
26.41
25.9
26.1
-0.1
-1.99
3502
35
GAS A / 4
13.23
12.6
12.4
-0.1
-4.89
>
3527
17
GAS A / 5
iiiSfiiiWm
GAS B / zero
0.00
-0.1
-0.1
-0.2
3493
0
GAS B /1
80.06
0.6
86.7
86.1
8.3%
2609
95
GAS B / 2
66.81
0.5
72.1
71.6
7.9%
3108
94
GAS B / 3
44.81
0.3
48.2
47.9
7.6%
3424
69
GAS B 14
31.33
0.3
33.1
33.3
5.7%
3449
48
GAS B / 5
13.66
0.1
13.9
13.8
1.8%
3482
21
Technician:
Signature:
NO slope:
0.9793
NO int:
-0.1567
NO corr:
1.0000
R. D. Dickens jDate:
| 8-Auq-06 |Reviewer:
| |Date: |
NOy slope:
1.0882
NOy int:
-0.6078
l
NOy corr:
0.9999
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0^Ap - ] Field SOPO-A Attach 3 42CY NOy SOP.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page] of 18
III. FIELD MANUAL
A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 4: THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION
SYSTEM
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations
Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
///t/zool
Table of Contents
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 FieldSOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDCC V-I.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULT1GAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 2 of 18
1.0 Purpose
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance in the
use of the Thermo Model 146C Dynamic Dilution System.
2.0 Scope
This SOP applies to all CASTNET sites operating trace gas analytical equipment using the
Thermo Model 146C Dynamic Dilution System.
3.0 Summary
The Thermo 146C can supply precise parts per billion (ppb) to low parts per million (ppm) levels
of carbon monoxide (CO), sulfur dioxide (S02), nitric oxide (NO), n-propyl nitrate (NPN) as
well as straight Zero Air. Calibration standards are typically contained in high pressure
aluminum cylinders [ca. 1800 pounds per square inch gauge (psig)] at ppm levels with the
balance made up by nitrogen. This system can be used to calibrate instruments at their forced
points (zero and 80 percent of scale) and to verify the linearity of in-between points. The design
of the Thermo 146C meets or exceeds all published United States Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) requirements for multipoint calibration, audit, level 1 span, and precision checks.
The Thermo 146C controls solenoid valves and flow controllers through a microprocessor. The
microprocessor control offers easy to use, menu-driven software with multiple screens for all
calibration procedures. The microprocessor can make many of the necessary calculations. If
desired, the Thermo 146C can also be operated remotely by a data logger or computer to perform
zero, precision and span checks, or multipoint calibrations.
Gas dilution is achieved by utilizing two or more mass flow controllers. One is a high flow
controller typically 0 to 10,000 standard cubic centimeters per minute (seem) to govern the
diluting zero air flow. The other controller is for low flow typically 0 to 100 seem and governs
the flow of the gas blend to be diluted. A Teflon mixing chamber is used to achieve complete
mixing of the two components. The Thermo 146C has three independent gas inlets to allow the
use of the independent standard cylinders. The various cylinders can be selected by opening the
Gas A, B, or C solenoid valves to which each standard gas can be attached. See Figure 1-1 in the
manufacturer's manual. It should be noted that only one gas solenoid can be energized at one
time. CASTNET sites utilize a blend of CO, S02 and NO within the same cylinder at a nominal
mixing ratio of 50 ppm CO and 3 ppm for S02 and NO. This precludes the use of multiple
cylinders housing different standard gases. Typically this trio of calibration gases is connected
to valve A and the NPN for reactive nitrogen compounds (NOy) converter efficiency is
connected to valve B.
The controls and indicators on the front of the Thermo 146C dynamic dilution system (from left
to right) are as follows: POWER switch, display panel, RUN pushbutton, MENU pushbutton, *
pushbutton, ENTER pushbutton, HELP pushbutton, 41 pushbutton, J- pushbutton, and the
pushbutton. The rear panel of the Thermo 146C calibrator includes contact closures, analog
output connectors, com port connections for computers, output and vent ports, gas ports for three
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 FieldSOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 3 of 18
separate gases (A, B, C), zero air port, exhaust port, cooling fan and filter, power cord outlet, and
main fuse. Page 2-2 of the instrument manual shows the rear panel and page 3-1 shows the front
panel of the Thermo 146C calibrator.
4.0 Materials and supplies
A certified standard gas mix cylinder, certified NPN cylinder, and zero air supply. Zero air can
be obtained from a Thermo 111 Zero Air Generator or a cylinder. Regulators, !4 inch outer
diameter (OD) Teflon tubing, assorted fittings and tools.
5.0 Repair and maintenance
There are no specified maintenance items on the 146C. Please refer to chapter 6, p. 6-1 of
manual p/n 13410 for a troubleshooting guide. Chapter 7, on p. 7-1, has a list of spare parts and
procedures for the various sub-assemblies of the system. If the 146C is found to be producing
incorrect blends as evidenced by the apparent non-linear response of an instrument, frequently
the problem lies in a malfunctioning MFC. Involved repairs are not recommended in the field.
6.0 Procedure
The Thermo 146C multigas blending manufacturer's system is calibrated using zero air and a
National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable soap bubble flow meter such
as the Gilian Gilibrator. An SOP for this device can be found on Appendix B of this SOP.
Before calibration, record the barometric pressure and internal ambient temperature of the shelter
on the 146C Calibration Form (see Appendix A). The high [2 to 30 liters per minute (LPM),
p/n 800207] and the low (1 ccm to 250 ccm, p/n 800285) flow cells of the Gilian bubble flow
meter will be used.
6.1 Preparing the Gilian Bubble Flow Meter for Use
6.1.1 Obtain a Gilibrator unit. Remove the base, printer (optional), and desired cell from the
case.
6.1.2 Secure the cell to the base with a twisting action. Rotating 90 degrees until the
connector is at the back will lock the unit on to the base.
6.1.3 Connect the cable from the base to the high flow cell, and connect the printer to the
base (if one is being used).
6.1.4 Plug the battery charger into the base and into a 115V AC outlet.
6.1.5 Disconnect the tubing from the top port on the cell, but leave it connected to the
bottom port.
6.1.6 Place enough soap bubble fluid (e.g. Snoop) in the cell for the ring to make contact
when pressed. Do not add too much!!!
6.1.7 Press the plunger several times until a bubble is able to travel to the top
without breaking.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146C DGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 4 of 18
6.2 Calibration of the Zero Air (0-10 LPM) Mass Flow Controller
6.2.1 The Thermo 146C is normally connected to the trace gas monitors. Disconnect the line
attached to the output port of the 146C. Cap off any disconnects that may require it.
6.2.2 Connect a length of !4 inch Teflon tubing from output of the Thermo 146C to the high
flow cell.
6.2.3 Place the 146C in SERVICE mode. To do this: press MENU button on the instrument,
cursor to MODE and then select SERVICE by pressing the ENTER button. Pressing
the ENTER button toggles between SERVICE, REMOTE and LOCAL modes.
6.2.4 Move the cursor down to ENTER PRES AND TEMP. Using the arrows adjust the
barometric pressure, PRES (mm of Hg) and room temperature, TEMP (°C) to the
actual values at the start of the calibration procedure. These values must come from
National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) traceable sources. Press
ENTER to record the values to the memory of the 146C. Press MENU to return to the
main menu.
6.2.5 Move the cursor to ZERO AIR FLOW CAL and press ENTER. Select (by moving the
cursor) 5 percent and press ENTER. This will energize the MFC to 5 percent of its full
scale value (approximately 500 ccm). Wait until thel46C flow stabilizes (less than one
minute). Record 10 good observations with the Gilibrator (the instrument keeps a
running average) and enter their average into the 146C using the arrows. Press
ENTER to record these to the memory of the 146C. Press MENU to return to ZERO
AIR FLOW CAL.
6.2.6 Repeat step 6.2.5 for the 20, 35, 50, 65, 80 and 95 percent of full scale settings. These
settings will have approximate flows as follows: 20 percent 4 2 LPM, 35 percent 4
3.5 LPM, 50 percent 4 5 LPM, 65 percent 4 6.5 LPM, 80 percent 4 8 LPM and 95
percent 4 9.5 LPM. Press MENU to return to the main menu.
6.2.7 Record all pertinent information on the 146C calibration from.
6.3 Calibration of the Standard Gas (0-100 ccm) Mass Flow Controller
6.3.1 Install the low flow cell on the Gilibrator and attach the 146C output line to it.
6.3.2 Select GAS FLOW CAL by using the arrows and pressing ENTER.
6.3.3 Follow steps 5, 6, 7 and 8 above. Expected flows are as follows: 5 percent 5 ccm,
20 percent 20 ccm, 35 percent 4 35 ccm, 50 percent 50 ccm, 65 percent 4- 65
ccm, 80 percent 4* 80 ccm and 95 percent 4 95 ccm. Press MENU to return to the
main menu.
After performing a multi-point calibration on the MFCs, it is necessary to observe their
ability to produce selected flows. The display on the instrument will show values corrected
for standard temperature and pressure (STP) while the bubble flow meter will read
ambient values. MFCs are only accurate 20 percent above their minimum rated flow range.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDCC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 5 of 18
Do not request or force flow values under 2000 seem for Zero Air or 20 seem for Standard
Cal Gas. The following formula converts ambient flows to STP:
STP Flow Rate = (ambient barometric pressure /760) (25/ ambient temperature) (ambient
flow rate)
6.4 Verifying the ZERO AIR MFC Function:
6.4.1 Select Gas A using the arrows and press ENTER. Select MANUAL using the arrows
and press ENTER. Select ZERO AIR SCCM and press enter. This brings up the GAS
A MAN ZERO AIR: FLOW SCCM screen. Press MENU to return to GAS A
MANUAL FLOWS: This screen now shows the set value for the Zero Air MFC.
Do not select GAS SCCM and enter values at this time, as this will create a blend and energize
the 0 to 100 ccm MFC.
6.4.2 Press RUN to return to run screen #1.
6.4.3 Using the vertical arrows place star (*) cursor on GAS OFF TSCCM and with the
horizontal arrows scroll display to GAS A? Press ENTER to activate.
Any other of the 3 gas options can be used but the manual mode values desired must be
entered on the one selected.
6.4.4 With the vertical arrows place the star (*) cursor on SPAN 0 (or whatever span is
being displayed) and with the horizontal arrows scroll to MANUAL? and select by
pressing ENTER. Pressing ENTER again brings up run screen #2 where the target and
actual Zero Air flow rates can be observed. This will begin flow into the bubble flow
meter.
6.4.5 Record the flow rate using the Gilian high flow cell with an average of 10
observations. Compute the STP flow rate and compare this with the instrument's
display value. Record data on electronic sheet. Example in Appendix A.
Make sure to use the STP conditions at the time of the test, especially if calibration and test
are far apart in time.
6.4.6 Press MENU and select GAS A * MANUAL * ZERO AIR SCCM * GAS A ZERO
AIR: FLOW SCCM using the arrows and ENTER buttons. Adjust display to a mid
range value such as 4 to 6 LPM and measure the flow rate. Compare with the display
value after STP conversion.
6.4.7 Repeat for a top range value near 9.5 LPM.
6.4.8 Record observations on electronic calibration form. Example in appendix A.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 FieldSOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO I46C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 6 of 18
6.4.9 The typical difference is generally under 1 percent. Recalibration is required if over
3 percent.
6.5 Verifying the Standard Gas MFC Function:
6.5.1 Procedure is identical to that for Zero Air as described above with the exceptions
mentioned below.
6.5.2 Return to the GAS A MAN FLOWS: screen, select ZERO AIR SCCM, press ENTER
and in the GAS A MAN ZERO AIR: FLOW SCCM screen, adjust using the arrows
the flow value back to zero so there is no contribution from Zero Air while testing the
Standard gas MFC.
6.5.3 Replace the bubble flow meter cell with the low flow 1 - 250 cc unit. There is no need
for step 6.5.2 above, if the GAS A or other desired gas is still selected.
6.5.4 Press MENU to return to the GAS A MAN FLOWS: screen and select GAS SCCM.
Press enter to advance to the GAS A MAN GAS FLOWS: screen. Adjust the value to
a number just above 25 seem.
6.5.5 Repeat the process for mid (ca. 50 seem) and high (ca. 95 seem) values of the 0 to
100 seem range of this MFC.
6.5.6 Record observations on electronic calibration form. Example in Appendix A.
6.5.7 The typical difference is generally under 1 percent. Recalibration is required if over
3 percent.
To return the system to its original configuration:
6.5.8 Disconnect the Teflon tubing from the cell and the output of the Thermo 146C.
Reconnect the output of the Thermo 146C to its original configuration. Make sure the
fittings are tight.
6.5.9 Collect all the Gilibrator parts and store back in their case. Empty all fluid from the
flow heads into a suitable container for future reuse.
Return display to the run screen #1 and turn off the CO by selecting GAS OFF? and
pressing enter. Return the instrument back to REMOTE mode by pressing MENU and
then navigating through MODE and ending up in REMOTE.
6.5.10 Press the RUN button to return to screen #1 or #2 as desired.
6.6 Making blends
6.6.1 Blends can be made using the MANUAL option or by programming SPAN 0 through
5. Using the manual option is as described above for flow verification except that
values are entered for both MFCs. External calculations are required according to the
following formula.
n - , Cone x F gas
Desired ppm =
Fair + F gas
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 FieldSOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 7 of 18
Where:
ConCgas = Span gas cylinder concentration (ppm),
Fgas = Flow rate of span gas (seem), and
F air — Flow rate of the dilution air (seem).
6.6.2 The 146C will calculate and issue the necessary flows to both MFCs when using the
SPAN 0 through 5 options. The first step is to enter the certified value of the standard
gas cylinder. Press menu and navigate through MAIN MENU: GAS A + TANK
CONC. Using the arrows adjust the display value to the tank concentration,
e.g. 50.1 ppm.
There is a limitation as to what blends can be made with a combination 0 -100/0 -10,000
MFC set. The standard gas concentration must fall within a manageable range for this
146C to be able to produce suitable trace level blends for the CO, S02 and NOv analyzers.
Since the 3 trace gases are in the same bottle the "CO "valve designation will work for all
but the concentration must be changed accordingly.
6.6.3 Pressing MENU return the screen to the GAS A screen. Select SPAN 0 FLOW and
press ENTER. This screen allows for values from .4 to 10 LPM and only affects the
Zero AIR MFC. Enter a value slightly over the known instrument consumption, e. g.
3 LPM.
6.6.4 Return to the GAS A screen by pressing MENU, select SPAN 1 and press ENTER.
Concentration and flow rate options appear.
Typical values of a calibration "curve" for a
0 to 2 ppm range instrument
SPAN 1
100 ppm*
SPAN 2
200 ppm
SPAN 3
400 ppm
SPAN 4
800 ppm
SPAN 5
1.6 ppm
Note: * This value may be below the usable range of the 0 - 100 seem MFC.
6.6.5 Select concentration and entered desired value. The instrument will not allow numbers
above its capabilities. Press enter to record value in the instrument's memory. The
message "SAVING PARAMETERS" appears for an instant but only if the value is
changed.
6.6.6 Pressing MENU returns to the GAS A SPAN 1: menu. Select FLOW SCCM and press
enter. Adjust SETTING to desired value. Again the instrument will not allow numbers
above its capabilities. Press enter to record value in the instrument's memory. The
message "SAVING PARAMETERS" appears for an instant but only if the value is
changed.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146C DGC V-l.docx
MACTEQInc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTJGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 8 of 18
6.6.7 Pressing MENU twice return to the GAS A screen. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for
SPANS 2 through 5 entering increasing values.
6.6.8 The 146C is now programmed to produce a calibration curve. The curve can be run
from the RUN #1 screen by turning on the A, B or C gas option and selecting the
various SPANS one at a time.
Note that it is possible to name these in any way. For the purposes of this SOP GAS A was
named GAS A.
6.7 Other Information
6.7.1 The physical integrity of the analyzer will be checked and the findings documented on
the service log for the analyzer.
6.7.2 All routine site checks requested on the Site Service Log will be completed.
6.7.3 All site activities and observations will be annotated in the site log.
6.7.4 Calculation of the Percent Difference.
For each of the calibration points, the percent error is calculated using the following
formula:
Percent diff = ^7 ^1 (100)
X,
Where:
X] = calculated STP flow, and
Yi = MFC set point.
Enter the appropriate values on the calibration form and these calculations will occur
automatically.
6.7.5 The calibration gas being used for this project will be traceable to NIST by following
the requirements of the EPA Traceability Protocol for Establishing True
Concentrations of Gases Used for Calibration and Audits of Air Pollution Analyzers
(Protocol No. 2), June 1979. Gas cylinders will require certification every 48 months.
6.8 Supporting Test Equipment
The monitoring instrument, calibrator, supporting equipment, and recording device are housed in
a temperature-controlled shelter. The shelter is insulated and equipped with lockable doors and
an air conditioner and/or heater.
6.8.1 SOP for Support Equipment Calibration
It is essential that each piece of data acquisition and support test equipment's calibration status be
known and certified at all times. Calibration against a source traceable to a national standard for
test equipment should be made when appropriate as dictated by the manufacturer. Each piece of
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 9 of 18
equipment should display a sticker or label showing the last calibration date, the next due date,
and traceability to the calibration standard.
The following equipment calibration procedure applies to any piece of test equipment used as a
transfer standard for calibration of monitoring system instrumentation.
6.8.1.1 Calibration Records - Associated with each piece of test equipment is an equipment
calibration and maintenance record, indicating the last calibration date and the next
due date. These records are maintained in the project test equipment file.
6.8.1.2 Scheduled Calibration - Test equipment will be calibrated using equipment traceable
to NIST. Calibration will be performed at least every 12 months. Calibration will be
verified using NIST-traceable standards prior to use in the field.
6.8.1.3 Unscheduled Calibration - Test equipment will be calibrated by site personnel or by a
qualified service organization with equipment traceable to NIST, when:
a. A piece of test equipment does not have a valid calibration sticker,
b. A calibration seal is broken, or
c. A unit is found to be out of calibration or is performing erratically.
6.8.1.4 Calibration Requirements - The calibration service organization will provide a record
of calibration data and a certification that calibrations are traceable to NIST.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - J FieldSOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDCC V-l.docx
MACTEQInc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 10 of 18
Table 1. Ambient Monitoring Equipment Operations and Maintenance Schedule
Operation
Frequency
Reference
1
All analyzers
a
Zero check/adjust
Each site visit
SOP
b
Dilution air check
Each site visit
(or by remote activator)
SOP
c
Check span response
(0.400 ppm)
Each site visit
(or by remote activator)
SOP
d
Check precision response
(0.09 ppm)
Weekly
SOP
e
Multipoint calibration
Semiannual, or as needed*
SOP
f
Change zero air scrubber
Semiannual, or as needed*
Instrument
manual
g
Wash probe line
Semiannual, or as needed*
Instrument
manual
H
Check Flowmeter
Instrument
manual
I
Clean fan filter
Semiannual, or as needed*
Instrument
manual
J
Check system pressure
Each site visit
Instrument
manual
k
Check (10m) inlet filter
(change as required)
Each site visit
Instrument
manual
2
Thermo Model 146C multigas calibration system
a
Check cylinder pressure
Each site visit
SOP
b
Check line pressure
Each site visit
SOP
c
Calibrate the mass flow controllers
Semiannually
SOP
d
Clean fan filter
Semiannual, or as needed
Instrument
manual
e
Check system for leaks
Prior to each analyzer calibration
SOP
Note: ppm = parts per million.
* Minimum semiannual, or more frequently as needed.
Source: MACTEC E&C.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDCC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULT1GAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 11 of 18
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for
Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State
and Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance
for Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods.
EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements.
EPA-600/4-82-060.
Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40, Part 53.23c
The National Air Monitoring Strategy, Final Draft,
4/29/04, http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/monstratdoc.html
Thermo Scientific Instruction Manual, Model 43C Trace Level SO2 Analyzer
EPA Office of Air Quality, Planning and Standards, Emission, Analysis and Monitoring
Division, Thermo Electron Corporation Model 43C-TLE Trace Level Sulfur Dioxide
Instrument Version 2.1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - lransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO I46C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 12 of 18
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1: Model 146C Hardware Configuration, Standard Gas Dilution System
ZERO AIR
GAS A GAS B GAS C GAS D GAS E GAS F
-f- J REAR PANEL
* 7 NC ^7 NC
X X
iiS18 /.JS19
NOTE:
= OPTIONAL
Source: Thermo Model 146C Dynamic Gas Calibrator Instruction Manual
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transitiorAQAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO I46C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 13 of 18
APPENDICES
Appendix A Calibration Form
Dynamic Dilution Box 146C v1
Adjusted / Unadjusted:
Adjusted
Flow Meter:
Gillian
Temp
Utechnics
Std. Cell Range:
1-250cc
Model
4600
Project Name:
Air Div
S/N:
0408028-L
S/N
4641
Project Number:
not available
2A Cell Range:
2-30 LPM
BP
Princo
Site Name:
Shop
S/N:
0409001-H
Model
453
Site Location:
Gainesville, FL
S/N
W34228
Calibrator Manuf:
Thermo
Std. MFC Manuf:
Tvlan
+ 15VDC:
Calibrator Model:
146C
Std. MFC Range:
0-100cc
-15VDC:
Calibrator S/N:
6321-339
ZA MFC Manuf:
Tylan
5VDC:
Last Calibration:
unknown
ZA MFC Range:
0-10 LPM
Battery:
Flow Verification Before Calibration:
ZA MFC Set Point
Amb Flow
STP Flow
Amb Conditions
Diff.
LPM
LPM
SLPM
%
2.50
2.204
2.50
BP:
768.1
0.0
3.50
4.417
5.01
Temp:
22.3
43.2
5.00
8.350
9.47
Date:
4/17/08
89.5
7.50
Time:
2:00 PM
9.50
CF:
1.1345
Calibration:
ZA MFC Range
Amb Flow*
Amb Conditions
%
LPM
5
1.748
BP:
768.1
20
3.860
Temp:
22.3
35
5.880
Date:
4/16/08
50
Time:
9:00 AM
65
7.847
CF:
1.1345
80
95
9.811
Flow Verification After Calibration:
ZA MFC Set Point
Amb Flow
STP Flow
Amb Conditions
Diff.
LPM
LPM
SLPM
%
2.50
2.204
2.50
BP:
768.1
0.0
3.50
4.417
5.01
Temp:
22.3
43.2
5.00
8.350
9.47
Date:
4/17/08
89.5
7.50
Time:
2:00 PM
9.50
CF:
1.1345
Flow Verification Before calibration:
Std MFC Set Point
Amb Flow
STP Flow
Amb Conditions
Diff.
seem
ccm
SLPM
%
25
23
24.94
BP:
766.8
-0.2
35
46
49.89
Temp:
23.3
42.5
50
88
95.43
Date:
4/17/08
90.9
75
Time:
2:00 PM
95
CF:
1.0845
Calibration:
Std MFC Range
Amb Flow*
Amb Conditions
%
ccm
5
20.0
BP:
766.8
20
Temp:
23.3
35
39.4
Date:
4/17/08
50
57.8
Time:
2:00 PM
65
CF:
1.0845
80
80.0
95
102.0
Flow Verification After Calibration:
Std MFC Set Point
Amb Flow
STP Flow
Amb Conditions
Diff.
seem
ccm
SLPM
%
25
23
24.94
BP:
766.8
-0.2
35
46
49.89
Temp:
23.3
42.5
50
88
95.43
Date:
4/17/08
90.9
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146C DGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULTIGAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 14 of 18
Appendix B Gilian Bubble Flow Meter Manufacturer Instructions
Gilian Gilibrator 2 - Air Flow Calibration System
Warnings
S Do not pressurize the cell. Pressurizing the cell could cause bodily injury or damage the cell
Use only approved soap solutions. Non-approved soap solutions may lead to fouling of the
cell
S Do not use gases that may be corrosive the cell, any component of the cell, or may react with
the soap solution
S Do use clean, filtered air when testing.
Setup
Assembly
1. Place wet flow cell on the control unit base ensuring that the cell mounting pins are
aligned with the slots on the control unit mounting plate.
2. Grip the cell by the base and rotate clockwise 14 turn to lock the cell to the control unit
3. Attach the data cable from the back of the control unit to the back of the wet cell.
Filling
1. Remove the storage tube from the air outlet boss of the flow cell such that it is only
connected to the air inlet boss.
2. Depress the bubble initiator button
3. Using the fill bottle, fill the bubble solution until the liquid level in the cell reaches the
top of the straight lip of the bubble generator ring (where the angled edge intersects the
straight lip).
Tubing Connections
1. The top barb on the cell is the air outlet boss and the storage tube can be left on.
2. The bottom barb on the cell is the air inlet boss and should be connected to the outlet of
the device or air stream being sampled
Operation
Start-Up
1. Turn on the air source.
2. Depress the bubble initiator several times to prime the cell. The cell is primed when
bubbles no longer burst before reaching the top of the cell.
3. Turn the control unit ON and allow the system to run self-tests.
Taking Measurements
1. Depress the bubble initiator.
S If no bubble is formed, release the bubble initiator to form a bubble.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I FieldSOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-I.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULT1GAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 15 of 18
s If a bubble is formed, allow the bubble to complete its travel before releasing the bubble
initiator and forming another bubble.
2. The flow rate is determined by the time it takes a bubble to pass two sensors in the cell.
The instrument will calculate a running average with the 10 most recent readings.
3. The flow rate is displayed along with the average flow rate and the sample size.
Press DELETE for 1 second to delete the last reading.
Press DELETE for 3 seconds to clear the current batch and start over
Shut-Down
1. Turn the unit off by pressing the OFF button.
2. Turn off the air source.
3. Disconnect the tubing from the air inlet.
4. Reconnect the storage tube between the air inlet and outlet bosses.
Storage
1. Disconnect the data connection cable
2. Holding the cell at the base, rotate the cell counterclockwise !4 turn to unlock the cell
from the control unit.
3. Remove the cell from the control unit.
4. Disconnect the storage tube from the air outlet boss so that it is only attached to the inlet
boss.
5. Tilt the cell assembly with bosses down, and drain the soap solution from the inlet boss.
6. Reconnect the inlet and outlet bosses with the storage tube.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 -
transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -
1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 I46CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO I46C MULT1GAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 16 of J 8
Appendix C Gas Scrubbing and Electronics of the Thermo Model 111
Theory of operation
This chapter explains the gas scrubbing and the electronics of the Thermo Model 111.
Gas Scrubbing
The purpose of the Model 111 is to supply pollutant-free air (zero air) from the ambient air to
allow for proper zeroing, and to provide clean diluent air for spanning ambient air analyzers. The
components to be removed are SO,, NO, NO,, CO and hydrocarbons. There is no consensus as to
what extent zero air should have water vapor removed. Since many analyzers have longer
response times if super dry air (dew point less than -30° C) is used for zero and span, and since
water vapor is not a pollutant, the Model 111 does not have a drying system. However, the dew
point is reduced as a result of compression of the ambient air.
The figure below is the gas flow schematic for the Model 111. Room air enters the compressor,
where it is raised to a pressure of approximately 80 to 90 psi (4560 mm Hg). At 25° C the
saturation water vapor pressure is approximately 24 mm. Therefore, most of the water condenses
out, and falls to the bottom of the tank. Out of the 4560 mm of pressure in the tank, only 24 mm
is due to water vapor. When this air is later expanded to atmospheric pressure 9760 mm) the
water vapor pressure is reduced to approximately 4 mm. This corresponds to a dew point of
slightly less than 0° C.
To keep any condensation from occurring in the tubing between the compressor and the Model
111, the output of the compressor contains coalescing filter and a pressure regulator where the
pressure is reduced to 70 psig.
Model 111 Flow Schematic
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 I46CDGC V-I.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULT1GAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 17 of 18
Inside the main case of the Model 111, the compressed air is further reduced to the final desired
pressure (10 to 30 psi). The air then passes into a column of Purafil (potassium permanganate on
alumina), which oxidizes NO to N02. The air then passes through a column of iodated charcoal,
which removes N02 and S02. Finally, the air goes into the reactor where it is heated to 375° over
a catalytic surface, which oxidizes CO to CO, and hydrocarbons including methane, to CO, and
water. The figure below shows the layout of these components.
Thermo Model 111 Zero Air Generator - Component Layout
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDCC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO 146C MULT1GAS DYNAMIC DILUTION SYSTEM
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 18 of 18
Maintenance of the Model 111 Zero Air Supply
The Model 111 Zero Air Supply has been designed with ease of maintenance as an important
criterion. Components and sub-assemblies have been selected for high performance, excellent
stability, and long life. The exact lifetimes of the scrubbing material is hard to predict. It is
dependent upon flow, pressure, and level of contaminate. For most applications the following
recommendation should be followed:
Weekly
If optional automatic drain valve is not installed, open the stop cock on the bottom of the tank
and drain water.
Monthly
Check the condition of the Purafll. Fresh Purafil is purple. It becomes brown when it is used up.
Replace when the purple color represents less than 20 percent of the volume. To replace, turn off
power and unplug, wait until the reactor cools down (approximately 10 minutes with the air
flowing). Shut off the air supply so that the Model 111 pressure drops to 0.0 psig. Remove the
cartridge holding Purafil. Slowly unscrew the cap, allowing any remaining pressure to vent,
empty out the used Purafil and discard. Replace with fresh Purafil. Screw on cover and replace
cartridge.
Yearly
Replace the charcoal. The procedure is the same as replacing Purafil, outlined above.
Compressor
When it is observed that the pump is having difficulty keeping the pressure, rebuilding may be
necessary. For directions, refer to Appendix C of the Thermo Manual, "Compressor Operation
and Maintenance."
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\3-A Attach 4 146CDGC V-l.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page ] of 17
III. FIELD MANUAL
A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 5: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 49i UV
PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
EPA Designated Equivalent Method Number: EQOA-0880-047
Effective
Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
H/'/^°c ?
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations
Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Tables and Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature: (
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49; UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 2 of 17
III. A. SITE OPERATORS HANDBOOK
ATTACHMENT 5: THERMO SCIENTIFIC (THERMO) MODEL 49i UV
PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
EPA Designated Equivalent Method Number: EQOA-0880-047
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the operation of the Thermo Scientific (Thermo) Model 49i Photometric Ozone (03) Analyzer for
regulatory monitoring at Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) sites.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to 03 monitoring compliant with the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40,
Part 58, the guidance in "Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems",
Volumes I, and II; "Technical Assistance Document Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone" (EPA-600/4-79-056); and "Technical Assistance Document
for the Calibration of Ambient Ozone Monitors" (EPA-600/4-79-057) performed at CASTNET
sites.
3.0 SUMMARY
The Model 49z" operation is based on the principle that 03 molecules absorb ultraviolet (UV) light
at a wavelength of 254 nanometers (nm). The degree to which the UV light is absorbed is
directly related to the 03 concentration as described by the Beer-Lambert Law:
-klc
T ~e
1 0
where:
k = molecular absorption coefficient, 308 cm"1 (at 0°C and 1 atmosphere)
1 = length of cell, 38 cm
c = 03 concentration in parts per million (ppm)
I = UV light intensity of sample with O, (sample gas)
I0 = UV light intensity of sample without Os (reference gas)
An ambient air sample is drawn through a 10-meter high Teflon® inlet. The sample is drawn into
the Model 49/ through the SAMPLE bulkhead and is split into two gas streams, as depicted in
Figure 1-1 on page 1-3 of the Thermo instruction manual (May 26, 2006 P/N 102434-00). One
gas stream flows through an 03 scrubber to become the reference gas (I0). The reference gas then
flows to the reference solenoid valve. The sample gas (I) flows directly to the sample solenoid
valve. The solenoid valves alternate the reference and sample gas streams between cells A and B
every 10 seconds. Longer intervals are also possible. When cell A contains reference gas, cell B
contains sample gas and vice versa.
I ' \'v! !' C vsiNr'T-i • V-\pi'
•• i :r vi-inU:-:: "=¦¦¦ A il.'-oi: •!"? U • :•!
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49i UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 3 of 17
The UV light intensities of each cell are measured by detectors A and B. When the solenoid
valves switch the reference and sample gas streams to opposite cells, the light intensities are
ignored for several seconds to allow the cells to be flushed. The Model 49i calculates the 03
concentration for each cell and outputs the average concentration to both the front panel display
as well as the analog and digital outputs.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Campbell Scientific Inc. Model CR3000 Data logger
Thermo Scientific Model 49/ 03 Analyzer
Zero air system
Site Narrative Log for appropriate sampling week (and/or other forms as needed)
Writing implement
Site Tool Kit
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
N/A
6.0 PROCEDURE
The O, inlet filters are to be replaced every other week and inspected each week and replaced if
necessary. Site operators are required to perform additional duties, which include performing
manual checks if required.
Page 1-3 of the manual presents the analyzer specifications. Refer to page 3-2 of the instrument
manual for a graphic representation of the front panel controls and indicators. The controls and
indicators on the front of the Thermo 49i analyzer (from left to right) are as follows: Display
panel, RUN pushbutton, MENU pushbutton, ~ pushbutton, ENTER pushbutton, HELP
pushbutton, M pushbutton, -i- pushbutton, and the pushbutton. Four additional buttons are
located jut under the screen. These are programmable and at CASTNET sites they are typically
configured as: Temperature, Pressure, Flow, and Intensity (lamp). The POWER switch is
located at the bottom right corner of the front panel.
Refer to page 2-4 of the instrument manual for a graphic representation of the rear panel. A
series of connectors are located on the left side. These are: external accessory (15 pin female), 2
RS-232/485 (9-pin male), I/O expansion (blank cover), Ethernet, power fail relay/digital
inputs/analogue voltage outputs (37-pin male), digital outputs (37-pin female), 120 VAC power
socket and 2 fuses (3 amp). Pin identifications are available on pp. 3-9 through 3-13 and 7-14 in
the manual. To the right of these, items are as follows: from left to right, the cooling fan/filter,
Vent and Ozone (top row) bulkhead connectors. These are Teflon fittings connected to same
internal manifold. One is plugged and the other is fitted with a !4 inch Teflon line going to the
top of the filter pack tower. This line carries ozonated air during zero, precision, and span (ZPS)
automated calibrations and manual multipoint calibrations. Below these are the SAMPLE
-i'C.M !' I f -i • ::0:: •• " : rvA; '-Oi" jo be :x=-ri;.:1--o t;U
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49; UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 4 of 17
(Teflon, sample input) and Zero air bulkhead connectors (stainless steel, zero air input). Between
these and just below, there is an unidentified Teflon bulkhead connector that is connected with a
short piece of % inch Teflon tubing to another Teflon bulkhead connector below labeled "IN".
This is an external path of the sample air via an internal 3-way solenoid valve that is never
switched. This valve was originally intended for selecting between ozonated air for calibrations
or sample. Since CASTNET sites sample at 10m an external air pump is used during this
ozonation to drive the flow up the tower where the sample inlet is located. The last bulkhead pass
is a stainless steel connector labeled VENT, where the internal pump exhausts.
Refer to page 3-5 of the Model 49i instrument manual for the flowchart of the menu-driven
software. This flowchart gives a quick reference to all the menus and submenus available to the
operator.
6.1 Thermo 49/ Analyzer Settings
6.1.1 Mode Setting - Mode should be set on SAMPLE with the 03 concentration and the time
displayed. If not, correct and mark in site log and appropriate calibration or report form.
The CR3000 data logger is not capable of running periodic ZPS checks if the 49/ is left
in SERVICE mode. Serial communication or program error should be suspected if ZPS
checks fail to operate as these are encoded the logger's program.
6.1.2 Range Setting - Press MENU, select RANGE and press ENTER. Select GAS UNITS
and press ENTER. CURRENTLY: displays actual setting. SET TO: shows options. The
up and down arrows are used to toggle through the options. Set to PPB and save by
pressing ENTER. Press the MENU button to return. With the arrows select Range. This
should be set at 500 parts per billion (ppb); if not, correct the setting and note in site log
and appropriate calibration or report form. Any data recorded in other than the 0.0 to
500 ppb range must be clearly identified.
NOTE: Range settings assign a voltage range to a concentration range. This is only relevant
when collecting in analogue mode.
6.1.3 Averaging Time - Press MENU twice to return to the main menu, scroll to
AVERAGING TIME and press ENTER. Averaging time should be set on 10 seconds; if
not, correct the setting and document the observation as described above.
6.1.4 Voltages - Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER,
scroll to VOLTAGES and press ENTER, scroll to INTERFACE BOARD VOLTAGES
and press ENTER. Observe the voltage readings on the front panel and document the
observation. In particular, please note the "3.3 SUPPLY" reading as it represents the
instruments battery voltage.
NOTE: Each actuation of the MENU button within the DIAGNOSTICS submenu will move you
up one level in the submenu.
i: > '' i ¦' ' i -i - i:.:- .P; pi' - j ; JP P< -p bv: bieo A-:
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. ]
November 2009
Page 5 of 17
6.1.5 Temperatures* - Press the MENU pushbutton, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press
enter. Scroll to TEMPERATURE and press ENTER. Alternatively you may press run to
access the preprogrammed "hot keys" under screen buttons. The leftmost is TEMPS.
Observe the temperature readings on the front panel and document. The internal
temperature should be between 25 °C and 40 °C. The bench lamp temperature should be
between 45 °C and 55 °C. The 03 lamp temperature should be between 60 °C and 75 C.
6.1.6 Pressure* - Press MENU, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER. Scroll to
PRESSURE and press ENTER. Alternatively, push the PRESSURE hotkey button
under the LCD display. Observe the pressure reading on the display panel and
document. If not within limits (400 mm Hg - 1000 mm Hg), corrective action must be
taken. A pressure of less than 400 mm Hg indicates a blocked sample line. Document
initial and corrected pressure.
6.1.7 Flow* - Press MENU, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER. Scroll to FLOW
and press ENTER. Alternatively, push the FLOWS hotkey button under the LCD
display. Observe the Cell (A and B) flows on the screen and record the values. The 49/
operates typically at a flow rate of 0.75 liters per minute (LPM) per cell.
NOTE: The total flow rate under EPA Designated Equivalent Method Number EQOA-0880-047
must be at least 1.00 LPM and not greater than 3.00 LPM.
* These parameters and others (see Alarms Menu p. 3-72 of the instrument manual)
can be programmed to display an alert message if they drift out of a predetermined
range.
The total flow rate is the sum of the Cell A and Cell B flows indicated by the analyzer.
This value is not indicated by the analyzer. Either cell exhibiting a flow rate less than or
equal to 0.5 LPM is cause for immediate investigation. For normal operation both A and
B flow rates should be approximately 0.75 LPM each for a total flow rate of 1.5 LPM.
If the flow is unacceptable, corrective action must be taken following a six point audit.
Document the initial and corrected flow and recalibrate the machine.
6.1.8 Cell A/B 03 - Press MENU, scroll to DIAGNOSTICS and press ENTER. Scroll to
CELL A/B O, and press ENTER. Observe the readings and document. The two cell
readings should average out to the ambient reading.
6.1.9 Intensity and Noise - Down the 03 channel. The noise check will corrupt the
measurement. Press MENU, scroll to INSTRUMENT CONTROLS and press ENTER.
Scroll to SERVICE MODE and press ENTER. Press ENTER to toggle SERVICE
MODE to ON. Press the MENU button twice to return to the main menu. Scroll to
SERVICE and press ENTER. Scroll to INTENSITY CHECK and press ENTER. Scroll
to INT A SAMPLE GAS and press ENTER. Wait at least sixty seconds for noise to
stabilize. Record Cell A Intensity and Noise to the nearest thousand. Press MENU then
scroll to INT B SAMPLE GAS. Wait at least sixty seconds for the Noise to stabilize
and repeat as before. If either Cell intensity is less than 80 KHz the unit must be
adjusted or the lamp and/or its power supply must be replaced. Sometimes a low
r i" t'MSr \r'l'-i ¦ = : o :\o- ' : i* :=|=-
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 6 of 17
frequency condition can be corrected by cleaning the cell tubes. Noise on both cells
should be below 4.0 Hz. When done, press the RUN button to return the unit to
SAMPLE mode.
6.2 Ozone site configurations
There are two ways in which to configure a site for compliance monitoring. The first is
a stand alone site where the analyzer has an internal ozonator and uses this for the
routine calibration checks, and the second is a site that has a primary standard and an
analyzer where the primary is used to generate the concentrations for routine checks. If
the site uses a stand alone instrument, the analyzer's photometer must first have a 6-day
certification and then a 1 -day certification every six months by an 03 transfer standard
that is traceable to an EPA standard reference photometer. If a primary and an analyzer
are used together, then the primary must be certified once a year to an EPA standard at a
regional office. The majority of CASTNET program monitoring sites utilize a stand-
alone configuration. Please see Figure 1.
6.3 Analyzer set up
The transfer and site analyzers need to be plumbed (transfer connected to a tee located
near the site analyzer's sample inlet) in and turned on for at least an hour before the
initial checks are performed. This will allow adequate warm-up. The analyzer will
display an alarm message on the front panel until all conditions are within limits.
Logger connection is analogue for the transfer (there is a designated port) and serial or
Ethernet for the analyzer. The site analyzer must be verified via comparison to a
certified transfer standard once installed via a 1-day certification procedure.
6.4 Routine Operation and Observations
6.4.1 The following describe routine monitoring:
¦ Standard local time is used for monitoring and is updated by the data logger.
¦ Logger controlled zero, precision (90 ppb), and span (400 ppb) checks will be
performed each day.
¦ Span checks must be within ±15 percent of reference value and zero checks must
be ± 15 ppb for data to be considered as valid.
¦ Please refer to Table 1 for measurement quality objectives and actions required
when indicators are outside of criteria.
¦ Data are collected via data logger, polled remotely and uploaded to AIRNow every
hour.
6.4.2 During each weekly visit, the field site operator (FSO) will perform the following
checks:
6.4.2.1 Automatic ZPS checks are performed each day by the data logger. Span checks must be
within ± 10 percent of reference value and zero checks must be ± 5 ppb. Checks outside
of these criteria will alert the FSO to investigate the system and call MACTEC for
instructions. MACTEC personnel will guide the FSO through troubleshooting and
corrective action including a manual calibration if necessary. Span checks greater than ±
f -K'fvs i' I 4 • Ap .. " A *¦'¦*¦ i* •tpbtv.-.;: \ \hAS:\ T: ¦•!"! it'* Jm: •: MACTEC, Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 7 of 17
15 percent of reference value or zero checks outside of ± 15 ppb are outside of
established criteria and data falling between consecutive failed checks are considered
invalid. Please refer to Table 1 of this SOP.
6.4.2.2 Physical integrity of the analyzer will be checked and the findings documented.
6.4.2.3 All routine site checks requested on the Site Status Report Form (SSRF) and Site
Operator Checklist will be completed.
6.4.2.4 All site activities and observations will be documented in the Site Narrative logbook
and SSRF.
6.5 Manual Operation
6.5.1.1 On the Model 49/, from the SAMPLE screen, Press the RUN button once to go to the
Zero Air mode. The zero air system must be plumbed to the Zero Air port on the
analyzer's rear panel and the zero air system energized. This happens through a contact
closure controlled by the analyzer.
6.5.1.2 Open the top of the analyzer and check the pressure gauge. The gauge should be set at
15 pounds per square inch (psi).
6.5.1.3 For Span 1, press the RUN button a second time.
6.5.1.4 For Span 5, press the RUN button a sixth time. These levels should have been set at the
time of certification.
6.5.1.5 When the Span 5 (Precision Point: 90 ppb) check is complete, press RUN twice to go
back to the zero mode for the final zero check.
6.5.1.6 All data for these checks should be entered on the form shown in Figure 3.
6.5.1.7 If necessary to adjust the levels of Span 1 or Span 5, press the MENU button, and scroll
down with the arrow key to Instrument Controls and press ENTER. Select CUSTOM
LEVELS. Select LEVEL 1. Adjust the PERCENT LAMP DRIVE to produce 400 ppb.
Press ENTER to save the value. For each other level, repeat the process above. Be sure
to press ENTER after each adjustment to save the new level.
NOTE: The unit will not allow adjustment to a level that is currently in use. Initiating a ZPS
run via the data logger is recommended over a purely manual procedure.
6.6 Manual Calibration of the Ozone Source
6.6.1 Allow the transfer standard to warm up for at least 1 hour or until stable. Connect its
voltage output to a designated channel on the data logger. This procedure verifies the
correct ozonator output of the site instruments using the transfer as an 03 detector.
6.6.2 Down the 03 channel.
6.6.3 Remove the cap from the branch side of the union tee fitting on the "sample in" port.
6.6.4 Connect the calibration test tubing to the branch of the tee and the sample port of the
transfer standard. The transfer standard should be sampling from the same point in the
sample train as the site analyzer. The calibration gas vent should be at the 10 meter 03
filter inlet on the tower. See Figure 2 - Ozone Calibration Sample Line Configuration.
j KrT j \ p!" -- Ap •• 1 MeM :-\>P 10 be >^\
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 8 of 17
6.6.5 Place the toggle switch for the sample/span solenoid in the span position. Activate the
zero air pump, if necessary. Check for excess flow at the sample inlet on the tower.
¦ Place the analyzer in SAMPLE mode.
¦ Press the RUN button once for zero air. The word ZERO should be displayed on
the lower left corner of the display.
¦ When the analyzer stabilizes, record the display value 5 times every 10 seconds.
" Advance to LEVEL 1 (450 ppb) using the RUN button and press ENTER. When
the analyzer stabilizes, record the display value 5 times every 10 seconds.
¦ Repeat the process for LEVELS 2 (300 ppb) through 4 (100 ppb).
Record the percent lamp drive for each LEVEL as found. This is an unadjusted
calibration. If said levels do not produce the desired concentration values, the lamp
intensity must be adjusted as read by the transfer standard.
¦ LEVEL 5 is set to 90 ppb for the auto ZPS sequence and must be adjusted for this
purpose to 60 ppb using percent lamp drive control.
¦ To use the percent lamp drive control perform the following instructions:
• Press the MENU button
• Select INSTRUMENT CONTROLS by pressing ENTER.
• Select CUSTOM LEVEL by pressing ENTER.
• Select LEVEL 1 (or other level, as appropriate).
• Press ENTER
• Note the script LAMP SETTING. Using the "up" "down" arrow keys adjust
the percent lamp drive until the desired concentration is displayed.
• Let stabilize and record.
" When done press RUN button to get to main screen.
¦ Press the RUN button until the word SAMPLE is shown on the left side of the
display
NOTE: Review the previous calibration form on site. Percent drive levels should be ± 3 percent
of the previous calibration settings for equivalent output (Same concentration values). If
the percent drive must be increased by more than 3 percent the unit may be leaking,
zero-air may be dirty, calibration factors may have been changed or the ozonator lamp
function may be declining abnormally (detector/ lamp wear will be evident in the A/B
concentration comparison and/or the Intensity check values) . If the percent lamp drive
must be decreased by more than 3 percent, the gauge setting is belowlS psi, calibration
factors may have been changed, or the unit may have leaked during the previous
multipoint calibration.
6.6.6 Upon completion of the 03 source calibration, set the site analyzers LEVEL 1 and
LEVEL 5 PERCENT LAMP DRIVES to 400 ppb and 90 ppb, respectively, using the
response registered by the transfer standard. PERCENT LAMP DRIVE values above 45
percent for 400 ppb of ozonator output indicate a plumbing leak or aging ozonator lamp
and warrant further investigation. Normal drive levels for a 400 ppb concentration with
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 9 of 17
a like-new ozonator lamp in a leak free system as deployed at CASTNET sites is
approximately 36 percent.
6.6.7 Following a calibration or audit and prior to departure:
¦ Initiate a ZPS run under data-logger control.
¦ Record the auto ZPS values reported by the data-logger and record them in site
calibration documentation.
6.7 Automatic Ozone Source and Photometer Audit
A logger based routine is also available that automatically audits and stores both ozonator lamp
and photometer responses. This procedure requires only plumbing changes to be done manually.
The information gathered can then be inserted in the electronic calibration forms in oder to
determine the calibration status of the ozone analyzer, based on comparison with a shop certified
transfer. Sample line losses are also addressed in this procedure.
6.8 Manual testing of sample line loss
6.8.1 The sample inlet for CASTNET sites 03 analyzers is located 10m above ground on the
flow tower. This long length of !4 inch Teflon tubing has the potential to destroy some
of the 03 in the atmosphere before reaching the instrument. During instrument
calibrations or replacements potential surface losses are investigated. Check the sample
line loss by removing the calibration gas line, which is labeled "VENT", and the sample
line from the straight side of the tee connector on the rear of the site analyzer. This line
is coming from the 10m sampling point and is fitted with a Teflon tee prior to reaching
the "SAMPLE" port of the analyzer. The idea here is to eliminate the calibration gas
trip to the 10m sampling point and feed the cal gas directly to the instrument. Using a
short piece if tubing, connect the "VENT" port to the tee letting one of the tee ports
open. This is required in order not to pressurize the analyzer. The 03 generated by the
site analyzer will now enter the analyzer directly without taking a trip to the 10m
sampling location. The excess ozonated air will be released inside the shelter. Use a
concentration of 100 ppb to avoid any possible hazard. Report the difference obtained
by this connection, and that obtained in the step above (through the entire sample train)
as the line loss. Excessive line loss (greater than 5 percent) warrants further
investigation. After completing the line loss test, return the calibration and sample lines
to their original and proper positions.
6.8.2 Remove the transfer standard test tubing line, and cap the branch of the union tee. Turn
SERVICE MODE to OFF to restore.
6.8.3 The electronic forms automatically perform a linear regression analysis of the actual
concentrations as indicated by the transfer standard and the site analyzer at all of the set
points generated by the digital 03 output control of the site analyzer. This will be five 03
concentrations and a zero point for a total of six points. Values for the percent
difference at each point, the slope, intercept, correlation coefficient, standard
deviation of the intercepts and the relative standard deviation of the slopes are
computed.
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49i UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 10 of 17
NOTE: Remember to correct the values of the transfer standard using the regression
information provided, generated during calibration against the primary standard.
6.8.4 Record the span, background, regulator pressure and levels 1 through 5 lamp intensity
settings in the site logbook.
6.9 Calibration of the Site Analyzer
6.9.1 Once the 03 source is verified against the transfer standard, the site analyzer response to
the various 03 levels can be investigated. The 49i can be forced at two points, zero and
80 percent of scale (450 ppb). Linearity can be verified by running other points, e.g. 60,
90, 200, 300 ppb etc. Adjusted calibrations need to be preceded by unadjusted signal
observations (unadjusted calibration) and all values recorded.
NOTE: Calibrate the analyzer passing the ozonated air through the standard CASTNET
sampling configuration, traveling up to the 10m sample inlet and back down to the
instrument.
6.9.2 With the sampling train in its standard configuration, select Zero air and observe the
signal value. From the menu select, CALIBRATION and then CALIBRATE ZERO and
press ENTER. Observe the 03 value until stable. Since zero air is flowing the value
should be near zero ± 0.5 ppb. If outside this range, use the arrows and adjust the value
to zero. Press ENTER to for the instrument to accept this value. Press RUN twice and
select LEVEL 1 (the 450 ppb setting, i.e. ca. 80 percent of scale). Repeat as above for
the ca. 80 percent point at 4 ppb. Place the instrument in SAMPLE mode. Using the
various preprogrammed ozonator levels, an input versus actual O, graph can be
generated from where slope and intercept can be obtained if desired.
x- rCiVi !' t'.'AS I 4 - \! '-.rl' •• •• i ;d: be • A An-K:J;
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49i UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page II of 17
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary
Ambient Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056
Thermo Environmental Instruments. Model 49C UV Photometric Analyzer Instrument Manual
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49i UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 12 of 17
8.0 TABLES AND FIGURES
Figure 1: Ozone Certification
Notes: * 40CFR58 Appendix A Section 3.2.2 Annual Performance Evaluation; 40CFR58 Appendix A Section 2.4
National Performance Evaluation Programs National Performance Audit Program (NPAP).
t 3 denotes onboard ozone generator but not plumbed to be a PS.
t Every six months QA Handbook Volume 2 Part 1 (Redbook) Ozone Local Primary Standard Audit.
§ During the same site visit as the ozone generator (Station Ozone Local Primary Standard) calibration
check the Thermo 49i-3 ozone analyzer photometer is challenged with the Redbook multipoint calibration
(0 and 4 upscale points). This is not the 40CFR58 Appendix A section 3.2.2 annual performance
evaluation (multipoint accuracy audit). The annual performance audit from the rule is performed by a
third party contractor. The NPAP is also performed by a third party contractor according to the rule.
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 13 of 17
Figure 2. Ozone Calibration Sample Line Configuration (Page 1 of 2)
RevNo Revision note
Date
Signature Checked
- Sample Inlet
DIAGRAM 1
Troubleshooting Ozone
Ozone Sample Train Architecture
CASTNet Sites (MACTEC Adm)
Oct 9, 2008
Integrity Line / Cal Gas Line
Transports Ozone generated
by analyzer to sample train
for ZSP. Requires 15 PSI
Zero-Air pressure for normal
operation.
B
D
MACTEC Engineering & Consulting
Newberry Florida
i i i i r
CASTNet Ozone Sampling Architecture as used with
Thermo Model 49i Analyzers and Thomas Pump Zero-Air Systems:
RSM 100908 NOT TO SCALE
I I I
Edition
Sheet
1
B
C
D
r fvs A IS; K'?;T : 0 • = I ¦!•' :"v-: ¦¦ i 'j -ehl •• lo ix: ;:.:1 v.-0 > •
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 14 of 17
Figure 2. Ozone Calibration Sample Line Configuration (Page 2 of 2)
RevNo Revision note
Date
Signature Checkec
A
B
D
DIAGRAM 2
Troubleshooting Ozone
OZONE SYSTEM ZERO-AIR DELIVERY ARCHITECTURE:
CASTNet sites equipped with Thomas Pumps
O-Rings in cannister caps are a
significant source of leakage and
should be checked when Zero-Air
pressure is less than 15 PSI.
Suction
Minimum Pressure here
Should exceed 15 PSI
MACTEC Engineering & Consulting
Newberry Florida
Thomas Pump
Note:
Pump orientation may be reversed due
to deviations in pump internal flapper orientation
but Air Flow Direction through the cannisters
must be maintained as shown.
The positive pressure side of the pump MUST
be connected to the'cannister pair.
Zero-Air System Plumbing Details
9 RSM 101008 NOT TO SCALE
I I I I T
Edition
Sheet
A
B
D
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49; UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. ]
November 2009
Page 15 of 17
Figure 3. Ozone Data Sheet
MACTnC Ozone
Site Name
Calibrator 11 Calibration Date
Data Logger
IForms Ver.
SUM 156
M. SMITH | | 10/8/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:335
1.3.2.1
Setting: 0
Lamp: 0.0%
Setting; 430
Lamp: 31.3%
Setting: 300
Lamp: 24.2%
Setting: 200
Lamp: 19.4%
Setting: 90
Lamp: 14.1%
Setting: 60
Lamp: 12.7%
Analyzer
Transfer
Analyzer
Transfer
Analyzer
Transfer
Analyzer
Transfer
Analyzer
Transfer
Analyzer
Transfer
1
2
3
4
5
Average
Actual
Potent
DittewKe
Average
0.821
0.483
450.9
445
293.7
289.8
189.9
187.2
88.6
87.1
67.07
65.95
Actual
1
0.8
451
448.0
294
291.8
190
188.6
89
87.9
67
66.6
Per Mill
Wlference
•0.1 ppb
0.66%
0.64%
0.69*
0.79%
0.66%
* vjKjotincaon 5 m"wlcDiS Averages
Site Analyzer
Transfer
Site Analyzer
Transfer
As Found 1 As Left
As Found I As Left
Manufacturer
Thermo
Thermo
Pressure (mmHg)
731 mmHg
729 mmHg
Model
491
491
Ceil Temperature i"C)
32.6 "C
31.7 °C
10 u
000514
000513
Sample Line Loss
188.5 ppb
Voltage
Output
Zero
n/a
n/a
Corrected Loss
0.7%
0.9940
Full Scale
n/a
n/a
Mope
1.006
0.062 ppb
1.000
Offset or Bkg.
•0.3
0.1
Intercept
-0.2800
Span or Coef.
1.014
1.004
R*
1.0000
A | B | A | B
A | B
AutoCal Results
Date oS Last Certification:
9/15/2009
Cell Freq. (kHz)
109 105
109 109
As Lett
Cell Noise
1.1 Hz 0.9 Hz
0.9 Hz 1.1Hz
Zero
Span
Precision
0.64
Remarks
Cell Flow jlpm)
0.658 0.655
0.689 0.675
407.6
All QA conducted with the Gast comp and existing granular
drying agent. Werther compressor and new silica gel
in«t*ltAri at fnr 7P^
Sample Leak Check
189 mmHg
90.4
Reviewed By: Date:
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49/ UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 16 of 17
Figure 4. Generator Data Sheet
MACTEC
Ozone Generator Re-Verification
| Site Name
Calibrator
Calibration Date |
Data Logger
| IForms Ver.
[ 5UM156
.V,. SMITH
KVB.'"A)l)y [
Campbell JOOO D:"iJ5
1.3.2.1
Site Analyzer
As Found
As Left
J D#
5u
DeMtiptiftd
Ozore Analyzer
KlmitaclorCr
i hermo
Modes
49i
2«ro Air Prwture
13.04 pi<
Lamp Drive SflMinfs
PPB As Found
A. Left
Levelx
4oo
29.0*
Level z
300
?4.2«i
X4.X%
Level?
200
1-9.4^
19.4%
Level 4
90
14.1%
Levels
bO
12.7*
IZ.7%
Cutton
4b0
Ji.K
31.4%
AsFannd
VtritiMtlon New
As left
Verification New
0.0479
0.0479
T
9.794
9.810
0.64%
U.-&4X
s.
| 0.077
! 6.6 7$ j
As Found
As Found Lamp Verification
Lamp DrK«
0 0
31.3
24.2
19.4
14.1
12.7
Cat* | StApe | Intercept
Concentration
0
450
300
2CO
9fl
60
1
8/23/2009 0.0479 9.763
1
i
8/29/2009 0.0479 9.749
2
i
8/3C/2009 0.0478 9.764
3
A
8/31/2009 0.047? 9.767
4
5
9/1/2009 0.0477 9.772
S
&
9/V 2009 0.04B5 9.9->t
Actual Average
New
lv>.'8/2nOS 00479 9.8W
DAS 5 Min. Average
0.41
4M. 7(1
292.80
iaa.50
57.10
h=,.fi 9
Percent Difference
0.73
•O.Sli.
1.7.%
5.315
2.C3S
•9.373.
Remarks"
Pressure holding steady and d
-------
THERMO SCIENTIFIC 49i UV PHOTOMETRIC OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 17 of 17
Table 1. Ozone Measurement Quality Objectives
Type of
check
¦ : ZPS •
Unadjusted
Calibration
Corrective action*
Adjusted
Calibration
Analyzer Response
Field
Data
Acceptable
Analyzer response
Zero
0.0 and ± 5 ppb
None
None
Between 0.0 and
± 5 ppb
From > ± 5 ppb to < ± 10 ppb
Perform Zero
adjustment
Correct*/Adjust
From > ± 10 ppb to < ± 15 ppb
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Correct*/Adjust
> ± 15 ppb
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Precision
± 5 percent between
supplied and
observed
concentrations
Span
<±10 percent between supplied
and observed concentrations
None
None
> ± 10 percent and < ± 15 percent
between supplied and observed
concentrations
Perform
adjusted
calibration
None
>±15 percent between supplied
and observed concentrations
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
Correlation
Coefficient
>0.995
None
None
< 0.995
Perform
adjusted
calibration
Invalid from the last
good check until
adjusted calibration
completed
> 0.995
Frequency of analyzer checks
ZPS
One ZPS every other day
On demand to facilitate trouble shooting
Following a multipoint calibration prior to leaving the site
Calibration
Minimum one multipoint calibration every 6 months
As required per QC results
Adjusted calibration must occur within 24 hours of the unadjusted calibration
General
Unadjusted calibration does not have to be followed by an adjusted calibration only if all analyzer responses are in a 2
percent of full scale range.
Temperature acceptable range: 20 - 30 degrees C (± 2 degrees C)
Note:
* Display drifts are frequently due to leaks in the system or lamp degradation/ageing. Verify lamp intensity settings against previously
documented values. Perform internal and external leak checks by plugging inlet line in back of the instrument (internal) or tower inlet port
(external). A line plug should reduce the internal pressure down to 250 mm Hg or so. Verify external ozone generator pump function and internal
pressure using the manual pressure gauge located inside the instrument.
-------
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
A. PRIMARY STANDARDS
1. OZONE
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 1 of 8
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Z-c7(7
1
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
H. Kemp Howell
Project Manager
t-j —
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-l .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 2 of 8
IV. A. 1. OZONE
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the routine repair, maintenance, and certification of Ozone (03) primary standards by Clean Air
Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Certification Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the repair, maintenance, and certification of all Thermo Electron Corp and
Thermo Fisher Scientific (Thermo) model 49C PS and Model 49z PS, Primary Standard
Ultraviolet (UV) Photometric 03 Calibrators.
3.0 SUMMARY
The CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory employs three Thermo Primary Standard UV
Photometric 03 Calibrators, two model 49C PS, and one 491 PS. These are sent annually to the
EPA's Kansas City Science and Technology Center (EPA district 7) where they are certified
against a National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) reference photometer. These
PS units are used to verify and maintain the accuracy of the O3 transfer standards, and site O3
analyzers that have been returned to our facility for repairs or new units being tested for the first
time. These units are not plumbed to receive ambient air samples.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Refer to the Thermo manual, Chapter 7 (See Section 7.0, References).
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Cleaning optical bench.
• Turn off the calibrator and unplug the power cord.
• Remove the calibrator cover.
• Loosen the knurled nut around the cell tube and carefully slide out tube.
• Push a Kimwipe® paper down the tube using a 1/4-inch piece of Teflon® tubing or blow
with compressed air. Use a cotton swab/rag and bottle compressed gas (such as Ultra Jet
C2H2F4) to clean the detector window surfaces through the holes into which the cell tubes
are fitted.
• Replacement of cell tubes is the opposite to that of removal.
5.2 Cleaning the fan and fan filter.
• Turn off the calibrator and unplug the power cord.
• Remove fan filter holder and clean holder and foam element in soap and water. Use
compressed air to dry these parts.
• Use compressed air to flush debris out of fan and internal parts of unit.
• Reinstall fan foam and holder.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0 Ap- 1 Field SOP4-A-I .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 3 of 8
5.3 Adjustment of detector frequencies and noise check.
• With calibrator at operating temperature, adjust frequencies for 80 to 120 kilohertz (kHz)
preferably >100 kHz, using the Intensities screen in the Diagnostics menu. Problems in
attaining this range may be indicative of a failing lamp or power supply.
• To check the lamp noise, choose Intensity Check from the Service Mode menu. The
noise value displayed after 20 seconds must be below 4.0 hertz (Hz) for a fully warmed
up lamp (if the frequencies will not adjust or noise levels remain or ramp above 4.0 Hz,
see Chapter 6, "Troubleshooting" of the Thermo manual)
5.4 Replacing the sample pump.
• Turn off the calibrator and unplug the power cord.
• Remove the calibrator cover.
• Unplug power lead of pump from Power Supply Board.
• Loosen fittings, remove all 1/4-inch Teflon® lines from pump.
• Remove four screws holding pump bracket to shock mounts and remove pump.
• Install new pump by following the above procedure in reverse.
• Re-install the cover, plug in the power cord, and turn the instrument on.
• Perform leak tests and verify correct sample flow rate.
5.4.1 Replace the sample pump if, during a leak check, the pressure remains between 200 and
250 mm Hg, the diaphragm is in good condition, and a leak is not suspected. The sample pump
may not be strong enough to pull more vacuum.
5.4.2 Sample Pump Removal Procedure
• The sample pump diaphragm may need to be replaced if the pressure exceeds 205 mm
Hg and a leak is not suspected.
• Remove the four screws on the top of the sample pump and place the block with the
vacuum and pressure ports to one side.
• Remove the screw and collar from the diaphragm and inspect the diaphragm for tears or
excessive wear and / or cracking. Replace if necessary.
• The valve body (if the pump is an ASF pum) and the Teflon gasket may need to be
replaced as well.
• Reinstall the top block and screws.
5.5 Perform system leak tests:
5.5.1 External leaks - To test for leaks around the fittings:
• Disconnect the 03 output line and plug the 03 fitting,
• Disconnect the vent line and plug, then
• Disconnect the zero air supply and plug the zero air fitting.
• The flows, as displayed in the Flows screen of the Diagnostics menu, should slowly
decrease to zero. The pressure as displayed in the Pressure screen should drop to below
250 millimeters of mercury (mm Hg). If the pump diaphragm is in good condition and the
capillary is not blocked, it should take less than 20 seconds from the time the inlet is
P:' ECMP CASTNET4-ti ansilion\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOP .4-A-! .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 4 of 8
plugged to the time a reading below 250 mm Hg is achieved. Leaks can sometimes be
corrected by carefully tightening each fitting until the leak is found.
Note: It is very important to release the vacuum slowly
to prevent damage to the flow transducers.
5.5.2 Leaks through Solenoid - Leaks across the solenoid valve can be caused by breakdown of the
Teflon® base with particles collecting around the O-ring. To check for leaks through the
solenoid, generate an 03 concentration of about 0.5 parts per million (ppm). From the Main
menu, choose Diagnostics; from the Diagnostics menu, choose Cell A/B 03. This displays the
concentration as determined in each cell individually. If the calibrator has stabilized, the
average of 10 successive readings per cell should agree to within ± 3%. A balance measurement
of less than 3% indicates that there is no leak across the solenoid. A constant low reading from
one cell indicates an imbalance. The imbalance can be caused either by one cell or lines to that
cell being extremely dirty, or by, a leaky valve or a broken fitting. To check if the imbalance is
caused by absorption within one cell, interchange the cells. If the imbalanced side switches,
imbalance is due to cell; if not, it is independent of the cell and due to other causes as noted
below.
5.5.3 Confirmation of a leaking solenoid - An isolated direct check of the solenoid valve can be
performed as follows:
• Remove the suspect solenoid valve following directions given in Chapter 6 of the
Thermo manual.
• Connect the sample pump directly to the common port of the solenoid.
• Connect the pressure transducer to the normally open port of the solenoid.
• From the Main menu, choose Diagnostics; from the Diagnostics menu, choose Pressure.
Note the pressure as Pno.
• Connect the pressure transducer to the normally closed port of the solenoid.
• Plug the solenoid power line into the
• solenoid position on the Power Supply Board. Make sure that the solenoid is activated by
choosing Pressure from the Diagnostics menu.
Note the pressure as PNC.
• If either PNC or PN0 is greater than the pressure determined in the "External Leaks"
section above, the solenoid is faulty. To replace the solenoid, see Chapter 6,
"Troubleshooting" of the Thermo manual.
5.5.4 Manual Solenoid Leak Check
Remove the suspect solenoid valve following directions given in Chapter 6 of the
Thermo manual leaving the power connector attached to the main power supply board.
• Plug the common port.
• Plug the NC port and attach a hand-held vacuum pump to the NO port. Pull
approximately 10 to 15 pounds per square inch on the valve. It is not necessary to exceed
this value. It should hold steady until the valve switches to the normally closed port. If it
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - iransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ! Field SOP\4-A-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 5 of 8
does not hold steady the solenoid should be replaced. When the valve switches it should
drop instantly to zero. If it drops slowly the solenoid should be replaced.
• Plug the NO port and check the NC port with the hand-held vacuum as above.
5.6 Pressure transducer adjustment:
• Remove the instrument cover.
• Disconnect the tubing from the pressure transducer and connect a vacuum pump known
to produce a vacuum less than 1 mm Hg.
• From the Run screen, choose Menu to display the Main menu. Press the button to move
the cursor to Instrument Control. Press to display the Instrument Control menu.
Press the 4- button to move the cursor to Pressure Correction. Press to display the
pressure reading.
• Adjust the zero potentiometer on the pressure transducer for a reading of 0 mm Hg.
• Disconnect the vacuum pump. The display should read the current local barometric
pressure. If this value does not agree with a known accurate barometer, adjust the span
potentiometer.
5.7 Temperature sensor adjustment:
• Remove the instrument cover.
• Tape the thermistor plugged into the Motherboard to a calibrated thermometer. Adjust the
GAIN potentiometer on the Analog to Digital Board until the internal temperature
reading agrees with the value on the calibrated thermometer.
• Reinstall the instrument cover.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOP\4-A-l .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 6 of 8
5.8 Verify the Set Points to the following values:
Range
1,000 ppb
Average Time
10 seconds
Cal. Factors—Background
0.0
—Coefficient
1.000
Temperature Correction
ON
Pressure Correction
ON
Response Coefficient
1.000
Alarm Set Points
Minimum
Maximum
O3 Lamp Temperature
50.0°C
60.0°C
Bench Temperature
20.0°C
35.0°C
Press
500.0 mm Hg
900.0 mm Hg
Flow
0.500 Lpm
1.400 Lpm
Intensity A and B
80,000
130,000
O3 Concentration
0.0 ppb
3,000 ppb
Note: Lpm =
mm Hg =
PPb
liters per minute
millimeters of mercury,
parts per billion.
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
The Thermo model 49C and 49i Primary Standards are certified annually by comparison with the
Standard Reference Photometer (SRP) maintained by the EPA Kansas City Science and Technology
Center. All procedures for this comparison are performed under the direction of the EPA SRP operator.
An example of a calibration produced by this process is provided in Figure 1.
6.1 Annual Certification Preparation
Prior to the annual certification the following procedures should be performed:
• Blow out the unit with compressed air;
• Replace the sample pump diaphragm;
• Clean the sample cells;
• Perform a leak check;
• Check intensities and adjust, if necessary;
• Check noise levels and find source of excessive noise, if necessary;
• Check battery voltages. If it is lower than 3.0 vdc replace;
• Internal pressure regulators should read 10 psi, and instruct technician with DIST. 7 to
operate unit at this pressure; and
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition .QAPP 6.0\Ap - ! Field SOP 4-A-1 .docx
MA CTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 7 of 8
• Pack inside of calibrator with foam pieces to reduce jarring during shipment. Be sure to
attach tag to unit informing Dist. 7 technician to remove packing prior to turning
calibrator on.
7.0 REFERENCES
Thermo Electron Corporation. 1997. Model 49C UVPhotometric Analyzer Instrument Manual
Thermo Fisher Scientific. 2006. Model 49i Instruction Manual, UV Photometric 03 Analyzer Part
number 102434-00
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
P.- .ECM'P.CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-1 .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
PRIMARY STANDARDS - OZONE
Revision No. 5
November 2009
Page 8 of8
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1: Example of O3 Primary Standard Calibration Form
Standard Reference Photometer
#0OO3%C)
Calibration Report
Calibrating Institute:
US_EPA REGION 7
Date:
7-Feb-08
Operator:
US_EPA
Start Time:
12:15
Instrument:
SRP 13
Cell Length=
39.45
End Time:
13:15
Comment:
Verification of TECO 49i-ps- S/N 0801827200 - using Se Filename:
C0207004.xls
Calibrated Instrument:
Guest#1
Calibration
Standard
Owner:
MACTEC
Results
Value
Uncertainty
Contact:
Dan Lucas/ Kent Brakefield
Slope
1.00590
0.00066
Make:
TECO
Intercept
-0.19849
0.19914
Model:
49i-ps
Covariance
-1.7642E-07
Serial Number:
801827200
Res Std Dev
0.24594
Calibration Parameters:
Raw Saved; Dark Count On (4)
Air Flow Rate:
7.0 l/min
Lamp Intensity Range:
0.0
to
50.0 %
Number Cone. Points:
6
Points/Concentration:
10
Conditioning:
53.0 % for 2 minutes
Calibration
SRP 13
Guest#1
Guest#1
Data Points
Result
Std. Dev
Result
Std. Dev
Predicted
Residual
Dark Count 1
9
Dark Count 2
12
1
496.9
0.8
499.9
0.3
499.62
0.32
2
398.2
0.3
400.0
0.1
400.39
-0.39
3
298.4
0.3
300.0
0.1
299.98
0.04
4
199.2
0.3
200.0
0.1
200.18
-0.15
5
99.5
0.7
100.0
0.4
99.84
0.14
6
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.04
Page 1 of 2
9.0 APPEDNICIES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-l .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
BIOS FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 7
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
A. PRIMARY STANDARD
2. BIOS FLOW METER
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-A-2 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Bios Flow Meter
Revision No. 0
November 2009
Page 2 of 7
IV. A. 2. BIOS FLOW METER
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
repair, maintenance, and certification of the Bios Flow Meter to Clean Air Status and Trends
Network (CASTNET) Field Certification Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the repair, maintenance, and certification of all Bios Flow Meters
administered by the CASTNET Field Certification Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
The Bios Flow meters administered by the CASTNET Field Certification Laboratory are leak
tested and recharged on a quarterly basis. Each meter is returned to the manufacturer annually for
routine maintenance and certification.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
BIOS Model DCL-MH Flow Meter
BIOS 12volts direct current (YDC) charger or
BIOS Air PRO 4000D charger
BIOS DryCal NEXUS flow cell
Latex flow tubing
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
When not in use, store in a clean, dry environment with the inlet/outlet caps installed. Every
quarter, fully charge the battery pack, and perform a leak test.
5.1 Charging the Battery
Before using your Bios-DryCal DC-Lite, be sure that the battery system has been fully charged to
ensure that the unit will perform to specifications and maintain proper operation for the required
time period.
The DC-Lite is equipped with a battery indicator that provides battery charge indication at three
levels. When the battery indicator on the display is empty, the unit will continue to operate for a
short period of time before shutting itself off.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap-1 FieldSOP\4-A-2 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Bios Flow Meter
Revision No. 0
November 2009
Page 3 of 7
5.2 To Charge the DC-Lite:
5.2.1 Connect only the appropriate BIOS 12VDC charges, provided with the DC-Lite flow meter, into
a standard wall outlet. Optionally, one station of the BIOS AirPro 4000D multi-station charger
may be used.
5.2.2 Insert the charger barrel plug into the charging jack located on the right side of the DC-Lite
housing above the inlet and outlet air bosses. A green CHARGE LED will illuminate while the
unit is charging. Full charge takes 8 to 12 hours, and the DryCal can charge while being used.
5.2.3 To view the actual charging status during the charging period, disconnect the battery charger and
wait 3 to 5 minutes. When the indicator is solid black the battery is fully charged.
Note: The unit may be charged for an indefinite time period without causing battery damage.
5.3 Battery Maintenance:
Lead-acid batteries will not exhibit the "memory effect" common to nickel-cadmium batteries. A
lead acid battery may be charged for an indefinite time period without damage.
5.4 Long-Term Storage:
Long-term storage without charging can damage the battery pack, therefore, if the DC-Lite
cannot be left charging continuously, it should be charged at least every 3 months.
5.5 Leak-Test Check Procedure (DC-Lite/NEXUS)
The DC-Lite has a built-in quality assurance self-test feature to verify proper integrity and
operation of the DC-Lite flow cell (see the DC-Lite manual). When the NEXUS is introduced
into the flow stream, the NEXUS represents additional opportunities for leakage. We recommend
that the NEXUS flow path be included in the leak test process.
The leak test for the DC-Lite and NEXUS combination is very similar to the leak test defined in
the DC-Lite manual with only a small modification. Connect tubing from the NEXUS to either
the inlet or outlet of the DC-Lite and connect the leak test fitting to the remaining NEXUS air
boss. Make sure the electronic cable is disconnected.
To initiate the leak test:
5.5.1 Connect either the DC-Lite inlet or outlet to the NEXUS with tubing and then place the leak test
tubing accessory (short piece of tubing with red cap) over the remaining NEXUS air boss. The
low flow range DC-Lite (DCL500) requires a tubing adapter to connect to the larger NEXUS air
boss.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0Ap -1 FieldSOP\4-A-2 reformattedRSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Bios Flow Meter
Revision No. 0
November 2009
Page 4 of 7
5.5.2 After the tubing connections have been made, from the DC-Lite key pad, press and hold the
button while pressing the button. The DC-Lite display will read:
Leak Test Invert
& Push Read
NOTE: If the DC-Lite is already "ON", press and hold the button while pressing the button on the back of the DC-Lite unit.
5.5.3 Invert the DC-Lite so the piston moves to the top of the cell. While the piston is resting at the top
of the cell press the button and the internal valve will close. Return the DC-Lite to an
upright position and it will time the descent of the piston.
NOTE: The test may take as long as 15-20 minutes. Observe the location of the piston to ensure that it is
at the top of the cell when the test begins.
If the test is completed successfully, the display will read:
Test OK
Push Read
5.5.4 Press the button as directed and the internal valve will open and the piston will fall.
5.5.5 Repeat the test with the leak test tubing accessory connected to air boss not connected to the
NEXUS.
NOTE: If the unit fails the leak-test, the display will read:
Maintenance Reqd
Push Read
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
The BIOS Primary Air Flow Meter is returned to the manufacturer annually for routine cleaning,
maintenance, calibration, and certification (see attached sample factory certificates).
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - iransiiion\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-A-2 refonmtted RSM.docx
MACTEQInc.
-------
Bios Flow Meter
Revision No. 0
November 2009
Page 5 of 7
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
Bios International Corporation. 2002. DryCal® DC-Lite Manual
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4- tmnsition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I FieldSOP\4-A-2 reformattedRSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Bios Flow Meter
Revision No. 0
November 2009
Page 6 of7
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1: Sample Certification
B| O BIOS International Corporation - 10 P;nk Rsh!?-!. nj O^OliySA
: { O r«u,.w: t07 35^v.^00 - F;ix: (973)
I f)/) At r ^
Serial Number l^-' ooSS'7
Date. 7/ / 7/g/
By
Machek Pankow
1of1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOPU-A-2 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Figure 2: Sample Certification
BIOS
BIOS International Corporation ~ 10 fork Place. Dulkv. NJ 0740£.ySA
PJ:oi\c: «i}73) 492-&4Q0 * f;»x: (373) ~www.tjiusint.com *
Bios Flow Meter
Revision No. 0
November 2009
Page 7 of 7
AS SHIPPED FLOW DATA:
Product DCL-MH
Serial No.
Date
1153
7/26/01
Z6k-
/\| c ^605^
£ P A ft o<3<=> 3°"7
Laboratory Environment:
Temperature Ambient: 21.04°C
Pressure Ambient: 749.9 mmHg
Humidity Ambient: 54%
Instrument
Lab Standard
Lab Standard
Deviation
Allowable
Condition
Reading ml/min
Reading ml/min
Unit#
Percentage
Deviation
Shipped
200.7
200
1002
0.35
1.00%
in tolerance
503.6
500.15
1003
0.69
1.00%
in tolerance
2014
2002
1001
0.60
1.00%
in tolerance
5026
5000.5
1001
0.51
1.00%
in tolerance
17040
17015
1001
0.15
1.00%
in tolerance
Notes:
Date:
'Sonia Otero
¦= l/ZU/O-,
Page 2 of 2
9.0 APPENDICES
N/A
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - trausition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-A-2 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
A. PRIMARY STANDARDS
3. EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
1 of 6
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - I Field SOP 4-A-3 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV.A.3. EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
repair, maintenance, and certification of the Eppley Pyranometer to Clean Air Status and Trends
Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the repair, maintenance, and certification of all Eppley Pyranometers
administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Eppley precision Pyranometers administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory are
checked for level, moisture control, translator card adjustment, and cleanliness biweekly. Each
unit is returned to the manufacturer annually for maintenance and certification.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Eppley Model PSP Precision Spectral Pyranometer
Electronically matched Translator Card
Desiccant (mesh grade 48)
Soft, lint-free cloth
Screwdriver
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
Inspect the pyranometer twice a week for being level, silica gel condition, and wipe (DAILY)
clean the hemisphere. (See Figure 1 for characteristics of the Eppley Model PSP.)
NOTE: Record all maintenance in the logbook in the solar radiation trailer.
5.1 Leveling the pyranometer
A circular spirit level is located on the base ring of the pyranometer and can be viewed through
the hole in the radiation shield. Adjust the three leveling screws on the base ring of the
pyranometer to center the level's bubble in the bull's eye ring.
5.2 Changing the silica gel
The desiccator is installed in the side case of the pyranometer and should be replaced whenever
the silica gel drying agent is pinkish in color. To remove desiccator, unscrew the silver ring using
a small pair of pliers. Separate the small black vial from silver ring and replace the silica gel with
fresh product. Re-assemble in reverse order.
5.3 Lens Cleaning
With a clean, dry lint-free soft cloth, very gently clean the glass hemisphere of the pyranometer.
P: ECM PCASTNET 4 - tiansition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-3 reformatted RSM.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
Eppley Precision Pyranometer is returned annually to the manufacturer for routine maintenance,
calibration, and certification. Upon receipt following annual certification the correct sensitivity
constant must be entered into the solar radiation calibration data-logger. (Figure 2 is a sample
annual calibration certification from the manufacturer).
7.0 REFERENCES
The Eppley Laboratory, Inc., Model PSP Radiometer Sensor Manual.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
P:',ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-3 reformatted RSM.docN
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1 Eppley Model PSP Characteristics
EPPLEY PRECISION PYRANOMETER
Model PSP
INSTRUMENT CHARACTERISTICS
Sensitivity
Impedance
Receiver
Temperature dependance
Linearity
Response time
Cosine
Orientation
Mechanical vibration
Calibration
Readout
9 microvolts per watt meter-2 approx.
650 ohms approx.
circular 1 cm~2, coated with Parsons' black
optical lacquer
+ 1 per cent over ambient temperature
range -20 to +40°C (temperature compensation
of sensitivity can be supplied over other
ranges at additional charge
+0.5 per cent from 0 to 2800 watts m~^
1 second (i/e signal)
+ 1 per cent from normalization 0-70°
zenith angle
+ 3 per cent 70-80° zenith angle
no effect on instrument performance
tested up to 20g's without damage
integrating hemisphere (approx. 700 watts/meter
ambient temperature +25°C): calibration
reference Eppley primary standards
reproducing the World Radiation Reference
Fig. 1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionQAPP 6.0 Ap - I Field SOP 4-A-3 reformatted RSM.doc*
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
Figure 2. Sample Calibration Certification
THE EPPLEY LABORATORY, INC.
12 Sheffield Ave.. P.O. Box 419, Newport, jRI* 02840 USA
Telephone: 401-847-1020 Fax: 401-647-1031
Scientific Instruments
• tot Precision Measwemenis
STANDARDIZATION
OF
EPPLEY PRECISION SPECTRAL PYRANOMETER
Model PSP
Serial Number: 26385F3
Resistance: 613 Q at 23 °C
Temperature Compensation Range: "*20 to 40 <>c
This radiometer has been compared with Standard Precision Spectral
Pyxanometer, Serial Number 21231F3 in Bppley's Integrating
Hemisphere under radiation intensities of approximately 700 watts
meter"2 (roughly one-half a solar constant). The adopted calibration
temperature is 25 °c.
As a result of a series of comparisons, it has been found to have a
sensitivity of:
7.84 x 10"6 volts/watts meter*2
5.47 millivolts/cal cm"2 min"1
The calculation of this constant is based on the fact that the
relationship between radiation intensity and emf is rectilinear to
intensities of 1400 watts meter*2. This radiometer is linear to
within ± 0.5% up to this intensity.
The calibration of this instrument is traceable to standard self-
calibrating cavity pyrheliometers in terms of - the Systems
Internationale des Unites (SI units), which participated in the
Eighth International Pyrheliometric Comparisons (IPC VIII) at Davos,
Switzerland in October 1995.
Useful conversion facts: 1 cal cm"1 min"1 = 697.3 watts meter"2
1 BTU/f fc'-hr*1 3.153 watts meter"2
Shipped to:
Environmental Science
Newberry, FL
S.O, Number: 57564
Date: July 7, 1999
Remarks:
Date of Test: June 30, 1999
In Charge of TestJ>-~
Reviewed by:-——Jf /\ a/* /
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition .QAPP 6.0'\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-3 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
EPPLEY PYRANOMETER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
9.0 APPENDICES
N/A
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ] Field SOP\4-A-3 reformatted RSM.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
: 1 of 10
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
A PRIMARY STANDARDS
4. THERMOMETERS TRACEABLE TO THE NATIONAL
INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0Ap - 1 Field SOP.4-A-4 refonrialted JLN.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 10
IV. A. 4. THERMOMETERS TRACEABLE TO THE NATIONAL
INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance to
Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory
technicians in the maintenance and handling of liquid in glass thermometers with certification
traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of NIST traceable thermometers
administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
See Sections 5.0 and 6.0.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Liquid in glass thermometer(s) certified for the appropriate temperature range(s).
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
Before each use, inspect the column to ensure that there is no mercury separation. If separation
is observed, eliminate it prior to use by shaking, heating, or cooling the thermometer.
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
NIST thermometers are returned to the manufacturer annually for calibration and certification.
All primary standard thermometers are certified as traceable to the NIST. Separate
thermometers are certified for each of 6 different temperature ranges. (See Figures 1-6 for
sample certifications.)
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77~027a.
P:\EC.\4\P\CASTXET 4 - lransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap- I Field SOP\4-A-4 reformatted_JLS.doc.x
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 10
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\OAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-A-4 reformaited_.lLS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 10
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1: Sample Certificate
iratrldgn Wjertttmtwier Cdmttpattg ^nc,
FAJRMENGDAiJS, N.Y. 11735
Jfacterg ©eritftcate
1Eujirii> ^3li ^§>1a»t tDIfrrmcmdrr
Marked; 91 5S1 /
-1 to 1°C in 0.01° Divisions
Imtncnion: 4''
Catalog Number 22291-D4"FC
Tctojfw. qst Environmental P.O. #95086-310
Tempera l tire
Thermometer Reasing
^ s
Q°C
-0.001
. V i
+0..001
*t*:- .. . 'i V
*Q. V ' •
* * - ; ,> •>, - ;
REFERENCE NIST TEST ,NQ. 259980-98 '
Ho* tiiarajooeter tea boas listed by oocajwraoo wBh *»ndxi& certified by the Nittoc*! Imtkaseo!
SutKtwxU A Tedawtogy (femnertf HBS^Vnjt tpp&aitfe ncetmugr loierauKe sod ffcrtoroilTecfiaitatt*:
rrfcr to NJSJ5. Monograph ISO. If &e cocroctjao b * Uk true faBpesjwre It hifher fl»*a tS»elS»»i"
AKMKtejwidiac if the cocmsSoa fa - *&e
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 10
Figure 2: Sample Certificate
Wlyzvmmmtex (QamptxiTQ jMttc.
FARMINQDA1JS, N.Y. H735
Jfactorg (fljcrfiftcaie
JGitfuiS ®ta»# tEfjtrmcmricr
Marked: 91591/
R«ige -1 to 11 °C in 0.01° Divisions
ImnKnion: 4;
C«taiog Number, 22626-D4-FC * - " V
Total For. QST Environmental . P.O. #95086-310
Tempcrauurt
Thermometer RoxJing
Osr*«2*on
...
- s°c '¦
4,985
-fO.OIS
-
> v,;" _
REFERENCE NEST TEST SK>. 254868 •
Tb4$ Wjth Sbti0d*3P!&ll CCftiScd fjjf ffofr J^lrfSoUStl IfHtittTtf <11
Sc*M»rd» & TttSmtoa tteswrtr NBS). UK* wxxwz tetewwe *o4 Udtim to we
refer <0 NJ3.S, Moooircpb 150. If fteeofltteSoB b » fee trw toapentfurc ii bl«bCT tJtJia tbc tbcr-
tnoo»e!ef.it»(fioK i£tb^eomx&m b-ike tnjetto^eauaa i» tower thus tbetiimnot&eKx AB
KatpcrKora *re buoi oo the ITSj90. Htbckx point b tacfoiod, *¦ tatetcqoqa ducte fa to tavSat wEB
change *B «xbor tcuEaet tyr fl« t*me mcagant, CSffibuSoo per ^BBWST3>-455SIA»
; jSroafclgtt HHfermmnrfifr {famparog ,3tut.
_ -'"per
January 28, 1999
.j P. R«
P:\ECM\P\CASTXET4- transiiion\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-A-4 reformattedJLN.docx
MACTEC,
-------
N1ST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 10
Figure 3: Sample Certificate
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - trammon\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-A-4 reformattedJLWdoc.x
MACTEC,
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 10
Figure 4: Sample Certificate
Jiroflklgn ^fjcrmottieter (pfrtc,
FA3MINCDALE, N.Y. U735
Jfacicrqi (tteriifioiie
Etquib 3it <§iass ®ljerm£mtrtfr
Marked' 91552
19 to 3t°C in 0.01° Divisions
Imraerttore 4H
Cataiog Number; 22630-D4-FC ,
Tested For QST Environmental P.O. #95086-310 ' ,
TempcnMurc
Thermometer Reading
Correction
20°C
19,990
+0,010
30°C
30.009
-0.009
¦ . •' ', V'*"'
REFERENCE NIST TEST NO. 213426
THi liiaracimcter h« beeo teaod by comp»risoo with eutdxrds certified by the NukxnJ Iacita^: of
Scaodirdi A TesfcoaJoaof (forawriy NBS), Wot njqiCatbfe «ccm*ejF toteraace «ad f»etoci tfledict in we
refer to HJB.S. Mooogrtpit 139. If tfae ewrectaoo b the true temperature it tigber (tea tbe Iba-
iwxaeto,K»
-------
N1ST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 8 of 10
Figure 5: Sample Certificate
P:\ECM\P\CASTXET4- tmn$ition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-A-4 reformattedJLN.docx
MACTEC,
-------
NIST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 9 of 10
Figure 6: Sample Certificate
P:\EC.\f\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-A-4 reformattedJLN.doc.x
MACTEC,
-------
N1ST THERMOMETERS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page i 0 of 10
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTXET 4 - iransitio/AQAPP 6.0\Ap -1 FieldSOPX4-A-4 reformatted_JLN.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 8
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
A. PRIMARY STANDARDS
5. VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
U/l/i-oof
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0VAp - 1 Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 8
IV. A. 5. VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the Vaportron H-100L Precision Relative Humidity Lab to Clean
Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Vaportron H-100L Precision Relative
Humidity Lab units administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
The Vaportron's internal water reservoir is emptied and refilled routinely every 1 to 6 weeks
and is returned to the manufacturer annually for routine maintenance and certification.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Vaportron Model H-100L Precision Relative Humidity Lab
Distilled water
Desiccant - spherical indicating silica gel, mesh grade 48
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
5.1 Water Reservoir Check and Water Service Procedure
The Vaportron internal vapor saturator/water reservoir is designed for long service between re-
fills. Depending on the amount of use, the normal refill of water should last from 4 to 6 weeks
to only 1 week for continuous use or heavy cycling from high to low relative humidity (RH)
levels.
To check the water level, remove the desiccant cartridge and look into the large window near
the left desiccant hanger hook. (See Figure 1.) Use the small inspection lamp as supplied in the
service kit. If necessary, tilt the Vaportron chassis fore/aft or left/right about 20 degrees. This
can help to visually locate the water level.
The water level must be between the lower and upper red lines on the fill level decal. NEVER
ADD MORE THAN 30 CC OF WATER. Use distilled water, if available. Use clean tap
water (or bottled water) if distilled water is not available. The blunt-needled syringe from the
service kit should be used for easiest fill. Always reinstall the small red cap after adding water.
5.2 Desiccant/Drier Cartridge Service
The plastic desiccator tube holds enough material to run the Vaportron typically for 1 month
(see Figure 2). The drier material gradually turns from dark blue when dry to pink or
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC; Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-IOOL PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 8
grey-white when depleted. Normally, a sharp contrast is seen when using granular calcium
sulfate material between the depleted and fresh section (depletion is from left to right from back
view).
For Vaportrons with an external sample loop option (-X), the desiccator tube is normally filled
with spherical indicating silica gel. The silica dries the air by a mechanical method as opposed
to chemical and is less "dusty". This allows longer use of chilled mirrors before mirror
contamination occurs. The factory advises changing the desiccant at 1 inch to left of the red line
when using the silica gel-filled drier cartridges.
6.0 PROCEDURE
The Vaportron H-100L Precision Humidity is returned to the manufacturer annually for routine
maintenance, cleaning, calibration, and certification.
7.0 REFERENCES
Digilog Instruments. 1997. Vaportron H-100L Precision Relative Humidity Lab Provisory Users Guide
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'vAp - 1 Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 8
Figure 1: Water Gauge Window
Gauge Decai. Detail
Water Gauge Window Location
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 8
Figure 2: Vaportron front and rear panels
VAPORTRON H-10QBL PROMT PANEL
REAR PANEL WITH PESICCANT CARTRIDGE CORRECTLY INSTALLED
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx MA CTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 8
Figure 3: Sample Factory Calibration Certification
DIG!LOG INSTRUMENTS
(9/0) 667-6797 PHONE
7617 JOtL PLACE I.OVELAND. CO80537 USA {970} 667-8559 FAX
DIGILOG INSTRUMENTS A.S.T.M / N.I.S.T. CALIBRATION DATA DOCUMENT
Date. Customer {^SP / Qa/(T" £<£),
Instrument Type KJai5 f3L- - <=77/7- -
Special Comments on test STO fr/nctot<-^/ CAj j-»" c^-zfc.
As Found Test Data; /3 c. ~
*************************************************************** *******
A.S.T.M Test Point Values Listed Below (%RH) all points at 25.0 deg C
11.4% 32.8% 48.2% 57.7% 75.3% 84.2% 97.1%
fi.C yg-r SV'O 7^.S ?V-r 9(„„ -* S~. Vy
5o.o 12.9 c 12L? /3.7s~
75.0 19.3 C -?•*{. <2 LLl2S~
* ************ * * * ** ** * * ******
Tests Performed By (Calibration Technician}:
"V XMf3 0y ~>.<£_ /) 7 0-H-o '<-¦
Qy s\ 57 ^
/ rJ // / yi .. f * -r tVI Of * X '*-•
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0lAp - I Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON I1-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 8
Figure 4: Vaportron Traceability
DIG! LOG
NSTRUMENTS
HP
761/IOC i PL AC I
LOVf.l AND. CO 80i>3'/ USA
(9/0! <>191 1*1 iiONI
tyyot 66? «5f/> i ax
PRODUCT TRACEABILITY
OOO O/SsJ OSS A
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
VAPORTRON H-100L PRECISION RELATIVE HUMIDITY LAB
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 8 of 8
9.0 APPENDIX A
9.1 The Factory ASTM Calibration Reference System
Each Vaportron reference sensor is calibrated against the Laboratory ASTM multiple point
saturated salt chambers. The salt chambers are operated in accordance with Salt/Hydrate
literature in ASTM 1991, E 104-85. The values of Greenspan, L., 1977 #81A [National Bureau
of Standards (NBS)/National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST), Journal of
Research] are used.
The following salt/hydrate types are used:
Salt Type RH Value at 25°C STD Deviation at 25°C
Lithium-Chloride
11.4
0.27
Magnesium-Chloride
32.7
0.16
Potassium-Nitrate
48.2
0.21 (est)
Sodium-Bromide
57.6
0.40
Sodium-Chloride
75.3
0.12
Potassium-Chloride
84.3
0.26
Potassium-Sulfate
97.3
0.45
Note: °C = degrees Celsius.
The performance of the reference sensor supplied in the Vaportron has been recorded at each of
these points, and a certificate of accuracy is shipped with each chamber system. Figure 3 is a
sample factory calibration certification. Figure 4 is a flow diagram representing the Vaportron
traceability, and certification frequency.
To qualify for use in a Vaportron unit, each sensor must have a less than 1% average error when
calibrated over this range and no single point can exceed 1.5% RH.
The sensor is calibrated at a mid-level RH value of 20 to 50% RH using a GEI Model 1500 (or
better) Chilled Mirror Hygrometer. The hygrometer supports an approximate 1 % RH accuracy
in this range. This comparison allows NIST/NBS traceability for the systems.
Other salt/hydrate values are available to extend the comparison coverage in a given area or to
gain more points at the dry end. A "zero" point check is also available at an RH level of 0.4%
RH.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-A-5 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
A. PRIMARY STANDARDS
6. FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Effective Date: -MM
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 9
L \Ut
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
r?r
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 9
IV. A. 6. FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the Fluke Multimeter 8060A to Clean Air Status and Trends
Network (CASTNet) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of all the Fluke Multimeter 8060A units
administered by the CASTNet Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
See Section 5.0 introduction.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Fluke Model 8060A Multimeter
9-Volt (V) battery, if needed
Fluke Model A81 battery Eliminator, if needed
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
5.2 Replace the internal 9-V battery when indicated by the meter.
5.3 Perform the Ratio and Switch Decoding self-test once each calendar quarter. Document and file
the results of the test.
5.4 Battery Installation or Replacement
The 8060A is designed to operate on a single, common, inexpensive 9V battery (NEDA 1604).
When you receive the instrument, the battery will not be installed. Typical operating life is up to
170 hours with an alkaline battery, or 80 hours with a carbon-zinc battery.
When the battery has exhausted about 80% of its useful life, the BT indicator will appear at the
far left of the display. The instrument will continue to operate properly for at least 24 hours with
an alkaline battery after BT first appears on the display. The 8060A also may be operated from
a standard AC power line outlet when used with the optional A81 Battery Eliminator (refer to
Chapter 7 of the Manufacturer's Instruction Manual for a description). Use the following
procedure to install or replace the battery:
WARNING: To avoid electrical shock, turn off the instrument
and remove the test leads and any input signals before replacing
the battery
5.4.1 Set the 8060A power switch to Off.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionVQAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformat ted. docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 9
5.4.2 Remove test leads from external connections and from the 8060A input terminals.
5.4.3 Turn the instrument over and remove screw from battery cover as shown in Figure 1.
5.4.4 Use your thumbs to push off the battery cover as shown in Figure 1.
5.4.5 Slide the battery out of the compartment as shown in Figure 2.
5.4.6 Carefully pull the battery clip free from the battery terminals (if replacing the battery) and
attach the new battery.
5.4.7 Slide the battery and its leads into the compartment, slide the cover into place, and install the
screw.
5.5 Self-Tests
The 8060A offers three self-tests: power-on self-test, ratio self-test, and switch decoding self-
test. The power-on self-test is automatically performed whenever the instrument is turned on. It
is described in Chapters 2 and 4 of the Manufacturer's Instruction Manual. The other two tests
function as follows:
5.5.1 Ratio Self-Test
The ratio self-test is an operating mode of the 8060A in which the reference voltage for the a/d
converter is applied to the a/d converter during both the integrate and the read periods. If the
instrument is functioning properly, the display should read 10000 ±10 counts (the decimal point
location depends on the range, and does not affect the number of counts).
To select the ratio self-test, select a voltage or current function. Hold down the-»<—)))))button
while you turn on the instrument. After the power-on self-test has been completed (the display
is .8.8.8.8), release the ->•<—))))) button. The instrument should now be in the ratio self-test
mode. To cancel the ratio self test, press the-><-))))) button or turn off the instrument.
A proper ratio self-test count indicates that the a/d converter is working properly. If the count
deviates more than 10 counts from 10000, the probable causes are as follows (in order of
probability): a/d converter in U3, leakage around or failure of CI 6, 18, Z3, R8, or the power
supply.
5.5.2 Switch Decoding Self-Test
To select the switch decoding self-test, hold down the REL button while you turn on the
instrument. After the power-on self-test has been completed (the display is .8.8.8.8), release the
REL button. The instrument should now indicate the switch decoding. To cancel the switch
decoding self-test, turn off the instrument.
The switch decoding self-test indicates how the software in the microcomputer interprets the
configuration of the eight switches and four push buttons. Each function or range that may be
selected corresponds to a number that appears in one of the digit positions on the display (see
the table below). Notice that if no range is selected, the microcomputer assumes the 200 (|iA,
mV, Q) range is selected.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 9
Range
Display Digit 0*
200 (pA, mV, or Q)
0 (default if no range selected)
2
1
20
2
200
3
2000
4
Push Button
Display Digit 1*
none
0
REL
1
-><-))))
2
dB
4
Hz
8
Function
Display Digit 3*
AC voltage
1
DC voltage
2
AC current
3
DC current
4
Resistance
5
Conductance
6
Diode Test
7
Display digits are numbered 0 through 4 from right (LSD)
to left (MSD).
In some cases, it may be helpful to know that the microcomputer scans the switches in order
from SW5 to SW8 (there is no input for switch SW4, the default range). The microcomputer
assumes the first range switch detected as being pushed in is the desired range. For example, if
you press in both the 200V and 1000V switches while in dc voltage, the microcomputer
assumes you want the 200V range. There are two exceptions: diode test and conductance. If the
microcomputer detects that the 2 kQ switch is selected, it checks for the 20 kQ switch
(indicating diode test selection). If the microcomputer detects the 200 kQ switch is selected, it
checks for the MQ switch (indicating conductance selection).
Also during the switch decoding self-test, the continuity indicator (the long bar across the top of
the display) indicates the state of the continuity/frequency comparator. When the voltage at U3-
4 (CM-) is less than at U3-3 (CM+), the continuity indicator is off. You can use this feature to
check the comparator when troubleshooting the continuity or the frequency functions. R9
controls the setting of the comparator offset.
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
All Fluke Multimeters are returned to the manufacturer annually for calibration and
certification.
See Figure 3 sample certificate of calibration
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 refonnatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 9
7.0 REFERENCES
Fluke Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\FieId SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 9
Figure 1: Removal of Battery Compartment Cover
Use thumbs to push
battery cover down
and then out from
instrument case.
Backside of
B060A
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 9
Figure 2: Battery Removal and Fuses
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 8 of 9
Figure 3: Certificate of Calibration
I ISO 9001)
TO
CalNet,
Certificate of Calibration
Dallas Support Center
2104 Hutton Drive, Ste. 112
Carrollton, TX 75006-6807 USA
Phone: (972) 406 1000
Fax :(972) 406 1072
FLUKE.
Manufacturer: FLUKE
Model: 8060A
Description: TRUE RMS MULTIMETER
Asset Number: 4170710
Seria! Number: 4170710
NDdm#
The Fluke Corporation, ISO Certification No. U0018, certifies that the instrument identified above was calibrated in
accordance with applicable Fluke calibration procedures. Its calibration processes are ISO-9001 controlled and are designed
to certify that the instrument was within its published specifications at the time of calibration.
The measurement standards and instruments used during the calibration of this instrument are traceable to the United
States National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), natural physical constants, consensus standards, or by ratio
type measurements.
[CALIBRATION INFORMATION —
Cal Date: 15-Jan-2001 Temperature: 22'C Calibration Report Number 588707-4l70710
Next Cal Due: 15-Jan-200Z Humidity 33 % Technician# 88341
Technician: Torn Rudy
Remarks:
Calibration Procedure: FLUKE 8060A: (1 YEAR) CAL VER (BELOW SIN 6820XXX) Revision: 1.3
[STANDARDS USED FOR CALIBRATION y
Asset Manufacturer
Model Description
Cal Date
Due Date
L102 FLUKE
5700A SERIES 2 CALIBRATOR
09-Nov-2000
09-Nov-2001
End of Report
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
FLUKE MULTIMETER 8060A
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 9 of 9
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 7
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
A. PRIMARY STANDARDS
7. RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT
SOLUTIONS
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
h/>/^ 1
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Certification Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
cl
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\FieId SOP to be updated\4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 7
IV. A. 7. RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT
SOLUTIONS
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for the
preparation, maintenance, and handling of the Relative Humidity Saturated Aqueous Salt
Solutions to Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNet) Field Certification Laboratory
personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the preparation, maintenance, and handling of all Relative Humidity
Saturated Aqueous Salt Solutions prepared and administeredby CASTNet Field Equipment
Certification Laboratory personnel.
3.0 SUMMARY
The saturated aqueous salt solutions are prepared as needed according to the American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard number 104-85 (See Figure 1). The solutions are
maintained as per the ASTM Standard and verified with a calibration hygrometer at least every 6
months.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
ASTM Standard 104 or this SOP
Calibrated hygrometer
Nalgene ® Screw-capped bottles
Deionized water
Reagent Grade Salts:
Magnesium Chloride
Magnesium Nitrate
Sodium Chloride
Potassium Nitrate
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
Stir the aqueous salt solutions before each use.
Maintain the proper water level, by adding deionized (DI) water.
Check the salt solution immediately following preparation and stabilization and every 6 months
thereafter with a calibrated hygrometer.
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
This is an ASTM standard (El 04-85); if the verification of the aqueous salt solution using a
calibrated hygrometer fails, the solution is remade. Figure 1 is a copy of the applicable ASTM
standard.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 7
7.0 REFERENCES
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1985. ASTMBookof Standards, Vol. 11.03 E
104-85.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. 1, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitionVQAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of7
Figure 1: Standard Practice for Maintaining Constant Relative Humidity by Means of Aqueous Solutions
(Page 1 of 3)
Designation: E 104 - 85
Standard Practice for
Maintaining Constant Relative Humidity by Means of Aqueous
Solutions1
This standard is issued under the fixed designation E 104; the number immediately following the designation indicates the year of
original adoption or, in the case of revision, the year of last revision. A number in parentheses indicates the year of last rcapproval. A
superscript cpalon <«) indicates an editorial change since the last revision or reapprovaL
j. Scope
1.1 This practice describes two methods for generating
fonstant relative humidity (rh) environments in relatively
small containers.
1.2 This practice is applicable for obtaining constant
idative humidities ranging from dryness to near saturation
at temperatures spanning from 0 to 50°C.
1.3 This practice is applicable for closed systems such as
environmental conditioning containers and for the calibra-
tion of hygrometers.
1.4 This practice is not recommended for the generation
of continuous (flowing) streams of constant humidity unless
precautionary criteria are followed to ensure source stability.
{See Section 9.)
1.5 Caution—Both saturated salt solutions and sulfuric
sad-water solutions are extremely corrosive, and care should
be taken in their preparation and handling.
1.6 This standard may involve hazardous materials, oper-
ations, and equipment. This standard does not purport to
address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is
the responsibility of whoever uses this standard to consult and
establish appropriate safety and health practices and deter-
mine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to use.
[For more specific safety precautionary information see 1.5
and 10.1.)
2. Referenced Documents
2.1 ASTM Standards:
D1193 Specification for Reagent Water2
D4023 Definitions of Terms Relating to Humidity
Measurements3
E 126 Test Method for Inspection and Verification of
Hydrometers4
2.2 Other Document:
DIN50008 "Konstantklimate uber waBerigen Losungen"
(Constant Climates Over Aqueous Solutions).
Part 1: Saturated Salt and Glycerol Solutions.
Part 2: Sulfuric Acid Solutions. (1981)5
1 This practice is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Committee D-22 on
kmpling and Analysis of Atmospheres and is-the direct responsibility of
Subcommittee D22.1J on Meteorology.
Current edition approved Feb. 22. i985. Published June 1985.
1 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 11.0i.
3 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 11.03.
j * Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol 14.03.
I 'Published by Deutsche: lastitut (Br Normung, 4-10 Burggrzfeastrasse
| f<»Uach 1107, D-1000 Berlin. Federal Republic of Germany. Also available from
j ^'S! Publication Office, New Yotk, NY.
3. Definitions
3.1 non-hygroscopic material—material which neither ab-
sorbs nor retains water vapor.
. 3:r>5F^eiffie__n5t^^
refer to Definitions D 4023.
4. Summary of Practice
4,1 Standard value relative humidity environments are
generated using selected aqueous saturated salt solutions or
various strength sulfuric acid-water systems.
5. Significance and Use
5.1 Standard value relative humidity environments are
important for conditioning materials in shelf-life studies or
in the testing of mechanical properties such as dimensional
stability and strength. Relative humidity is also an important
operating variable for the calibration of many species of
measuring instruments.
6. Intekferences
6.1 Temperature regulation of any solution-head space
environment to ±0.1°C is essential for realizing generated
relative humidity values within ±0.5 % (expected).
6.2 Sulfuric Acid—'Water systems are strongly hygro-
scopic and can substantially change value by absorption and
desorption if stored in an open container. Only freshly
prepared solutions, or solutions which values have been
independently tested for strength should be used.
6.3 Some aqueous saturated salt solutions change compo-
sition following preparation by hydrolysis or by reaction with
environmental components (for example, carbon dioxide
absorption by alkaline materials). These solutions should be
freshly prepared on each occasion of use.
7. Apparatus
7.1 Container—The container, including a cover or lid
which can be secured airtight, should be made of corrosion
resistant, non-hygroscopic material such as glass. A metal or
plastic container is acceptable if the solution is retained in a
dish or tray made of appropriate material. Refer also to 9.2
for size restrictions.
7.2 Hydrometers—One of more hydrometers may be
used to test sulfuric acid solution densities for the range of
humidities concerned. The hydrometers) should have a
minimum scale division of 0.001 gm/cm3. (Refer to Test
Method E 126.)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\FieId SOP to be updated\4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 7
Figure 1: Standard Practice for Maintaining Constant Relative Humidity by Means of Aqueous Solutions
(Page 2 of 3)
E 104
8. Reagents and Materials
8.1 Purity ofReagents—Reagent grade chemicals shall be
used for preparation of aU standard solutions. Unless other-
wise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the
specifications of the Committee on Analytical Reagents of
the American Chemical Society where such specifications arc
available.6 Other grades may be used, provided it is first
ascertained that the reagent is of sufficiently high purity to
permit its rise without lessening the accuracy of the determi-
nation.
8.1.1 Saturated salt solutions may be prepared using
cither amorphous or hydxatcd reagents (that is, reagents
containing water of crystallization). Hydratcd reagents fxc
often preferred to amorphous forms for their solvating
characteristics. •
8.2 Purity of WatersReagent water produced by distilla-
tion, or by ion exchange, or reverse osmosis followed by
distillation foatt be used. See Specification D 1193.
9. Technical Precautions
9.1 Although a container capable of airtight closure is
described in Section 7, it may fee desirable to have a vent
under certain conditions of test or with some kinds of
containers (changes in pressure may produce undesirable
yp»-Vc in some types of containers). The vent' should be as
ymati as practical to minimize loss of desired equilibrium
conditions when in use.
9.2 The container should be small to minimize the
influence of any temperature variations acting upon the
container and contents. A maximum proportion of 25 cm
volume/cm2 of solution surface area is suggested, and overall
CCTfainwr faeadspace volume should be ao larger than
necessary to confine a stored item.
93 Measurement accuracy is strongly dependent on the
ability to achieve and maintain temperature stability during
aftmt use of any solution system. Temperature instability of
±(U*C can cause corresponding instabilities in generated
values of relative humidity of ±0.5 %.
9.4 The compatibility of any constant relative humidity
system used for instrument calibration testing should be
confirmed by reference to the instrument manufacturer's
instructions. " .
9.5 Important considerations leading to stability should
include (but sic not necessarily limited to) the following;
9Jj.i EKminatiooijfiwfese Pafe , •
9JS.2 Elimination of heat sources or heat sinks, or both,
for temperature stability.
93.3 limiting flow rate to preclude source carry-over.
10. Preparations of Aqueous Solutions
10.1 Cautioa—Saturated salt-water systems and sulfuric
acid solutions should be regarded as hazardous materials.
Refer to 1.6 for guidelines.
10.2 Saturated Salt- Water Systems:
102.1 Select a salt of characteristic value from Annex A1.
Note —The reference document by Qrccaspitx7 eoBtsins informa-
tion oa many other saturated salt solutions wWeh may be used. These
• additional systems, however, are less accurate!/ or Jess completely
defined io value. Also, some may only be used when fresMy prepared (to
limit the influence of c&emical instability such as hydrolysis or add gas
sbsoipiioa). Use salts listed In Axmcx. Al can be used fora year or more.
j 0.22 Pkce a quantity of the selected salt in the bottom
of a container or an insert tray to a depth of about 4 cm for
low rfa salts, or to a depth of about 1.5 cm for high rfa salts.
10X3 Add water in about 2-mL increments* stirring well
after each addition, until the salt can absorb ao more water
as evidenced by 'fee liquid.- Although a saturated solution
system is defined when any excess quantity of undissolved
solute is present, it is preferred to keep-the excess liquid
present to a minimum ,for ease jnitandling and for.minirtsal
impact on stability should temperature variations occur.
iGJM dose fee container and allow 1 fa for temperature
siabflizatioiiu " . ..
10,?,5 The container may be used as a reservoir from
which quantities of slush can be transferred for use, or the
entire container may be used for conditioning tests.
10.3 Sulfmc Acid-Water Solutions:
10.31 Determine the add concentration corresponding to
latiog as necessary. , .
103.2 Measure sufficient working quantities of sulfune
add reagent and reagent water so thai, when mixed in proper
proportion, a sufficient depth of liquid is available for proper
floatation of a test hydrometer. (See Section 9.)
10,3 3 Measure solution density after the sulfuric acid-
water solution has cooled following mixing. Refer to Annex
A2 for desired values. . ..
103,4 Store the prepared mixture in a container with a
tight-fitting lid. Oicdk solution density before each occasion
ofuse,
11. Precision and Bias
I LI Under ideal conditions, the bias (accuracy) of the
sources generated by this practice-aie equai to the uncer-
tainty figures associated with each source value, as stated
the Annex tables. In actual use, lack of temperature sqia®-
rium (±0.5*Q and other functional losses can reduce the bias
statement to ±2,5 %. Precision is ±0.5 % rb.
~ »Re«eat Amerioa Cfcetoieal Scatty Spcdficitioas," Affl-Cbem-
icriS^ W*jttagtan,IXXI^«u©eitjoasoolbeK
Ac Aiaet><*a OwtaieM Society, tee -Reagent Chemieafc aad
Jcacpb Rosin. 0. V*» Ncetraod Co., Ice, New York. NY, mi tie United Sutes
ftauutoopci*.* . ____
'On*****, U 'Humidity Fi*d Mut Birury
Vol SiA, 197?, pp.
P:\HCM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updatedv4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 7
Figure 1: Standard Practice for Maintaining Constant Relative Humidity by Means of Aqueous Solutions
(Page 3 of 3)
# E 104
ANNEXES
(Mandatory Information)
Al.l EQUILIBRIUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY VALUES FOR SELECTED SATURATED
AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
fcmpera-
u»(*Q
. Lithium
Chloride*
UCt, %
Potassium
Acetate''
CHjCook
Magnesium
Chloride*
MgOj-
GHjO.X
Potassium
CartMoata'*
K^COj.X
Magnesium
Nitrate*
MgCNOJj-
6ffcO,S
Sodium
CWortde*
MaCtX
• Potassium
CHoride*
KCJ.X
Bsrivn
Chloride®
Bad,-
HjO.X
Potassium
ffitrata*
KN03.X
Potassium
Stifate*
KjSO«.X
~~ 0
to
15
20
m±om
114.1C.5
114 ± 0.4
114 ±0.4
114 ±04
23.4 ± 0.5
23.4 ± 04
23.1 ± 04
33.7 ±04
33.6 ±04
33* ±02
334±0.2
33.1 ±02
43.1 ± 0.7
43.1 ± 0.5
43.1 ±0.4
43.2 ±04
43.2 ±04
60.4 ± 0.6
53j; ±0.4
. £7.4 ± 0.3
554 ±04
MA ±02
754±04
7S.7±C4-
75J±0 2
TSJS±02
7S4±o.i
88.6 ± OS
—37,7^-04
864 ±0.4
85.9 ± 04
85.1 ±04
-€3*5
93 ± 2
82 ±2
81 ±2
964 ±25
-964 ±2.1
96.0 ±1.4
95.4 ±,1.0
84.6 ± 6.7
984 ±2.1
•984 ±04
88.2 ± 0.8
974 ±0.6
974 ±04
25
114 ±04
224 ±04
324 ±0-2
*32 ±0.4
624 ±0.2
754±ai
84.3 ±0,3
SO ±2
93.6 ±0.6
974 ±04
30
85
40
45
£0
114 ±0.2
114 ±0.2
112 ±02
11.2 ± 0.2
1t.1 ± 0.2
21.6 ±0.5
32^4 ±0.1
. 32.1 ±0.1
31.6 ±0.1
31.1 ± 0.1
80.5 ±0.1
43.2 ±04
S1.4 ± 02
433 ±03
48.4 ± 0.4
46.9 ±0.5
45.4 ±0.6
75.1 ±0.1
745 ± 0.1
74.7 ± 0.1
745 ±0 2
74.4 ± 02
83.6 ±04
• 634±04
82i4±04
81J ±04
81.2 ±04
89±2
88±2
87 ±2
924 ±0.6
904 ±04
834 ±12
87J0 ±14
844±24
974 ±0.4
96.7 ±0.4
96.4 ±0.4
96.1 ±0.4
854 ±04
* See "Humidity Fixed Points of Binary Saturated Aqueous SoiuSofts," by L- Graxtspan. Pufcfcfiod In tho Journal of Research by tf» National institute of Starniarcts end
ftchnotogy, Vol 81A, 1977, 83-96.
•See the German standard, OiN 60008, Constant CSmafes Over Aqueous Sofcitions, (referenced In 22$.
A2. EQUILIBRIUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY VALUES FOR SULFURIC ACED-WATER SOLUTIONS
Note—The values shown In this table are stated with an uncertainty of ±1 % rfa .
Weight* Density, sj/mL at Density, gftri- at Density, fl/tat at EquSMtro Rejatjva Humfc&y in X at fC
HjSO< 20*C5 23*C 25 X s*c 23*C 25*C 60*C
6
10 317
10 307
10 300
98
98
98
98
10
10 661
10 648
10 640
96
96
96
96
15
11 C20
11 005
10 994
92
92
92
93
20
11 394
11 376
11 365
88
88
88
89
25
11 783
11 764
11 760
82
82
82
83
30
12 185
12 164
12 150
74
75
76
77
35
12 599
12 577
12 663
65
66
67
69
40
13 028
13 005
12 991
64
66
67
69
45
13 476
13 452
13 437
43
46
46
49
60
13 E91
13 972
13 911
32
35
35
38
65
14 453
14 428
14 412
23
25
25
28
60
14 983
14 957
14 940
14
16
16
19
65
15 633
15 607
15 490
8
9
9
11
70
16 105
16 077
16 059
4-
4
5
6
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted In connection
wtth any Hem mentioned In this standard, Usees at this standard ate expressly advised that determination of the vaBdtty o( any such
patent rights, arid the risk of Infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard Is sub/ect to revision at any time by the responsible technical coomltteo and must be reviewed every five years and
II not revised, either mapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are tmied either far revision of this standard or lor additional standards
and should be addressed to ASTU Headquarters. Your comments wS receive careful consideration at a meeting of the responsible
technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received a fair hearing you should make your
views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 1916 Pace St, Philadelphia, PA 18103.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RELATIVE HUMIDITY SATURATED AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of7
APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-A-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 11
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
1. CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOXES
Effective Date: H/lA OO ?
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
H. Kemp Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:ECM.P CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-1 reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 11
IV. B. 1. CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOXES
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance, for the
maintenance and handling of the Calibration Equipment and Spare Parts Boxes to Clean Air Status
and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Calibration Equipment and Spare Parts Boxes
units administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
When Calibration and Spare Parts Boxes are returned from the field their inventories are verified and
replenished. All necessary service and repair of equipment is performed prior to restocking.
Inventory lists for both equipment and consumable items are updated and verified. Problems are
reported to the Property Manager and Field Operations Coordinator as appropriate.
Four sets of boxes are maintained complete and ready for CASTNET field use at a given time
(3 active, 1 spare). Calibration boxes are due for return on a 6-week cycle primarily due to the
calibration frequency requirement for the MACTEC transfer standards (every 6-weeks).
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Calibration Box
Calibration Box Inventory Form
Spare Parts Box
Spare Parts Box A or B forms
Spare Parts Box Equipment Inventory List
Status Tags (yellow)
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
N/A
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Calibration Box
Upon receipt of the calibration box from the field, check the Calibration Box Inventory Form to
ensure that all the transfer equipment has returned from the field. Report any missing equipment
to the Property Manager and Field Operations Coordinator.
6.1.1 Complete post-calibration of the transfer equipment that receives in-house certification rather
than annual factory certification; and record the results on the proper forms. If the post-
calibrations are within transfer equipment acceptance criteria, use the post-calibration as a pre-
calibration for the next deployment. Repair any transfer equipment that fails a post-calibration
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transitionQAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP\4-B-l reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 11
and recalibrate. Or, remove the transfer equipment from service and replace it with a properly
working calibrated transfer standard.
6.1.2 After the post- or pre-calibrations of the transfer equipment are completed, repack, restock, and
inventory the box using the Calibration Box Inventory Form (Figure 1).
6.1.3 Give a copy of the new Calibration Box Inventory Form to the Property Manager for review.
After review, the Property Manager updates the equipment inventory list on the property
database.
6.1.4 After the Property Manager finalizes the Calibration Box Inventory Form, secure the calibration
box and tag with a green tag showing that it is field ready.
6.2 Spare Parts Box
6.2.1 Upon receipt of the spare parts box(es) from the field, use Spare Parts Box A or B forms
(Figure 2), to perform a checkout of the Spare Parts Box Equipment and equipment calibration
forms. Inspect the condition of all parts (used or unused) and replace as necessary with tested and
tagged parts. EPA numbers sensors are accompanied by complete calibration forms.
6.2.2 Update the Spare Parts Box Equipment Inventory List and equipment calibration forms as
necessary when replacing equipment.
6.2.3 Give a copy of the updated Spare Parts Box Equipment Inventory List to the Property Manager
for review. After review, the Property Manager updates the equipment inventory list on the
property database.
6.2.4 After the Property Manager finalizes the equipment property list, lock the spare parts box and tag
with a green tag showing that it is field ready.
6.3 Consumable Items
The consumable material log is updated based on the First In, First Out (FIFO) principle. As
such, this log is not necessarily updated each time a calibration or spare parts box is processed. It
is rather, updated as items are "consumed" from the storage area per FIFO.
7.0 REFERENCES
MACTEC, Inc. 2008 Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Quality Assurance Project Plan
(QAPP) Revision 4.1, Appendix 9 Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
Research Triangle Park, NC, Contract No. 68-D-98-112. Gainesville, FL.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
P:\ECIvrPtCASTNET4-tiansition QAPP6.0 Ap- 1 Field SOP 4-B-I reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 11
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
8.0 FIGURES
P: ECM\P .CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-B-l reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 11
Figure 1: Calibration Box Inventory Form (Page 1 of 2)
Cal Box #
Issued To:
Date Out
Inventoried By:
Date:
NDDN/EPA#
AIR#
Issued
Qty
Unit
Description
Tic ii n it*
MMHll
X
1
Each
Fluke Multimeter with Clip-On and Point Leads
X
1
Each
Datel Voltage Calibrator with Banana Leads
X
1
Each
Test Assy for Campbell CR3000
X
1
Each
03 Power Cord, Signal Cable, Etc.
X
1
Each
Disposable Camera with Instructions
*
X
1
Each
Digital Camera with Battery, Memory and A/C Charger/Adapter
X
1
Each
Tripod for Digital Camera with Camera Mount
X
1
Each
Brunton Pocket Transit, Transit Clamp and Ball & Socket Tripod
X
1
Each
RMY Synchronus Drive, High & Low Motors, 1.2 A A/C Adapter
X
1
Each
RMY WD Compass with Tail Bracket and Large Clip
X
1
Each
RMY Vane Torque Gauge
X
1
Each
RMY Propeller Torque Wheel with Screws
X
1
Each
Speed Square for Climatronics Wind Direction
X
1
Each
Rotronics GTL Relative Humidity Transfer
KB
X
1
Each
S-503 Humidity Calibrator
X
1
Each
Desiccant, Dl H20 and Syringe for RH Calibrator
X
1
Each
Li-Cor Solar Radiation Pyranometer
X
1
Each
RMY SRTranslator with Power Supply and Signal Cable
gfrww&hri*
X
1
Each
75' SR Coaxial Cable with Barrel Connector
X
1
Each
Eutechnics RTD Temperature Transfer and Probe
X
2
Each
Thermos with Styrofoam Inserts
X
2
Each
Stir Bars, Straight
X
1
Each
Stir Plate w/Cord
X
1
Each
Coffee Pot with Cord
X
1
Each
Graduated Cylinder, 250mL
X
1
Each
Separatory Filter, 250mL
X
1
Each
Decade Box with Mini-RCA Jack
X
6
Each
9 Volt Battery
X
4
Each
AA Cell Battery
X
1
Each
50' Grounded Extension Cord
X
1
Each
6 Outlet Grounded Power Strip
X
1
Can
LPS Spray
X
1
Can
Contact Restorer
X
1
Can
Ultra Jet Compressed Air
X
2
Can
Freez-lt
X
10
Each
Yellow Pre-Printed Tags
X
1
Bag
8n and 11" Ty-Wraps
X
Rubber Bands, Asst.
X
Plastic Bags, Asst.
X
1
Each
Safety Vest
NOTES:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0'Ap - I Field SOP\4-B-1 reformatted JEM mak.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 11
Figure 1: Calibration Box Inventory Form (Page 2 of 2)
Ozone and Flow
Issued To:
Date:
Ozone Transfer #
EPA#
Cal Date Due
Power Cord
V
8 feet of 1/4-inch Sample Line
a/
Signal Cable (49C or 49i)
V
Balston Filter
V
Exhaust Line
V
1/4 T Nuts, Plugs and Caps
V
Flow Transfer #
Nexus
EPA/Air #
Cal Date Due
Bios 20K
EPA/Air #
Cal Date Due
Bios 40K
EPA/Air#
Cal Date Due
Bios Medium/High
EPA/Air #
Cal Date Due
Power Supply
V
Communication Cable
V
Tubing and Adaptors
V
Inventoried By
30 feet of 1/4-inch Flow Tubing
V
White, Male QC
V
Date
NOTE:
P: ECM P CASTNET 4 - transition'.QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP4-B-] reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 11
Figure 2: Spare Parts Inventory Forms (Page 1 of 5)
CASTNel
Spare Parts A sent to
DATE SENT OUT
DATE RETURNED
MACTEC
Part Number
Description
EPA#
cay
Unit
In
Box
Uscd/Sito
iSignel Connecior for 49C
1 jeacb
~
: Row*'! Cahit;
each
y
201-025
KNF pump kit
1 [sach
/
201-026/201-02GA
<\SF pump kit &. 'Jbphrngms
1-2
each
y
501-001
DC Fining, (female white rmgi
1
y
901-007
Thomas Pump CtephraGm
§ leach
V
501-004
"00 Fitting.
(female fctiikhRiad, fclack)
each
¦/
7O1-034A
Canister ORinfj
8 jsoch
¦/
901-016
"'jmp Rebuild Kit, Thomas
2
¦/
1001-011
2
OOCh
¦/
101-030
^otronics RH Sensor Boshing
r ieiich
¦/
50103$
3;8-incfc Kynar Union
each
¦/
with union
3/3-jnch Kvr-ar Nu!
5
each
¦/
S01-032
3/8X1/4-inch Kvnor Adaptor
2
each
801-022 hZvtfCPwfcr Supply
1 Jeach
V
801-022 !H-:>urm«ter with Cord
1
each
¦/
jNose Cone Assembly {Heavy}
2
sash
801-007
Gofdos Relays (siK-sr or white)
1 ieadi
¦/
1001-003
Prop
1 jaoch
Y
iRMY Wind AO fv'od for Csmpbel.
I teach
¦/
IFukgs (.25. .50. 1. 2, 3. !>. 7, lOOmn
;RH, TE0O49C 5.25)
3
»^f:h
¦/
Fuse *2vdc ps (1, 8A)
2
Gach
¦/
101-ose
Rotorics $S RH Filter
3
each
V
201-024
Vaisafa RH Filter (long snd shsri)
2
each
¦/
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-l reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 8 of 11
Figure 2: Spare Parts Inventory Forms (Page 2 of 5)
CASTNet
MACTEC
Part Number
Description
EPA U
Qty
Unit
in
Box
used/ate
101-037
Rotronics RH O-Rirg
{ 3 loach
] t k-te'jy
y
~
I Assorted Spacte Luos & terminals
iScft of Screws ftx Sensors
i * iset
y
501-O16
501-023
3,'8-iilch SS Nut
| ?
y
3»6-i;!t:I< SS Fonulw
i 5 !each
~
301-02BA |T:pping Bucket Clip
| S {each
y
901-01$ |Bui!s Ei?e Levsi
j ? jsach
y
101-010 |Prop Nut. with end cutoff
i ;
{ 3 a ifttCli
y
101-01S jwind Spasd Bearing (oosecone)
I 2 laach
V
101-026 "Wind Direction Pot
E i jsjisch
y
401-05S IB&C Connector
| 2 leach
y
4-01-058 [Barrel Connector
! 2 Isach
y
101-075 iRotrcnics RH Sield Adapter Clip
! ? i^ar.b
y
101-020 {Wind Direction Boeing
jNuts orxl'Fcrfuics" "Assorted," Motb5
• & Ptastir;
401-032 j#2 Spode Lues
] 2 jaath
! 50 jeach
y
y
y
301-025 Ivaisala Clip
I 2
s*c!'i
y
Bin D16 ;RMY Wetness Ssnsor
aach
y
•4-Cond. Signal Cebls ; j
701-077 1(100 FT sec-ions) • j 200 jfeet
y
jRMYTemp Probe (Campbell Mod)
i laach
1 jsach
2 Saach
y
jRWYTc-mp Probe ^Campbell Mod;
y
Vemp fcxlem?.! Adaptors
y
iRosronic RH Probe
1
1 |®acri__
y
Non= in sloe* - install Vaisala
JVaisala RH probs
y
301-034 .Tqaping Bucket Assy Mechanism
1 jaadi
y
301-015 pipping Bucket Thermostat
1 jsach
y
101-002 IrMY !2 vdc Blower Motor
y
801-063 ^-5 lPm friow Rotameter
| I jsacfc
y
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-1 reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 9 of 11
Figure 2: Spare Parts Inventory Forms (Page 3 of 5)
CASTNet
MACTEC
Part Number
Description
EPA#
Qty
Unit
In
Box
Used/Site
RMY Knlor Rariiaffrn Sftrsnr
iSlllBil
each
s!
RWY Soioi Radiation Translator
ISlili
i
G3Ch
s!
f Jev Contr*)llGf w.'PS- Dfcflsy
1
each
^ f
1001-044
1/4-hcb TefortTubicg
100
tl
^ !
701-021
Filter w/Skltt "ap
1
each
~ j
10C1-043A
3/S-hch T eU'.T! Tubir y
50
t\
~ !
1001-031
PlftS;ic Wirid Vane-
1
each
~ j
NOTES:
Inventoried By: dme
Date:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP.4-B-I reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 10 of 11
Figure 2: Spare Parts Inventory Forms (Page 4 of 5)
CASTNet
SPARE PARTS KIT SENT TO:
OZONE DATE SENT OUT:
DATE. RETURNED:
TECO SPARE PARTS INVENTORY
Packing Location
jMACTEC
parti! j Locate
¦ Description
Qty
Units
Check lie?
SENT
/Check-illst
RStUSMED
Us«d
R1 Box 5 E
201-009
ta:i>p Power Supply (0595;
each
V
R1 Bos 1 C
Soterosri Assembly (conctii-onftil}
aach
R.I Box ? D
201.033
3-Woy Solenoid. Teflon ?A vric
each
~
R1 Box 1 E
2-3 i-02?
Ozono Cooling Km
wwh
~
R1 Box !F
2D 1-021
PC SuarU Larw heater
sach
~
R2 Box 2 A
^cu-ma
Ozonator PS {-A'/M^mory match)
saeh
~
R2 Box 2 B
201-101
Air Sciulibet w! Teflon Tub;?*.} Cc-rtn-sclyf
aach
R2 Box 2 C
2i)i
Pressure Transducer
aaeh
¦/
R2 Box 2 D
20?-020
Duttiulu?
2
3»Lh
R2 Box 2 E Bag 1
201-Uf»SJA
Ozo-ie ;s>mp Gasket
aach
~
R2 Box 2 E Bag 2
fillet -tokhii (nttxitfiijtl ftil.w wrench)
2
yach
~
R2 Boz2E Bag 3
201-055 A
201-056
Ofilue, Silver and Bice/Violei
2
sacft
•/
R2 Box 2 E Bag 4
201
Oriiee O-Firic;
2
each
R2 Box 2 E Bag 5
201-030
Frequency Adjusting Suws
aacli
~
R2 Box 2 E Bag 6
2oi-o:il>
Lalex TuDiocj
4
sach
~
R2 Bos 2 E Bag 7
201-036
Sampk:: Pump Sumpfjr Fcjt.t
yych
~
R2 Box 2 F
201-0515
Photorneh-r lamp. (brown cord)
•?ach
¦/
R2 B*>x 2 <5 -201-O52A -Ozooato la;np, (black curd)
awch
~
R2 Box 2 H
Circuit Boards («9-* to £$-7) (tested «?t)
aach
•/
R3 Box 3 A
901-0208 -UPS BaKery (choigeU)
SAlifc
R3 Box 3B
ASF Sample Pump with Fillings (4D-103)
ooch
¦/
Notes/Comments:
inventoried By:
Date:
Pagi? i of 1
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition'-QAPP 6.0 Ap - i Field SOP 4-B-1 reformatted JEM mak.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS BOX
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 11 of 11
Figure 2: Spare Parts Inventory Forms (Page 5 of 5)
CASTNet
SPARE PARTS KIT B sent™
DATE SENT OUT
DATE RETURNED
Packing
Location
MACTEC
Pen# f Locate
Description
EPA#
Qty
Units j
Check List
SENT
Check tistljj! - |
ReruKNt U5ed[
D : p : -1
R1 Box* A
lWind F-460 Trcnalalcr - calibrated t
each
¦/
R1 Box IB
;Li-CorSolcr Radiation Sensor - calibrated
each
¦s
Solar Radiation Translator - calibrated
each
R1 Box 1C
Rl-f Sensor - calibrated
each
V
RH Translator - calibrated
each
¦/
Tempsrotiiro Translator - csiiorsteci
otacJi
-/
R1 Box1D
Temperature Sensor T l - calibrated !
each
¦s
sTenper^lure Sensor 12 • calibrated :
each
R1 Box IE
; Defender Card (Get from Mike Beadles) ;
each
¦/
R1 Box IF
301-011
BJo'.vor (with wiros- soldotctJ oni :
oacb
¦/
R1 Box 2A
1001-015
Wine Speed Cups :
<5,3Ch
•/
R2 A
Wind Direction Snn&cr- callhrot^d
each
s
H2 8
Wine Speed Sensor - calibrated
4
aaoh
/
R3 Box 1A
301-008
RH Finer •
3
each
V
R3 Bo* IB ;901-019
Bulls Eye Level ;
•.'U5.il
s
R3 Box 1C
301-323
RH Clip |
2
each
~
R3 Box ID
Assorted Screws ond Sot Sc»ows :
Ottt
¦/
R3 Box 1E
301-0M
Sensor Ro-anrgs '
4
each
7
R3 Box 1F
'Wind DsfftClion Sensor Fijsh tpir:o) Graar-
2
eoch
•Wind Direction Sensor Resistor (Blue) •
2
R3 Box 1
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 1 of 9
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
10. PORTABLE HUMIDITY GENERATORS
Effective Date
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
Field Operations Manager
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 FieldSOP\4-B-10FinaI.doc xMACTEC, 1)1C.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 2 of 9
IV. B. 10. RELATIVE HUMIDITY: BUCK RESEARCH INSTRUMENTS
VAPORPAK MODEL H-31, RENSE INSTRUMENTS MODEL S-503
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the preparation, maintenance, and handling of the Buck Research Instruments Vaporpak Model
H-31 and Rense Instruments Model S-503 to Clean Air Status and Trends Network
(CASTNET) Field Certification Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the preparation, maintenance, and handling of all Buck Research
Instruments Vaporpak Model H-31 and all Rense Instruments Model S-503 administered by
CASTNET Field Equipment Certification Laboratory personnel.
3.0 SUMMARY
The portable humidity generators are calibrated and serviced by the manufacturer once per year
and verified with a hygrometer at least every 6 weeks. Typically these portable humidity
generators are not used as a transfer instrument, but are certified as such to provide a redundant
transfer instrument in the event of transfer hygrometer failure.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
• Buck Research Instruments Vaporpak Model H-31 and instrument manual
OR
• Rense Instruments Model SA-503 and User's Manual
• Calibrated hygrometer certified using Primary Standard
• Nalgene Screw-capped bottles
• Deionized (DI) water
• Fresh Drier-Rite desiccant (Vaporpak) or Fresh silica gel desiccant (S-503)
• Rubber stopper and/or Parafilm (to seal access ports)
• RH iForm
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
The proper amounts of DI water and fresh desiccant should be maintained when in operation.
The unit should be packed and transported for use in the field according to the manufacturer's
instrument manual.
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
The instrument should be able to produce stable values between 20 percent and 100 percent
relative humidity (RH).
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition-.QAPP 6.0'Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-10 Final.docxMACTEC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 3 of 9
6.1.1 Buck Research Instruments Vaporpak Model H-31
6.1.2 Note in the "remarks" section of the iForm that the unit is a fall calibration of Buck Research
Instruments Vaporpak Model H-31. Record the ID of the Vaporpak in the site instrument ID
field.
6.1.3 Enter the correction factors for the transfer hygrometer into the iForm.
6.1.4 Inspect the rear of the Vaporpak to verify that the desiccant is blue in color and that the water is at
the proper level.
6.1.5 Add DI water and desiccant as needed.
6.1.6 Set the target RH value to 10%.
6.1.7 Plug the Vaporpak into an outlet and turn the power switch on (leave the control switch off).
6.1.8 Seal the port in the front of the Vaporpak.
6.1.9 Insert your portable certified hygrometer in the top of the Vaporpak as shown in Figure 1.
6.1.10 Push the Control button to the on position and adjust the RH Set control knob to 10%.
6.1.11 Allow both units to fully stabilize.
6.1.12 Record the test data on the RH iForm. Record the Vaporpak display in the DAS column and the
Certified Transfer display in the Transfer column.
6.1.13 Repeat the procedure outlined above for RH values of approximately 30%, 50%, 70%, 85% and
95%. Adjustments should be made from low to high RH values.
6.1.14 Upon completion return the Vaporpak RH set-point to 50% and allow it to stabilize.
6.1.15 Print two copies of the humidity generator calibration. One will remain with the Vaporpak along
with the transfer certification, the other will be filed in the instrument file along with the transfer
certification.
6.2 Rense Instruments Model S-503
6.2.1 Note in the "remarks" section of the iForm that the unit is a full calibration of Rense Instrument
Model S-503. Record the ID of the S-503 in the site instrument ID field.
6.2.2 Enter the correction factors for the transfer Hygrometer into the iForm.
6.2.3 Remove the clear port plugs on the top of the S-503 to verify proper water level and desiccant
condition. Add new desiccant and DI water as necessary.
6.2.4 Seal all open ports on the top panel of the instrument using the provided plugs.
6.2.5 Insert your portable hygrometer in the top of the S-503 as shown in Figure 2. If necessary use a
single layer of ParaFilm to ensure an airtight seal.
6.2.6 Set the target RH value to 10% using the pushbutton potentiometer.
6.2.7 Turn the set switch to RH.
6.2.8 Plug the S-503 into an outlet and turn the power switch on.
6.2.9 Allow both units to fully stabilize. Record the test data on the RH iForm. Record the S-503
display in the DAS column and the Certified Transfer display in the Transfer column.
6.2.10 Repeat the procedure outlined above for RH values of approximately 30%, 50%, 70%>, 85% and
95%. Adjustments should be made from low to high RH values.
6.2.11 Upon completion return the RH set-point to 50% and allow it to stabilize.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOP.4-B-10 TmaliowMACTEC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 4 of 9
6.2.12 Print to copies of the humidity generator calibration. One will remain with the S-503 along with
the transfer certification, the other will be filed in the instrument file along with the transfer
certification.
6.3 Calibration Criteria For All Models
6.3.1 If the unit in question tests within five percent at each point tested it may be used as a backup
transfer in the event the regular transfer fails.
6.3.2 If the unit in question tests within ten percent at each point tested it may be used as a backup
transfer in the event the regular transfer fails, however the unit must receive post calibration upon
return to the lab to validate performance and accuracy.
6.3.3 Otherwise the unit must be returned to the manufacturer for repair.
Figure 3 depicts a completed certification form.
6.4 Three point periodic check.
Between full audits performed at six month intervals a three point check may be performed in lieu
of a full audit to assess the validity of the previous full six point performance audit. This check
must be performed every six weeks at a minimum.
6.4.1 Using the same procedure as for a full six point biannual audit, test the humidity generator at the
following points: 10%, 50% and 95%.
6.4.2 Document the results just as for the full audit and print two copies of the interim check form.
6.4.3 File one copy in the instrument file, and attach one copy to the original certification.
6.5 If the unit is found to not meet specification, return to the manufacturer for repair.
Figure 4 Depicts the interim check form.
7.0 REFERENCES
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1985. ASTMBook of Standards, Vol. 11.03 E
104-85.
Buck Research Instruments, L.L.C. 2005. Vaportron® HI 1BL/H100CL Series Portable Precision
Humidity Lab; Users Guide - December 2005. Boulder, CO. http://www.buck-research.com/2005-
12-14%20vaportron_manual.pdf (accessed October 12, 2006).
Rense Instruments BV. 2008. S-503 series User's Manual ©2008. www.renseinstruments.com
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention
of Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-transilion\QAPP6.0 Ap- I Field SOP\4-B-10 Final.docxAMC^-EC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 5 of 9
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-tvansition\QAPP6.0\Ap- 1 Field SOP\4-B-IO Final.docxAMC7EC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 6 of 9
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 1: Buck Research Instruments Vaporpak Model H-31
P:\ECMP\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP.4-B-IO Fimi.iocxMACTEC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 7 of 9
Figure 2: Rense Instruments s-503 Humidity Calibrator
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition-QAPP 6.0\Ap - ] Field SOP'4-B-10 Final.docxAM CTEC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 8 of 9
Figure 3: RH Humidity Generator Certification iForm
; MACTEC rvc; let live riuuijuuy.
RH Sensor
Humidity Chamber
Transfer Standarc
As Found
. ¦ r
ID#
11,' #
06784
ID#
08567
Description
Manufacturer
VaporPak
Manufacturer
Rotromcs
Manufacturer
Rotronfcs: .
Rotfonies.; .
H-31 • ¦
MR-101-A
Model'
MP-101-A
MM01-A
Bate of Last Cert.
9/30/2009 ' .
Date of Last Cert.
6/17/2009
Translator ID #
Correction I
'actors
Manufacturer
10%
30%
50%
70%
85%
95%
' i
1.02
0.40
0.80
0.53
0;62
0.78;
-
| Site Name |
alihr «itor |
C.iliI'Mlmn J)nlc
| Data Logger
| iForms Vcr.
J MACTEC099 |
RSM |
11/30/2009
| Campbell 3000 ID:439 - Campbell 3000 ID:489
( 1.1.0.0
A*» >' 'jiiud
[Miihi'i
Hujiiidilv OnlTmr
Portable Hygrometer
Correction Factor
Equivalent Rrbtivp Humidity
Datalogger Output
% Relative Humidity | Diff
As 1 I'll
¦clnluu
lluniiriilv Diihliu&tr OtiltJiii
Portable Hvgrometer
Correction Factor
Equivalent Relative Humidity
D.->tMoppcr Output
. • Rh'LitTvc Humidity |
Diff
10.0%
1.0296
11.02%
9.20%
•1.8%
30.0%
0.4%
30.40%
32.10%
1.7%
50.0%
0.8%
50.80%
50.90%
0.1%
70.0%
0.53%
70.53%
: 68.90%
-1.6%
85.0%
0.62%
85.62%
85.60%
0.0%
95.0%
0.78%
95.78%
93.77%
-2.0%
Rem;ukj
Calibration of Portable Humidity Generator VAPORPAK Model H-31 , ID % 06784
Re view d By:
P:\ECM-.P CASTNHT4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- J Field SOP\4-B-IO Final.docxAM CHfC, Inc.
-------
Transfer Standards - Portable Humidity Generators
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 9 of 9
FIGURE 4: RH Translator Humidity Generator - 6-Week Update
/ MACTEC
rwiauve numiuiCy
Site Name
1 'alibi iitoi
< alitmilion Hut l-
1j;iI;i J-oaati
lJ ornis \ ci.;
MACTEC099
RSM
11/30/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:489 - Campbell 3000 ID:489
1.1.0.0
Humidity Chamber
Transfer Standard
As Found
. -I:
ID#
T.T.,i if
06784 ;
ID#
03567
Descriptions
Manufacturer
VaporPak
• Manufacturer
Rotronics
Manufacturer
Rotromcs
Rotronics v./.
Model
. H-31
*' ici
f^P-IOl-A
Muiii'i
fvF-101 -A
MP-101 -A
Date of Last Cert
9/30/2009
;—
Trsnsiator ID#
Correcboni
Manufacturer*.
10%
30%
50%
70%
¦:f"L
Zero
1.02
. 0.40
0:30
0.53
0.62
0 78
V !.
As Found Uchlivc1 IiiTindfl v osscr Piilwul
Portable Hygrometer
Correction F.ictor
Equivalent Retntive Hurmdit/
Dat-ilo^er Output
' Rel.itve Humidity | Diff
Asl til Kdaliic 1 fiiinichtv iJufalutr.ziT Output
Portable Hygrometer
Corrpciion Factor
Equivalent RehtivcHumidity
Datalogger Output
Relative Humidity | Diff
10.0%
1.02% 11.02%
0.2% 50,80%
0.78% 95.73%
920%; -1;836
: 50.0%
. 49.70% -1.136
95.0% '
92.36% -3.4%
Remarks
5IX WE EK Calibration UPDATE of Portable Humidity Generator VAPORPAK Model H-31 , ID ,1 06734
ReviewdBy: Date:
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM P\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0 Ap- I Field SOP.4-B-10 Final.docxM/4 C7EC, Inc.
-------
MANNIX TESTING & MEASUREMENT MODEL EB833 DIGITAL ALTIMETER & BAROMETER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page I of 5
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
B. Transfer Standards
11. Mannix Testing & Measurement Model EB833 Digital Altimeter &
Barometer
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
II/i/loqI
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
MANNIX TESTING & MEASUREMENT MODEL EB833 DIGITAL ALTIMETER & BAROMETER
Revision No. 1
November 2009
Page 2 of 5
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the calibration of the Mannix Testing & Measurement Model EB833 Digital Altimeter &
Barometer.
2.0 SCOPE
The Mannix EB833 is used in the field to facilitate the calibration of continuous gas analyzers.
3.0 SUMMARY
The Mannix Testing & Measurement Model EB833 Digital Altimeter & Barometer can be
easily calibrated using a certified mercury barometer. This is accomplished by reading the
certified mercury barometer standard and adjusting the settings on the digital unit.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Certified Princo Model 453 Barometer
Princo Model 453 Barometer Manual
Princo Model 453 Barometer Certificate
Mannix Testing & Measurement Model EB833 Digital Altimeter & Barometer
Mannix Testing & Measurement Model EB833 Digital Altimeter & Barometer Manual
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
6.0 PROCEDURE
Calibration of this instrument is necessary to ensure the proper calibration of field trace gas
instruments. Refer to the manual and Figures 8.1 and 8.2 of this SOP for operation of the Princo
Barometer. Refer to page 10 of the Mannix Testing & Measurement Model EB833 Digital
Altimeter & Barometer Manual for more information regarding calibration of the digital
instrument.
6.1 Configuring the Princo Barometer
6.1.1 To begin, the mercury in the reservoir at the bottom of the barometer must be touching the small
white cone, making a very small dimple in the mercury. To adjust, slowly turn the dial on the
bottom of the reservoir until the mercury touches the cone. Refer to Figure 8.1.
6.1.2 To read the barometer, adjust the dial on the side of the barometer to move the indicator up and
down. The bottom of the indicator should be just "touching" the top of the meniscus of the
mercury. The side of the barometer has numbers marking the hundreds, tens and ones of the
barometric reading and the numbers on the indicator slide show the tenths of the reading.
Ensure that you are taking the reading at eye level. When the indicator is at the meniscus,
observe where the lines from the side of the barometer match up with those of the indicator
lines.
6.2 Adjusting the Digital Barometer to the Princo
6.2.1 To input the reading found on the Princo standard, make sure the digital barometer is in the
P l'-( ¦Vsj VJT4. . -s'A;!" [ I VtV. •— ; I k V i
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
MANNIX TESTING & MEASUREMENT MODEL EB833 DIGITAL ALTIMETER & BAROMETER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 3 of5
barometric mode by hitting the "BARO" soft key button. Next, hold down the "BARO" and
"TIME" keys together for about 2 seconds. "CAL Po" will display on the screen and the current
pressure reading will flash. Press either the "+" orkeys to adjust the display reading to that
found on the Princo barometer. Press the "BARO" key once again to accept the new reading.
7.0 REFERENCES
8.0 FIGURES
Figure 8.1 - Adjust dial at bottom of barometer so mercury just touches the point of the triangle.
P !- ( 4 • ••• - Aj: - ' \ id:'. ~:Or i l<\.Vj
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
MANNIX TESTING & MEASUREMENT MODEL EB833 DIGITAL ALTIMETER & BAROMETER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 4 of 5
Figure 8.2 - Sample Readings of the Vernier (adapted from Instruction Booklet for use with PRINCO
Fortin type mercurial Barometers).
(the vernier's lower edges should appear to just touch the mercury meniscus)
Scale reading
29.200
In.
29.800
in.
29.800
in.
29.700
in.
755.00
mm
29.800
in.
Vernier increment
.000
in.
.070
in.
.073
in.
.059
in.
.61
mm
.043
in.
Barometer reading
29.200
in.
29.870
in.
29.873
in.
29.759
in.
755.61
mm
29.843
in.
r !'(
!i ] aW SOP ; ;
-------
MANNIX TESTING & MEASUREMENT MODEL EB833 DIGITAL ALTIMETER & BAROMETER
Revision No. I
November 2009
Page 5 of5
9.0 APPENDICES
r \v; I N'l'I'i' A¦ 'v:!; : R\.V1
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
2. DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Effective Date:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Calibration Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\FieId SOP to be updaied\4-B-2 refonmatted.doc
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. B. 2. Datel Voltage Source (350A)
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the maintenance and handling of the Datel Voltage Source (350A) to Clean Air Status and
Trends Network (CASTNet) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Datel Voltage Source (350A) units
administered by the CASTNet Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Each unit is recertified according to the procedure described in Section 6.0 at least every six
months.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
4.1 Fluke Multimeter
4.2 Data Acquisition System (DAS) Calibration Form
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 All repairs are performed by the manufacturer.
5.2 Replace the 9-volt (V) battery when the unit's Low Batt. arrow is lit.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Obtain certified Fluke multimeter traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology
(NIST).
6.2 Connect output of Datel voltage source (+ / -) to the test jacks of the multimeter (+ / -). Maintain
proper polarity.
6.3 Obtain a DAS Calibration form (Figure 1) and record the serial number of the voltage source and
the serial number of the Fluke on the DAS Calibration Form. The Fluke should be recorded as
the Primary DAS.
6.4 With the Fluke set to the range of DCV 2 V, increment the Datel from 0.0000 to 1.0000. The
Datel should be set to the 1.2 V range. Record the results.
6.5 If the Datel is not within ±0.3 millivolts at the set point (Fluke is actual voltage), then adjust the
Datel (Figure 2) and repeat the certification.
6.6 Switch the Datel to 12 V DC range and check the output with the Fluke at 10.000 V and
5.000 V.
6.7 Reverse the polarity switch on the Datel and check the output of the Fluke for a negative
response.
6.8 Record any necessary maintenance or adjustments on form.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-2 reformatted.doc
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
6.9 Attach the completed DAS Calibration Form to the instrument.
6.10 Sign and date the form
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-2 reformatted.doc
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
Figure 1: DAS Calibration Form
^/{ff Environmental Science &
Engineering, Inc.
DATA ACQOSSUION SYSTEM CAUBRATION FORM
Site Name / Number:
Primary DAS / Model:
Backup DAS / Model:
Voltage Source / Model:.
Site Location:.
S/N:
S/N:
S/N: :
Voltage Source Output
(VDC)
Primary OAS Reading
Backup DAS Reading
Unadjusted
(VDC)
Adjusted
(VDC)
Unadjusted
(VDC)
Adjusted
(VDC)
REMARKS:
Backup Battery Voltage -
Qimtfonics Mainframe Power Supply Voltage=+.
Status Switches as Found
Channels Changed
. as Left_
Performed by:
Reviewed by:
Date:
Date:
Calibrated j |
Audited |~3
White Ccov: Site Loo YeSow Copy: QST Pink Copy: VSBPA
*!•>**** von*
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-2 refonrtatted.doc
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
Figure 2: Calibration Procedure — Page from Datel Manual
^ CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
Figure 8
swtrcH 2
MODE SELECT
SWITCH 1
POWER OW5fF
SWITCH 3
GRANGE SELECTION
SWITCH 4
OUTPUT POLARflY
SELECTION
roTCNna.cren
LOCATIONS
SEE NOTE 1
NOTE 1;tHg USS* MOST OMS-i tWSC*S£TO ACCESS TH8 KWBWOMerEBS,
1J REMOVE THE POOR SS8SWS UXSKtm CM W BACK Of 7M6 CASE
s) Isaacs® ms three scaavs located ms®« or ths ease
s> amumtvLmm^s^mxs sjsmily wwwtss to
Acrass
Figure 9
LCD DISPLAY I
SWITCH 4
CASE
OUTPUT
TERMINALS
ANALOG
BOARD
DIGITAL
BOARD
MEMBRANE
SWITCH
CONNECTION
PIN POST
The DVC-3S0A hand-heM voltage calibrator is feigned for field
and laboratory use, therefore, recafsbnition is not frequent!)'
required. However, d«e to norma! component aging and unfore-
seen physical stresses and shock, vibration and temperature,
cydes during fseW and laboratory use. the precision of the instru-
ment ihould be checked every $ months. If the accuracy of die
instrument is not within specification, recalibration is needed.
RECAU8RA7ION EQUIPMENT:
Use my standard digital voltmeter with a resdmion of ±10
mi-crovcfe (uV) and overall known accuracy of 0,001% or better.
Due to Its unique design, the DYC-3S0A reqyires an exceptkmal-
fy short "Svarm up" time of 5 seconds More sertl^g recafibration,
I) ZEROING THE INTERNAL REFERENCE PAC
I.I OVC-350A twitch settings {see %ure 8),
SWITCH I (POW£R):ON SWITCH 2 (MODE):DEC
SWITCH 3 (RANGE):} 2V SWITCH 4 {POLARITY):*
J.2 Press the CIA key to clear die display,
13 Connect a Volt Meter's posithe {+) lead to the DVC-3S0A's
PIN POST terminal (see figure 9). Connect the meters nega-
tive {-) lead to the DVC-SSOA's negative output: terminal.
1.4 Adjust R2 (see figure 9), until the meter reads 0 vote ± 10
raicrovoits.
2)Z£EO»NS THE OUTPUT
2.1 Same switch settings as step 1,1
2.2 Connect the volt meters Positive {+) lead to the DVC-3S0A's
Positive (+) output tenwinai and adjust R!2 imtil the output
reads 0, ±S<3 microvolts.
3) »|2 VOLT OUTPUT FULL-SCALE ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Same switch settings aj step IJ
3.2 Biter ilOOO via the DVC-350A keyboard.
3.3 Adjust R8 until the voltmeter reads +12 volts dc. ±100 micro-
volts {* 11.9999 to +12,0001),
4) 41.2 VOLT OUTPUT FULL-SCALE ADJUSTMENT
4.1 Move the Range SWITCH {3} to the 1.2V dc scale.
4.2 Adjust R9 until the voltmeter reads +1,2000V dc,+ IO micro-
volts..
5) HEX MODE OUTPUT FULL-SCALE ADJUSTMENT
5.1 Move the MODE SWITCH {2) to the"WEX" position.
5.2 Biter FFF via die keyboard.
5.3 Hove As RANGE SWfTCH (3) to the ")0V" position.
5.4 Adjust R4 until die voltmeter reads +9,??7$6 dc. i 100 micro*
vote: (+9.99746V to 9.99766V dc).
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP lo be updated\4-B-2 refonnatted.doc
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - DATEL VOLTAGE SOURCE (350A)
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Fie1d SOP to be updated\4-B-2 reformaited.doc
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 1 of 9
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
3. OZONE ANALYZER
Effective Date: I (/o 1
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: H. Kemp Howell
Project Manager
'Am
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformaued.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 2 of 9
IV. B. 3. THERMO-FISHER MODELS 49C AND 49i ANALYZERS
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the maintenance and handling of the THERMO Ozone (03) Monitors Models 49C and 49i to
Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of THERMO 03 Monitors Models 49C and
49i units administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
CASTNET 03 transfer standards are calibrated, and certified before and after each field
calibration trip, and at a minimum of once every 6 weeks
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
THERMO Model 49C or 49/ 03 Analyzer
03 calibration forms
Writing implement
Multimeter
Kimwipes'0
Compressed air blower
Insulated shaft screwdriver
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Electronic terminal cleaner
Teflon® tape
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
See Chapter 7 in the THERMO Manufacturer's Manuals for repair procedures for both models.
5.1 Mechanical Maintenance
5.1.1 Remove the lid and inspect interior for obvious damage (i.e. disconnected wires, loose boards,
loose fittings, loose photometer lamp) and repair if necessary.
5.1.2 Remove cell chambers and clean with a Kimwipe® and compressed air. Replace cells in their
previous positions (Note: Do not interchange cell positions as this affects frequency values.
Work on only one cell a time.)
5.1.3 Remove and reseat boards. Spray connections with a terminal cleaner if corrosion is evident.
5.1.4 Push all terminal pins in with a small, insulated screwdriver or other insulated tool.
5.1.5 Blow the inside of the unit out with compressed air if there is dust and debris inside.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 3 of 9
5.1.6 Plug the analyzer in and turn it on. Be sure either a filter or zero air from the primary is installed
ahead of the sample port, and other connections (i.e., in/out loop, exhaust) are properly attached.
5.1.7 Perform a leak check by: Removing the filter from the sample port and plug with a stainless
steel plug. Note the flow rate on front of analyzer - it should drop to zero.
Note: 49C units have an electronic flow meter. Flow rates may not drop to zero because the internal
flow meters may not be properly calibrated. A sure way to check that there is no flow is to attach a
mechanical flow meter to the exhaust port on the back of the unit. The ball or piston in the meter
should fall to the bottom if there is no leak. Also, the internal pressure should drop to ~ 150 to 180
millimeters of mercury (mm Hg) and remain steady. Release the vacuum very slowly to prevent
damage to the flow transducer.
5.1.8 Adjust the frequencies to the proper levels.
5.2 Testing the Signal Voltage Output
• Connect the voltage output cable to the top terminal (just below fan) on the back of the
analyzer. Connect the white wire on the 4-conductor cable to the positive (red) lead on the
Fluke multimeter and the green wire on the cable to the negative (black) lead on the multimeter.
Set the meter to 20 VDC, and turn it ON.
• Pressing the menu button, proceed through the menu to Diagnostics then to Test Analog
Outputs, then Zero. The voltage should read 0.000 VDC. Adjust the potentiometer Z1 on the
D/A card (the third card behind the display board while facing the instrument).
• To test the full scale-voltage, press Menu, then scroll down to Full Scale. Press the
Key. Voltage should read 10 VDC. Adjust if necessary at SP1 potentiometer on the D/A card.
• Press Run to return to Sample mode.
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE OF STANDARDS
All ozone analyzers used as primary standards are calibrated and certified in accordance with
the EPA document titled "Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air Monitoring Analyzers for
Ozone", EPA-600/4-79-056. Initial certification requires 6 comparison runs between transfer
and PS that include 6 concentrations including zero and 85 percent to 95 percent of upper range.
This procedure is to be performed on 6 separate days over a period no longer than 14 days.
Ongoing recertification requires one new comparison, performed as described above, on a
single day twice per calendar quarter.
The transfer standards are calibrated, and certified before and after each field calibration trip,
and at a minimum of once every 6 weeks. A record of the most recent six calibrations of the
transfer standard is kept as part of the certification process. The average of the six slopes and
the average of the six intercepts, are used as the correction factor for the transfer standard.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformaited.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 4 of 9
Transfer standard certifications and traceability documents are maintained in the network
coordination center files. See Figures 1 and 2 for an example of a 6-day certification of an
ozone transfer standard.
6.1 Calibrating the Detector, Models 49C and 49i
Allow the instrument to warm up for approximately 1 hour, sampling either filtered room air or
zero air. (Check to see if desiccant or charcoal canisters in the zero air system are due to be
changed.)
Connect the output of the THERMO 49PS primary to the sample inlet of the sampler (transfer).
Generate a zero level of ozone with the 49PS. Complete all information required on the 03
calibration form. An example is shown below. (Run an audit before making any adjustments.)
Observe and record display readings, 10 pairs each of cells A and B, from the transfer and PS.
This applies to model 49C models. 49z models provide only an average of both cells. There is
a menu option for individual A and B cell observations on the 49i but it is only used for
diagnostic purposes.
Check to ensure that the voltage output and the display of the analyzer agree. Although serial data
collection is performed at some CASTNET sites, transfer standard ozone analyzers are still
connected to the site DAS using the analogue output.
Generate 0, 450, 300, 200, 100, and 60 ppb with the 49PS. Record the respective comparisons on the
O3 calibration form. If transfer unit audit fails perform a calibration by forcing the zero and 80%
point (400 ppb).
Correct the PS averages to actual (observed average minus the y-intercept and divided by the
slope generated when the PS was certified).
actual ¦
raverage reading- intercept^
slope
Calculate percent differences ( %A) and perform a regression analysis of the transfer averages
versus the 49PS values.
%A =
unknown — known
known
x 100
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 5 of 9
Calculate and record the slope and intercept, correcting the transfer to the primary standard, on
the 03 form. Compare with the previous 5 days of the 6-day certification. Calculate the relative
standard deviation of the six slopes and six intercepts. The relative standard deviation of the
slopes must be 3.7% and the standard deviation of the intercepts must be 1.5. Calculate the
average of the six slopes and six intercepts. Use these averages to correct the transfer analyzer
response.
6.2 Adjusting the levels
6.2.1 Turn the No. 6 dip switch to ON (forward).
6.2.2 Turn service to ON.
6.2.3 Set the range to 500 ppb.
6.2.4 Check the following parameters:
— Flow
— Lamp temperatures
— Intensities
— Pressure
— Noise
— Span and Offset
6.2.5 Set the 03 transfer to receive approximately 60 ppb overnight to condition the unit. (Only
necessary with a new unit or one with new Teflon parts.
6.2.6 Set the primary to 0 ppb.
6.2.7 On the transfer analyzer menu, to to Calibrate and choose Calibrate zero?. When both units
have stabilized, set the transfer by pressing the key when the primary shows 0.0 ppb.
6.2.8 Set the primary to 400 ppb.
6.2.9 Move backwards on the Transfer menu to Calibrate span?.
6.2.10 When both units have stabilized, set the transfer to read what the primary indicates by pressing
the key.
6.2.11 Alternate between 0 and 400 ppb a couple of times, and check a few pints to see that the transfer
is stable and accurate.
6.2.12 Check the primary and transfer parameters, and record readings on the data sheet.
6.2.13 Be sure that the Transfer is in Sample mode.
6.2.14 Set the primary to 0 ppb. Record 20 readings from both units.
6.2.15 Set the primary to the following (take 20 readings at each setting):
0 300 100
450 200 60
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 6 of 9
6.2.16 Apply correction factors (slope and intercept) to the primary and calculate %A for each setting
between the primary and transfer. (See #6 Model 49-103 for equations.)
6.2.17 Calculate slope, intercept, and correlation coefficient for the transfer for that day's run.
6.2.18 After 6 days, calculate the average for all 6 days.
7.0 REFERENCES
Thermo Fisher Scientific. 2006. Model 49i Instruction Manual, UV Photometric 03 Analyzer Part
number 102434-00
Thermo Electron Corporation. 1997. Model 49C UV Photometric Analyzer Instrument Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 7 of 9
Figure 1: Test Equipment Calibration and Maintenance Record
TEST EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE RECORD
INSTRUMENT TfjCO Ox ftPROJECT NAME
INSTALLATION DATE .
MODEL NUMBER A1C, PROJECT NUMBER ,
SERIAL NUMBER gOfalk STATION NAME fXf- Te-tk
PURCHASE DATE ~ STATION NUMBER <**»:¦ ft.rs.vUU.. ft-
DATE o£>r CALIBRATION/MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
Sto|)e- XlwWjr-fC./->v-r. CofrT,
i.Oo^A
«/ n t
%(*>i !A^S
-o-om
l/<\fc>o
d.-Wl 0.-Z5S5
h
Av£
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 8 of 9
Figure 2: Test Equipment Calibration and Maintenance Record
TEST EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE RECORD
INSTRiiMFNT T« J A,4es\*r £.r>«ch aa ^ *
A
A/d-josW J j)f-6-;s't
i)
J ' 1
^Lct.k-pd rtiftnisio' \fxtv\ip . ^ ^ Wvet?.. V
(r* UUroAVim p^oVor^ fro >v, O^T
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - OZONE ANALYZER
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 9 of 9
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ] Field SOP to be updated\4-B-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
: 1 of 7
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
4. BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Effective Date: ///f/2- OP*?
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Certification Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 7
IV. B. 4. BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the maintenance and handling of the BIOS DryCal Primary Air Flow Meter to Clean Air Status
and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of BIOS DryCal Primary Air Flow Meter
units administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
The BIOS DryCal DC-Lite Flow Meter and NEXUS Data/ Communication Module are
recharged and leak tested at least quarterly by laboratory personnel. Repairs and Certifications
are performed by the manufacturer.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
BIOS DryCal DC-Lite
Battery charger
Lead-acid batteries
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
When not in use, store in a clean, dry environment with the inlet/outlet caps installed. Every
quarter, fully charge the battery pack, and perform a leak test.
5.1 Charging the Battery
Before using your DryCal DC-Lite, be sure that the battery system has been fully charged to
ensure that the unit will perform to specifications and maintain proper operation for the required
time period.
The DC-Lite is equipped with a battery indicator that provides battery charge indication at three
levels. When the battery indicator on the display is empty, the unit will continue to operate for a
short period of time before shutting itself off.
5.2 To Charge the DC-Lite:
5.2.1 Connect only the appropriate BIOS 12VDC charges, provided with the DC-Lite flow meter,
into a standard wall outlet. Optionally, one station of the BIOS AirPro 4000D multi-station
charger may be used.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 7
5.2.2 Insert the charger barrel plug into the charging jack located on the right side of the DC-Lite
housing above the inlet and outlet air bosses. A green CHARGE LED will illuminate while the
unit is charging. Full charge takes 8 to 12 hours, and the DryCal can charge while being used.
5.2.3 To view the actual charging status during the charging period, disconnect the battery charger
and wait 3 to 5 minutes. When the indicator is solid black the battery is fully charged.
5.3 Battery Maintenance and Storage
5.3.1 Battery Maintenance:
Lead-acid batteries will not exhibit the "memory effect" common to nickel-cadmium batteries.
A lead acid battery may be charged for an indefinite time period without damage.
5.3.2 Long-Term Storage:
Long-term storage without charging can damage the battery pack, therefore, if the DC-Lite
cannot be left charging continuously, it should be charged at least every 3 months.
5.4 Leak-Test Check Procedure (DC-Lite/NEXUS)
The DC-Lite has a built-in quality assurance self-test feature to verify proper integrity and
operation of the DC-Lite flow cell (see the DC-Lite manual). When the NEXUS is introduced
into the flow stream, the NEXUS represents additional opportunities for leakage. We
recommend that the NEXUS flow path be included in the leak test process.
The leak test for the DC-Lite and NEXUS combination is very similar to the leak test defined in
the DC-Lite manual with only a small modification. Connect tubing from the NEXUS to either
the inlet or outlet of the DC-Lite and connect the leak test fitting to the remaining NEXUS air
boss. Make sure the electronic cable is disconnected.
To initiate the leak test:
5.4.1 Connect either the DC-Lite inlet or outlet to the NEXUS with tubing and then place the leak test
tubing accessory (short piece of tubing with red cap) over the remaining NEXUS air boss. The
low flow range DC-Lite (DCL500) requires a tubing adapter to connect to the larger NEXUS air
boss.
5.4.2 After the tubing connections have been made, from the DC-Lite key pad, press and hold the
button while pressing the button. The DC-Lite display will read:
Leak Test Invert
& Push Read
NOTE: If the DC-Lite is already "ON", press and hold the button while pressing the button on the back of the DC-Lite unit.
5.4.3 Invert the DC-Lite so the piston moves to the top of the cell. While the piston is resting at the
top of the cell press the button and the internal valve will close. Return the DC-Lite to
an upright position and it will time the descent of the piston.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ) Field SOP\4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 7
NOTE: The test may take as long as 15-20 minutes. Observe the location of the piston to ensure that it is
at the top of the cell when the test begins.
If the test is completed successfully, the display will read:
Test OK
Push Read
5.4.4 Press the button as directed and the internal valve will open and the piston will fall.
5.4.5 Repeat the test with the leak test tubing accessory connected to air boss not connected to the
NEXUS.
NOTE: If the unit fails the leak-test, the display will read:
Maintenance Reqd
Push Read
6.0 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
The BIOS Primary Air Flow Meter is returned to the manufacturer annually for routine
cleaning, maintenance, calibration, and certification (see Figures 1 and 2 Sample Factory
Certificates).
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
Bios International Corporation. 2002. DryCal® DC-Lite Manual
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\PCASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 7
Figure 1: Sample Certification
BIO
c
BIOS International Corporation * 10 P.uk NJ 07<:0i?.ySA
Phuvo: {$7$02-&00 * Fiix: (973) 492-8270 * "V ~'
calibration certificate
DRYCAL NEXUS TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE SENSOR CALIBRATION
The DryCal Lite is a true primary volumetric flow standard. A separate calibration certificate is supplied
with the flow measuring cefl(s). Temperature and pressure corrections are then applied by the Nexus to
obtain standardized flow readings. The temperature and pressure transducers are calibrated against
NIST traceable standards to obtain the standardized readings.
BIOS International certifies that -the following DryCal Nexus has been calibrated against the
following standards:
Ambient temperature using precision thermometer
Nexus Temperature reading
11
C
21 °c
Calibration Standard
Telatemp 4400T
Serial No. 300907
Date of Calibration j 03/21/2000
Date Due
03/21/2001
NIST No. 811/260178
Ambient pressure using precision pressure indicator
Nexus pressure reading
757
mm Hg
151
mm Hg
Calibration Standard
Druck DPI 740
Serial No. 431/98-09
Date of Calibration
10/31/2000
Date Due
10/31/2001
NIST No, E2828 822/249620
All calibrations performed in accordance with ANSI/NCSL Z540-1-1994
By_
Serial Number_
1013
Irubkj
NS?7
Date
7117101
Machek Pankow
1of1
P:\ECMvP\CASTNET 4 - transiliomQAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field S0P\4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of7
Figure 2: Sample Certification
OS
BIOS International Corporation • 10 Pork PI.mcc. Outtor, N'J 0740£y$A
Plvrjoc: (373) 492-8400 * Fax: {373) ^92-8^0 * wwvv.biosinl.com *
AS SHIPPED FLOW DATA:
Product DCL-MH
Serial No.
Date
1153
7/26/01
"2.cik_
f\ i r
£ p A Et OOO 3^*7
Laboratory Environment:
Temperature Ambient:
Pressure Ambient:
Humidity Ambient:
21.04°C
749.9 mmHg
54%
Instrument
Lab Standard
Lab Standard
Deviation
Allowable
Condition
Reading mf/min
Reading mi/min
Unit#
Percentage
Deviation
Shipped
200.7
200
1002
0.35
1.00%
in tolerance
503.6
500.15
1003
0.69
1.00%
in tolerance
2014
2002
1001
0.60
1.00%
in tolerance
5026
5000.5
1001
0.51
1.00%
in tolerance
17040
17015
1001
0.15
1.00%
in tolerance
Notes:
Sonia Otero
Da te'-3^3.kj/d /
Page 2 of 2
P: \ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - tvansilion\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
9.0 APPENDICES
None
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BIOS DRYCAL PRIMARY AIR FLOW METER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 7
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 -transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-4 reformatted RSM.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCXI PLATINUM RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
5. EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCXI
PLATINUM RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Effective Date:
A
2- £> *J
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
C alibration/C ertification Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP4-B-5 final .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCX1 PLATINUM RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. B. 5. EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCXI
PLATINUM RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DEVICES
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
the maintenance and handling of the Eutechnics Model 4600 and HY-CAL (now Honeywell)
BA500AUCXI platinum Resistance Temperature Devices (RTD) to Clean Air Status and
Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Eutechnics Model 4600 and HY-CAL
(now Honeywell) BA500AUCXI platinum RTD units administered by the CASTNET Field
Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Transfer platinum RTD units are calibrated at a minimum of once every 6 weeks via
comparison with independently certified thermometers in selected temperature ranges.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
EUTECHNICS 4600 RTD or
HY-CAL BA500AUCXI RTD
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) Certified liquid thermometers in
appropriate ranges
Stir plate
Stirring magnet
Insulated vessel large enough to accommodate temperature probes, with fitted lid
9-Volt battery
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
Note; To extend the battery life, a 9V lithium battery may be used.
5.1 Repair
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
5.2 Maintenance
Replace the 9-volt (V) alkaline battery as needed (Eutechnics Precision Thermometer
Model 4600 only):
5.2.1 Turn the unit over onto its face and remove the battery door at the bottom of the case.
5.2.2 Pry the old battery out from the mounting terminals using thumb and/or forefinger.
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-B-5 final .doc.\
MACTEQ Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCXI PLATINUM RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
5.2.3 When putting in the new 9-V battery, be sure that the terminals line up and snap firmly into the
terminal on the circuit board. (Note: The unit will not be damaged if you accidentally try to put
the battery in backwards.) Replace the battery door.
5.2.4 Insert probe connector, ensure a good connection and remove.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Locate the correction factor chart for the NIST thermometers.
6.2 Use a RTD Calibration form (Figure 1) to record the following information: NIST thermometer,
serial numbers, correction factors, RTD Serial number.
6.3 Connect the Hy-Cal RTD to the power source and allow to warm up (about Vi hour). Connect
the certified Fluke to the RTD and set to DC volts full-scale = 2.0000 V. The RTD range is 0-
100°C (volts X 100 = °C). Read the voltmeter to 0.00 accuracy. The Eutechnics RTD needs
only to be turned on (be sure it is reading in °C); it will read and display values on its screen.
6.4 Before using the thermometer, ensure there is no mercury separation (bubbles). If there are,
heat or cool thermometer to transfer mercury to the bulb reservoir. Then check it again at the
desired temperature.
6.5 Ensure that the stir plate is actively stirring the bath. None of the RTDs or thermometers should
be touching each other or the sides of the Thermos.
6.6 Submerse the NIST Thermometer to the line as marked on each thermometer. Submerse the
RTD tip to same depth as the thermometer tip.
6.7 Allow the RTD to stabilize. Record the first reading of both thermometer and the RTD at the
temperature of interest. Read the thermometer to Vz of the smallest division. Correct the
thermometer reading using the NIST certification for each thermometer.
6.8 Remove the RTD from the bath until a change is noted on the multimeter or LCD. Re-insert the
RTD and allow it to stabilize. Record the thermometer and RTD readings. Repeat for at least
four measurements at each temperature (five measurements is preferred).
6.9 Use each thermometer at its set point (± 1°C) as indicated on the NIST certification by adding
hot or cold water as necessary. Target temperatures are: 0°C, 10°C, 20°C, 30°C, 40°C, and
50°C.
6.10 Average the four or five independent NIST thermometer readings and the RTD readings at each
of the six or seven temperature points and record the results.
6.11 Calculate the correction factor for the RTD at each of the temperature points and record on the
form.
6.12 Calculate the slope, intercept, and correlation coefficient for the RTD, and record on the form.
6.13 Sign and date the form and secure it to the RTD.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transiiion^QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-5 final .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCX) PLATINUM RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
Note: When using the RTD for the field measurement of temperature, correct reading by applying the
correction factor at the set point or by slope/intercept correction.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol.11, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP-4-B-5 final .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCXI PLATINUM RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
Figure 1: Sample Calibration Form
RTD CALIBRATION
instrument
Model
Number
Range
*e
Therm. #
Therm. Correction
RTD
Range
"C
Therm.#
Therm, Correction
RTD
-
Avg.
Avg,
Com
Corr.
-
Range
•C
Therm.#
Therm. Correction
RTD
Range
•c
Therm. #
Therm, Correction
RTD
Avg.
Avg.
-
Con*.
Corr.
Range
*C
Therm.#
Therm. Correction
RTD
Range
*C
Therm. #
Therm. Correction
RTD
Avg,
-
Avg.
is
Corr.
Corr.
Slope Calibrated By
Intercept Pate
Corr. Coeff.
P:\ECM PCASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-B-5 final .doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - EUTECHNICS MODEL 4600 AND HY-CAL BA500AUCXI PLATINUM RESISTANCE
TEMPERATURE DEVICES
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition'*,QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-5 final .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODEL 18802
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 1 of 4
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
6. R.M. YOUNG SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODEL 18802
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
//2-crt> f
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
li- \(/7\hJl
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-6 reformatted.doc.\
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODEL 18802
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 2 of 4
IV. B. 6. R.M. YOUNG SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODEL 18802
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the R.M. Young Synchronous Motor Model 18802 to Clean Air
Status and Trends Network (CASTNet) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of R.M. Young Synchronous Motor Model
18802 units administered by the CASTNet Field Calibration laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
See Sections 5.0 and 6.0
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
R.M. Young Synchronous Motor Model 18802
9-volt (V) batteries
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer when necessary.
5.2 Maintenance
5.2.1 Check all cables for cuts or breaks before each use.
5.2.2 Check the batteries before each calibration trip.
5.2.3 Replace the two 9-V internal batteries when the motor stops and alerts the user on the display.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
The R.M. Young Synchronous Motor is returned to the factory annually for calibration and
certification. See Figure 1 for a sample certification form.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODEL 18802
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 3 of 4
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-6 reformatted.docx MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODEL 18802
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 4 of 4
Figure 1: Sample Certification Form
*
YOUNG
METEOROLOGICAL INSTRUMENTS
Certificate of Calibration and Testing
Test Unit:
Model: 18802 Serial Number
Description: Anemometer Drive - 200 to 15,000 Rpm
- Comprised of Models 18820A Control Unit & 18830A Motor Assembly
CA £>
R.M. Young Company certifies that the above equipment has been inspected and
calibrated-using standards whose accuracies are traceable to the National Institute of
Standards and Technologies (NIST).
Nominal
Motor
Rpm
27106D Output
Frequency
Hz (1)
Calculated
Rpm (2!
Indicated
Rpm (3J
300
rJoo
2700
iloo
270O
5100
S (oo
5IOO
7500
•7500
7500
10,200
. \7oc>
/£>2oO
12,600
¦2. loo
/"2£>oo
15,000
2.5oo
ISdod
O
(~l Clockwise and Counterclockwise rotation verified
(1) Measured frequency output of RM Young Model 2710SD standard anemometer
attached to motor shaft
(2) 27106D produces 10 pulses per revolution of the anemometer shaft
(3) Indicated on the Control Unit LCD display
•Indicates out of tolerance
Traceable frequency meter used in calibration A Q C? $
Date of inspection ^/l
Tested By
i/.
R.M. Young Company 2801 Aero-Park Drive, Traverse City, Michigan 49686 U.S.A.
TEL: (616) 946-3980 FAX: (616) 940-4772
9.0 APPENDICIES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-6 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 5
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
7. BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration/Certification Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
'
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 5
IV. B. 7. BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the Brunton Pocket Transit to Clean Air Status and Trends
Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Brunton Pocket Transit units administered
by the CASTNET Field Calibration laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
See Sections 5.0 and 6.0.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Soft dry cloth
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
Any necessary repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer at the factory when
needed.
5.2 Maintenance
Clean the case, mirror, and glass with a soft, dry, cloth, as needed. When not in use, store in the
leather transit case.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION PROCEDURES
The Brunton Pocket Transit is returned to the factory annually, for calibration and certification.
See Figure 1 for a sample certification.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition'QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 5
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 5
Figure 1: Sample Certification Form
irunton Company "
Riveitoa, Wyoming 82501 &
PIwise cm) Zi645i9
(Htxilixmh (Bf (ft&lxbxixixsjxt
isillill
*** © s*t etov i iLot-J
i 0
-jgl
jk jk ^ 1
4o4~ SuJ JOo'lii- ~rs££ACE, 1
L'
0
* 1
11
*****r mSZ U>Coc
-Soool
fc«5sm •«*<
.from# burnt* S*.
isn.tic
fwt fvK 5c
• ^SQOt>
frwCw ?*t Jft
IF Soo5
1
Sfmtta lit X*
i^roGO
v&cmt -tiiAtost-r , 3e.etA.uifc oz.&e>\4-
Calibration traceable to the National Institute of Standardsand Technology in accordance
with Mil- STD- 45SS2A has been accomplished on the Instrument listed below by
comparison withstandards maintained fay The Brunton Co. The accuracy and stability of
alt standards maintained by The Brunton Co, are traceable to national standards
maintained by fee National Institute of Standards and Technology In Wahlngton, D,C. and
Bouider, Co. Complete record of ail work performed Is maintained by The Brunton Co. and
Is available for inspection upon request
This Unit has been calibrated to Ltetz TM10E serial number 30337 traceable to N.B.S. no.
738 227675 Mite 63*-
Signd
QUALITY CONTROL MAWAGSH
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiorAQAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
9.0 APPENDICES
None
TRANSFER STANDARDS - BRUNTON POCKET TRANSIT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 5
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-7 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 1 of 8
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
8. ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
t / 2-co
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
¦—== »l/l
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration/Certification Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-8 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 2 of 8
IV. B. 8. ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the Rotronic Hygrometer Model A1 to Clean Air Status and
Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Rotronic Hygrometer Model A1 units
administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
CASTNET hygrometer transfer standards are calibrated, and certified at a minimum of once
every 6 weeks.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Rotronic Hygrometer Model A1
Vaportron H-100L Humidity Lab
Aqueous Saturated salts (Note: Use only as a last resort)
Kimwipes®
Temperature/Relative Humidity Data Form
9-volt battery
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
All repairs and adjustments are performed by the manufacturer.
5.2 Maintenance
5.2.1 Replace the 9-V battery when needed.
5.2.2 Clean the dust filter prior to each calibration/certification procedure: Cleaning should be done
without removing the filter from the probe.
5.2.2.1 Gently wipe the filter with a solution of water and mild detergent.
5.2.2.2 If cleaning does not remove most of the stains, the filter should be replaced. To do this, unscrew
the filter from the probe. When removing the filter, make sure that the sensors are not damaged.
The humidity sensor is sometimes mistaken for a "white paper tag." Do not remove from the
probe!
5.2.2.3 Before putting on a new dust filter, check the alignment of both sensors with the probe. The
wires that connect the sensors to the probe are very thin and bend easily. If this happens,
correct the alignment by holding the sensor very gently with a pair of small flat-nosed pliers.
Do not use sharp pliers or tweezers as this could puncture the sensor. Do not pull on the sensor.
P:\ECrvr P CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-8 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
13 of 8
6.0 CALIBRATION /CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Rotronic A1 Transfer Sensor Using the Vaportron H-100L Series Precision Humidity Lab
6.1.1 Check the desiccant cartridge located on back of unit; the indicating silica gel must be a blue
color above the red line on the cartridge. If the indicating silica gel is pink at or below the red
line on the cartridge, refer to the Vaportron Manual for instructions on changing indicating
silica gel.
6.1.2 Check the water level by lifting up on cap end of cartridge and looking into the large window
near the left desiccant hanger hook (See Figure 1). Use a small flashlight to locate the water
level. The water level must be between the lower and upper red lines on the fill level decal. If
water level is not between lines, refer to the Vaportron Section (IV.A.5) of these Standard
Operating Procedures (SOP) for instructions on water level service procedure.
6.1.3 Switch on Power (lower left). Both RH LCD (center top) and Temperature display should
come on and read the approximate room conditions.
6.1.4 Set the Temperature display using the up or down arrows to 22.5°C.
6.1.5 Set the RH LCD display using the up or down arrows to the first point of 5.0 % RH.
6.1.6 Replace the white chamber access door (right side) with the clear access door which has a black
strain relief port. Insert the Rotronic A1 probe so approximately 3.5 inches of the probe is inside
the Vaportron chamber. Lightly tighten the port fitting to hold the probe securely in the
chamber. Bend the hand-held part of the unit down to rest on the counter top.
6.1.7 Turn the unit on and check that the battery condition is greater than 50%; if not, replace the
battery. Obtain a Temperature/ Relative Humidity Data Form (See Figure 2 which is a
completed sample form) and record the serial number of the sensor.
6.1.8 Switch on Control. A faint, high-pitched sound should indicate proper operation of the air
circulator fan inside the chamber. The Vaportron displays should begin to ramp toward the
values that were set. Normally, the RH and temperature readings will stabilize within 2 to 5
minutes.
6.1.9 Allow the A1 sensor to equilibrate for 1 hour at the set point, and then record the output from
the Vaportron RH controller and Rotronic A1 on the calibration form.
6.1.10 Set the RH LCD display using the up arrow to the next point of 32.8% RH and repeat step
number 9.
6.1.11 Repeat step number 10 for set points of: 52.9%, 75.3%, and 93.6%.
6.1.12 After completion of the final set point, loosen the black port fitting on the door and remove the
A1 sensor, and then remove the clear door from chamber.
6.1.13 Install the white chamber access door with yellow port plug in place. Set the RH LCD display
using the down arrow to 50.0 % RH. Let the unit run for 5 minutes at this setting.
6.1.14 Switch off Control and then switch off Power (lower left).
6.1.15 Check that the calibration form is completed. (NOTE: Be sure to calculate slope and intercept.)
Then, see Calibration Lab Manager for review of the calibration form
6.1.16 After review, place the form and sensor in a plastic bag and put them in the appropriate
calibration box or on the "ready to ship" shelf.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-8 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 4 of 8
6.2 Rotronic Model A1 Sensor Using Aqueous Saturated Salts [Use aqueous salts for
calibration/certification only as a last resort]
6.2.1 Turn the unit on and check that the battery condition is greater than 50%; if not, replace the
battery. Obtain a Temperature/Relative Humidity Data form (See Figure 3 which is a completed
sample form) and record the serial number of the sensor.
6.2.2 Carefully remove the filter cap from the sensor. Using a Climatronics sensor support cap, insert
the Rotronic A1 probe approximately 1.25 inches into the rubber grommet (just above sensor
inlet screens). Starting with Silica Gel (0.0%) gently screw Climatronics sensor support cap and
sensor, into the opening of the bottle (use great caution not to bump or contaminate the sensor
tip when inserting in bottle). Place the bottle/sensor into the blue bottle caddy.
6.2.3 Allow the Rotronic A1 sensor to equilibrate for 1 hour at the set point and record its output on
the Temperature/Relative Humidity Data Form.
6.2.4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for salt solutions of: MgCl2 (32.8%), Mg(N03)2 (52.9%), NaCl (75.3%),
and KN03 (93.6%). Lightly swirl the solution of deionized (DI) water and salt, being careful
not to get salt solution into the bottle neck. If salt solution gets in the bottleneck, clean with a
Kimwipe® before inserting the probe.
6.2.5 After the completion of the final point, remove the A1 sensor from the bottle and wipe the
sensor housing with a clean Kimwipe®.
6.2.6 Check to see that the calibration form is completed. (NOTE: be sure to calculate slope and
intercept.) See Calibration Laboratory Manager for review of the calibration form. After review,
place the form and sensor in a plastic bag and put them in the appropriate calibration box or on
the "ready to ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-8 reformaued.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 5 of 8
Figure 1: Water Gauge Window
Water Gauge Window Location
Gauge Decal Detail
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-8 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 6 of B
Figure 2: Sample Temperature/Relative Humidity Data Form Using Vaportron
Environmental SdaKe &
Engineering, Inc.
TEMPERATURE/RELATIVE HUMIDITY DATA FORM
Site Name/Number:
DSM 3260 S/N: U
&
Site Location: 6^.'n£S'(;ik| Fj.
OSM 3260L S/N: p a
1 G-m Sensor S
TEMPERATURE 2.mSensor&1
/N- Translator S/N: A' r ^
fiorVro-iitsGT L
RTO , _ Temp. Ze
%
15. ¦*> %
/
^3.7%
/
/
Remarks: ficdkry % is %
SerV- Tiwic. O^cVoor
Slo,
* l.cobZ
iwt * -
Performed by:(
Reviewed by:
Date: M ' I - ?9 Calibrated: d]
Audited: txfjl
Date:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-8 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 7 of 8
Figure 3: Sample Temperature/Relative Humidity Data Form Using Salts
Blaming, IfiC
TEMPERATURE/RELATIVE HUHltHTY DMA FORM
Site Hfame/Hum&er: &S6 .»...Xe&k-
DSM 3260 S/N:
, Sit® Location: ms^W- tfL
DSM 32601 «N:
temperature
«»rn Sensor S/Nl
2m Sensor Ml;,
. Translator S/tt
/
RID
Terrp, Zero;.
ATemp, Zero:,
THERMOySTER
READING (aC)
Umomd'Od Ccto<*
OAS TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
o^rfeMPEnATuriE output
32«Volac«
32601 Vttage
#»Velago
32«L Wt8 e
iornp {\/}
KJ/1
"
s* lr-
RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
Sensor Sfls
Transfer S/l
4 r OOom 1
"ransfator S/N:
"ransiator Zero.
%..VirS 1
Span:
GTL
Saw
equivalent
RBLAWE HUMIDITY
DAS OUTPUT
38® Volant
3?«CIV<*8§0
%R*l Hum.
%
0,6%
IVIW tlx
5*3.1%
Movfit
c}3 S%
K»Afei
l3.L%
y
Remarks: tkfHry ^ 75"%
§rt4* T5»i€. Ik«<
4^.--
$4: 9
o. 11
r* -
o.wy
P«ftO
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - ROTRONIC HYGROMETER MODEL A1
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 8 of 8
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-B-S reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 5
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
B. TRANSFER STANDARDS
9. R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
///1/2-jc
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 5
IV. B. 9. R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the R.M. Young Solar Radiation Transfer System to Clean Air
Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of R.M. Young Solar Radiation Transfer
System units administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
R.M. Young solar radiation systems are calibrated upon receipt and at the request of field
technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Li-Cor Model LI-2000SA pyranometer (transfer standard)
Eppley Precision Spectral Pyranometer (certified primary standard)
Fluke Multimeter and cable
Light source
Huxseflux Model LP02 Pyranometer (Certified Primary Standard)
Tool kit including screwdriver, soldering flux, soldering iron, and wire cutters
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
5.1.1 Testing the Photodiode
5.1.1.1 Connect the Fluke multimeter using the double banana-style cable with BNC connector on the
other end.
5.1.1.2 Insert the double banana-style cable into the |j Amp (A) and common receptacles on the
multimeter.
5.1.1.3 Connect the BNC end of the cable to the Li-Cor sensor BNC connection (use a barrel connector as
a union).
5.1.1.4 Set the multimeter for Amps (A), DC, and 200 A.
5.1.1.5 Shine a flashlight or other light source directly on the sensor. The multimeter readout should be at
least -35 fiA. If there is little or no response, repair the sensor as follows:
5.1.2 Replacing the Photodiode
5.1.2.1 Remove the back of the sensor housing. Unscrew the small set screw near the top of the sensor
housing to release the sensor eye inside. Cut off the old photodiode.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'Ap - I Field SOP 4-B-9.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 5
5.1.2.2 Strip approximately 1/2 inch of insulation from the cable end. Unwrap the shield and wind it into
a single strand. Strip approximately 1/8 inch of plastic covering on central wire. Slip a 2-inch
piece of shrink-wrap onto cable.
5.1.2.3 Bend the terminals on the new sensor eye at approximately 1/4 inch. Solder the shield to the
terminal marked with the black dot. Solder the central wire to the other terminal. Be sure the
wires do not touch. Move the heat shrink as close to the new sensor as possible and heat it so that
it tightens around the cable.
5.1.2.4 Test the new sensor eye with the multimeter as described in the Testing the Photodiode section
(5.1.1).
5.1.2.5 Install old (or new) indulating ring on the new photodiode. Insert photodiode pin legs into
miniature PC board. Solder and snip excess. The pin leg closest to the tab on the rim of the
photodiode housing is the shield. Solder the woven wire of the coaxial cable to the trace in
continuity with this pin. Solder the signal (core wire) of the coaxial cable to the trace in
continuity to the other pin.
5.1.2.6 Clean the housing inside first, being sure not to touch the surface of the new sensor eye with your
fingers. Insert the new photodiode.
5.1.2.7 Be sure the new photodiode is flush with the inside surface of the housing, then tighten the set
screw.
5.1.2.8 Seal the back cover of the housing with silicone sealant before screwing it back on. Put a dab of
sealant in the set screw hole as well.
5.1.2.9 Retest with the multimeter as described in 5.1.1 above.
5.2 Maintenance
Routinely clean the sensor housing. Inspect the 75-foot cable for damage; repair if necessary.
5.3 Retire housing when lens becomes crazed, cracked, or chipped.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Calibration/Certification
6.1.1 Install the Li-Cor sensor on the solar radiation sensor stand outside of the solar radiation test
facility. Ensure that it is level.
6.1.2 Run the 75-foot cable supplied with the transfer unit through the PVC elbow opening in the
shelter wall to connect it to the translator box on one of the stations on the bench.
6.1.3 Connect the translator box to one of the stations inside the shelter.
6.1.4 Allow the transfer to operate for at least 1 full day. Be sure to wipe dew and dust from the lens of
each primary every morning. Record data on a sunny day with high solar radiation values if
possible.
6.1.5 Record the identification (ID) number of the primary sensor and data logger.
6.1.6 Total the columns of the primary and the transfer using the values from the morning (values ~ 0
watts) until the evening when the values return to ~ 0.
6.1.7 Average the totals of each column by the number of hourly averages being used.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-B-9.doc.\
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 5
6.1.8 Calculate the percent differences between the primary and transfer for the total averages and the
hour at which the highest hourly averages occurred.
6.1.9 Perform a linear regression on the two columns. If the slope falls between .95 and 1.05 and the
intercept falls between ±10, the unit will not require recalibration prior to being used again in the
field. If the unit does not meet the above specifications, recalibrate as follows:
6.1.9.1 Unscrew the translator card from the box and expose the voltage adjustment potentiometer on the
back side of the card.
6.1.9.2 Compare the transfer's values against the primary's values during the day at moderate light levels
and at peak solar radiation levels. Adjust the transfer's voltage adjustment potentiometer as
necessary.
6.1.9.3 Calculate the percent differences between the two units and perform a linear regression as
outlined in steps 5 and 6.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and Local
Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol.1, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
Li-Cor, Inc., Environmental Division. LI-200SA Pyranometer Sensor Manual.
8.0 FIGURES
P: ECM- PiCASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0>Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-B-9.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
TRANSFER STANDARDS - R.M. YOUNG SOLAR RADIATION TRANSFER SYSTEM
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 5
Figure 1: Solar Radiation Data Form
SOLAR RADIATION DATA FORM
SITE NAME/NUMBER: MACTEC
SITE LOCATION: GAINESVILLE, FL
Sensor Number: 04257
Translator Number: 04345
PS Number: (Huxseflux) 06490
PS Number: (Eppley 1) 01745
PS Number: (Eppley 2) 000108
Datalogger Number: 000331
Channel: 3
SLOPE
INTERCEPT
CORR COEF
AVG % DIFF
MAX % DIFF
Hour may vary
0.9970
8.9002
0.9997
2.4
0.5
" ~
HUX
_ "
P Avg Site/Trans
11/16/2009 7:00
11/16/2009 8:00
11/16/2009 9:00
11/16/200910:00
11/16/200911:00
11/16/200912:00
11/16/200913:00
11/16/2009 14:00
11/16/2009 15:00
11/16/2009 16:00
11/16/200917:00
11/16/200918:00
11/16/2009 19:00
MBi
HUX Std Avg
342
Eppieyl Std Avg
322
Data reduced from non-shaded values
Eppley2 Std Avg
332
REMARKS:
PS Avg
332
Calibrated By: dme
Site/Trans Avg
340
Date: November 17,2009
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - l Field SOP\4-B-9.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 8
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
I. FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Calibration Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
/ l/l/lool
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
C:\Documents and Settings\makrause\Local Settings\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Outlook\YClDJN6U\4-C-l reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 8
IV. C. 1. FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
field equipment sign-in and sign-out to Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET)
Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to field equipment sign-in and sign-out for the CASTNET Field Calibration
Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
All CASTNET field equipment is treated such that their current location or intended destination
is documented at all times.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
CASTNET II Receiving/Sign-In Log
CASTNET II Shipping/Sign-Out Log
Networked computer with access to the CASTNET Data Management Application (CDMSA)
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
N/A
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Field Equipment Sign-In
Sign-in all equipment received from the field in the "CASTNET II Receiving Sign-In Log"
(Figure 1). If the system is tagged for post-calibration, note that in the Action column of the
sign-in log.
6.1.1 Any equipment requiring post-calibration is given to a Calibration Laboratory Technician for a
complete post-calibration test.
6.1.2 Testing of equipment requiring post-calibration includes:
6.1.2.1 Do not make adjustments or changes to the piece of equipment before post-calibration.
6.1.2.2 All normal calibration test points will be tested and recorded on the proper form with additional
test points for relative humidity and wind direction (see III.A. Figures 6-15).
6.1.2.3 If the post-calibration tag indicates a problem point, obtain additional test points at and around
this area.
6.1.2.4 After testing of post-calibrated equipment, the form must be reviewed by the Calibration
Laboratory Manager or the Field Operations Coordinator.
6.1.3 Upon completion, give post-calibration forms to the Field Operations Coordinator along with
the Post Calibration Request (Figure 3) tag for final review and for filing in the proper site file.
(^Documents and Settings\makrause\Local SettingsTemporary Internet Fiies Content.OutlookvYC 1DIN6U 4-C-1 reformatted RSM_MS.doc\
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 8
6.1.4 After the post-calibration form is reviewed and filed, move the equipment to the repair area for
repair/rebuild and calibration.
6.2 Field Equipment Sign-Out
Sign-out all CASTNET equipment either being shipped or hand-carried to a site in the
"CASTNET II Shipping/Sign-Out Log" (Figure 2). Pay particular attention to the equipment
serial number and its destination. This information will be required when the equipment
inventory database is updated.
6.2.1 Equipment Sign-Out and Shipping Procedure: to a Site
If a CASTNET monitoring site requires an equipment shipment, an electronic Equipment
Request Form (ERF) must first be generated from the CDMSA.
If item has an EPA or a CASTNET ID number:
1. Enter equipment ID in Sign-Out Log Book.
a. The six digit EPA ID is written in the third column from the left.
b. The five digit CASTNET number is written in the fourth column.
2. Pack securely in appropriate sized box using adequate packing material.
3. Include a pre-printed FedEx return air bill that has the MACTEC address and correct
project number on it.
a. Write the site name and number on the "Company" line.
b. Include a pre-printed yellow tag with site and equipment filled in. (This tag
will be returned with the equipment).
4. Find ERF form in CASTNET database.
a. Enter equipment ID # in appropriate line under Sent column.
b. Add equipment type in Comments.
c. Type Project number and Requested Mode of Shipment.
d. Fill in Date and Initials (person filling out ERF form).
e. Save and print.
5. Attach the ERF to the box.
6. Take the box to the shipping trailer. Leave it for the regular shipping person or ship it
yourself (use the FedEx computer that is the leftmost of the three computers in the
shipping trailer).
7. Remove the ERF and affix the tracking number portion of the FedEx shipping label to
a place on the form such that information is not obscured.
8. Adhere the FedEx shipping label to the box.
9. File the ERF in the SHIPPING drawer (top drawer in Deborah's office) in the folder
with the appropriate site ID.
If the item does not have a CASTNET or EPA number:
C:\Documents and Settings.makrauseVLocal Settinas Temporary Internet Files\Content.OutIook\YClDIN6U\4-C-l reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC; Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 8
1. Pack appropriately. There will be no return air-bill or yellow tag.
2. Attach ERF if provided and continue with step 5) above.
3. If there is no ERF, write the site ID and shipping method on the box or on the
"Shipping Request" form.
4. Continue with above steps 5), 7), and 8) above.
6.2.2 Equipment Sign-Out and Shipping Procedure: to a Vendor
If item has an EPA or a CASTNET ID number:
1. Enter equipment ID in Repair Log Book.
a. Write the date item is shipped.
b. Leave the "Date Rt'd" column blank.
c. Enter the vendor's name, then the item description.
d. Enter the equipment's serial number provided by the manufacturer.
e. Write the EPA or CASTNET number next.
f. Most vendors will provide an RMA # or RA # to put on the box and the
authorization letter. Also enter this number in the log book.
g. The PO # may be available at time of shipping, but most likely not. If
available, enter this number in the log book.
2. Pack well in appropriate sized box with adequate packing material.
3. Include a signed copy of the authorization letter inside the box and a signed copy in a
see-through packing slip sleeve to be adhered to the outside of the box.
4. Take the box to the shipping trailer. Leave it for the regular shipping person or ship it
yourself (use the FedEx computer that is the leftmost of the three computers in the
shipping trailer).
5. Adhere the FedEx shipping label to the box.
6. Put the box in the shelter outside the trailer's roll up door.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
C:\Documents and SeitingsmakrauseLocal Settings\Temporary Internet Files\Content.Out]ook\YCIDlN6U\4-C-l reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 8
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
8.0 FIGURES
C:\Documents and SettingsmakrauseLoeal SettingsVTemporary Internet FilesvContent.Outlook.YCID1N6LM-C-1 reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 8
Figure 1: CASTNETII Receiving/Sign-In Log
EXAMPLE
CASTNET 11 RECEIVING/SIGN IN LOG
UPDATE OH
COMPUTER
EPA
NUMBER
NDDN
NUMBER
SENT PROM
LOCATION
PATE
IN
DESCRIPTION
ACTION
/ ~
J3S'W f -4,^,
5 1{
6\
L*.
u
/ K
iS^bCSt
£'a-«
A
>
7 A
to/
f
K.mt
ffrtfeo t - oUL t'-.f
# O.'SC-A'-f . J
C- - fs? "-{j
~DV
K>
LAr
04Si T
H
K
-1
>£44vf
«.
*
DArtu.
i*
< i4
oA^i- i
&
*
«.
X ji
n
kji'yj A&,
h
P<•£>&'* «£-¦ j f
<4
(SrerfcW ('A^ay'
Note - For Figures 1 and 2:
Update on Computer
Name
EPA Number
NDDN Number
Sent From Location/
Location Sent
Date In/Out
Description
Action
Mode of Shipping
Reason
= Indicates whether equipment inventory database was updated.
= Name of individual receiving/shipping the item.
= Tracking number supplied by the EPA.
= Tracking number supplied by MACTEC E&C.
= Name of location from/to which the item was sent. May be a monitoring site (site ID
number), a field technician (name or initials) or a designated calibration kit.
= Date received/shipped.
= Short description of item.
= Primarily describes post-calibration requests. May also provide other explanation of why item was sent.
= Shipping company or field technician.
= Brief explanation of why item was sent.
C: Documents and Settings\makrause\Local Settings\Temporary Internet Files\Cor)tent.Out]ook\YCiDIN6U\4-C-l reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 7 of 8
Figure 2: CASTNET II Shipping/Sign-Out Log
EXAMPLE
CASTNET II SHIPPING/SIGN OUT LOG
UPDATE ON
COMPUTER
/NAME
EPA
NUMBER
NDDN
NUMBER
LOCATION
SENT
DATE
OUT
DESCRIPTION
MODE OF
SHIPPING
REASON
bo r
lo-f. 1D if
Jo;
tyoi
'O-^A •foiua/'
ffOz^o It)H"
o ABSs
y
*t
034fe>
l%/
yc> i
L l- f-of-
ifc-
<5 4^46
u
(2>am s£- +^»n*\s
M.
c---
y /
'/Wy'/cA
o/
Fe / /2jc
mjm-A
u-
~v
i J
*1
' 1
U
i<
y
iA-
Cib^- COSP
—-
lL
OCCVfe
^ Qp -tn
-1
(oestaS ¦ ¦
fUii kJk f 5
y'
oAlcSt
. 0
C:\Documents and Settings\makrause\Local SettingsVTemporary Internet Files\Coment.Outlook\YCIDIN6U\4-C-l reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - FIELD EQUIPMENT SIGN-IN AND SIGN-OUT
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 8 of 8
Figure 3: Post-Calibration Request Tag
EXAMPLE
Removed RH
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - O3 MONITORS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
2. OZONE MONITORS
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Calibration Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
(/ f
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
Id • '09 I
P: ECM P CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP4-C-2 reformatted mak_MS.docx
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - 03 MONITORS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. C. 2. OZONE MONITORS
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the Thermo Fisher Scientific (Thermo) Ozone (O3) monitors to
Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Thermo 03 monitors administered by the
CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
CASTNET field equipment technicians repair and calibrate 03 monitors during the routine
calibration visits, at the request the site operator, upon receipt from the manufacturer, prior to
use in the field, or otherwise as needed.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Thermo Models 49-103, 49C or 49/ 03 Analyzers
Multimeter
Kimwipes
Compressed air blower
Insulated screwdriver
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Electronic terminal cleaner
Teflon tape
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
See Chapter 7 in the Thermo Manufacturer's Manual for repair procedures for all models.
5.2 Maintenance
5.2.1 All Models
5.2.1.1 Remove the lid and inspect interior for obvious damage (i.e. disconnected wires, loose boards,
loose fittings, loose photometer lamp) and repair if necessary.
5.2.1.2 Remove cell chambers and clean with a Kimwipe and compressed air. Replace cells to their
previous positions (Note: Do not interchange cell positions as this affects frequency values).
5.2.1.3 Remove and reseat boards. Spray connections with a terminal cleaner if corrosion is evident.
5.2.1.4 Push all terminal pins in with a small insulated screwdriver or other insulated tool.
5.2.1.5 Blow the unit out with compressed air if there is dust and debris inside.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP 4-C-2 reformatted mak_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - 03 MONITORS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
5.2.1.6 Plug the analyzer in and turn it on. Be sure either a filter or zero air from the primary is
installed ahead of the sample port, and other connections (i.e. in/out loop, exhaust) are properly
attached.
5.2.1.7 Perform a leak check by: Removing the filter from the sample port and plug with a non-reactive
plug. Note the flow rate on front of 49-103 flow meters analyzer - it should drop to zero. Also,
the internal pressure should drop to less than 200 millimeters of mercury (mm Hg) and remain
steady. Release vacuum slowly.
5.2.1.8 Adjust the frequencies to the proper levels.
5.3 Testing Ozonator Lamp Levels A and B (For Modified Instruments)
5.3.1 Thermo 49-103
5.3.1.1 Connect the zero air supply to the zero air port on the back of the analyzer. Remove the plug on
the vent.
5.3.1.2 Remove the instrument from Remote mode.
5.3.1.3 Set the Sample toggle switch on the front of the analyzer (inside the door) to Span/Zero (up).
5.3.1.4 Turn the toggle switch on the right side of the Level A potentiometer (also on the front and
inside the door) up to A. Notice if the ozonator lamp lights up.
5.3.1.5 Flip the same toggle switch down to B and notice if the ozonator lamp lights up. Also check to
see that the zero air pressure regulator is set at 15 psi with zero being supplied to the unit.
5.3.1.6 Return all settings to their original positions.
5.4 Testing Thermo 03 Signal Voltage Output
5.4.1 Thermo 49-103
5.4.1.1 Connect a Fluke multimeter to the voltage output terminals on the back of the analyzer. These
terminals are accessible from the inside or outside of the unit and are next to the fan. Connect
the red (+) terminal and the black (-) terminal. Set the multimeter to 20 volts direct current (20
VDC).
5.4.1.2 Press the A or B frequency button on the front of the analyzer. Note the voltage output on the
multimeter. It should read 0.000 VDC. If not, adjust the potentiometer on Board #2 (the first
card behind the display board). The zero potentiometer is the second one on the left when
viewed while facing the analyzer.
5.4.1.3 Press the Run button on the front of the unit. The voltage should read 10 VDC. Adjust, if
necessary, using the first potentiometer on the left of the card (facing the instrument). After 20
seconds the instrument will return to Sample mode. It may be necessary to press the A or B
frequency button, then the Run button to complete the adjustment.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
All ozone analyzers used as transfer standards are calibrated and certified in accordance with
the EPA document titled "Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air Monitoring Analyzers for
Ozone", EPA-600/4-79-056. Initial certification requires 6 comparison runs between transfer
and PS that include 6 concentrations including zero and 85 percent to 95 percent of upper range.
This procedure is to be performed on 6 separate days over a period no longer than 14 days.
P:\ECM\P CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0 Ap - I Field SOP4-C-2 reformatted mak_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - 03 MONITORS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
Ongoing recertification requires one new comparison, performed as described above, on a
single day twice per calendar quarter.
The transfer standards are calibrated, and certified before and after each field calibration trip,
and at a minimum of once every 6 weeks. A record of the most recent six calibrations of the
transfer standard is kept as part of the certification process. The average of the six slopes and
the average of the six intercepts are used as the correction factor for the transfer standard.
Transfer standard certifications and traceability documents are maintained in the network
coordination center files. See Figure 1 for an example of a 6-day certification of an ozone
transfer standard.
6.1 Calibrating the Detector, Model 49i
Allow the instrument to warm up for approximately 1 hour, sampling ONLY zero air. Transfer
should NEVER sample ambient room air.(Check to see if desiccant or charcoal canisters in the
zero air system are due to be changed.)
6.1.2 Connect the output of the Thermo 49PS primary to the sample inlet of the sampler (transfer).
6.1.3 Connect an Ethernet cable to the back of 49i model analyzers.
6.1.4 Using the laptop connected to the CR3000 datalogger, determine which primary standard is
being used, 1, 2 or 3, and ensure that page is selected. Only two (2) analyzers can be attached to
single primary standard at any time. The datalogger has a program built into it that runs a full
audit or calibration on an analyzer. However, the instrument must be set up in the program for it
to run and record the data properly.
Under each Primary Standard page, two analyzers can be set up. PSlis associated with Analyzer 1 and
Analyzer 2. PS2 is associated with Analyzer 4 and Analyzer 5. PS3 is associated with Analyzer 7 and
Analyzer 8. All parameters are the same on each page, but their values change depending on the
analyzers being used.
6.1.5 For a 49i analyzer, certain parameters need to entered and enabled. For instance, if using PS1,
its page should already have the PS slope and intercept entered into the program. Check to make
sure these agree with the sticker on the PS, as well as all other parameters match the PS being
used. Under Analyzer 1, the parameters of iSeries, SerialNum, Comport and IP_Addr need to be
adjusted to match the machine being hooked up. For a 49i, the iSeries parameter should read
"true". If it does not say "true", double click on the box and double click again to change the
logic statement. The serial number of the machine should be input into the parameter labeled
SerialNum. Double click inside the box, type in the serial number and then hit enter to save it.
The Comport parameter should read "TCP". If it does not say "TCP", double click inside the
box, type in TCP and then hit enter to save it. The IP address of the machine should be entered
into the IP_Addr parameter. This can be found in the machine by going into the Menu, down to
Instrument Controls, down to Communications and then to TCP/IP Settings. Record this IP
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0'Ap - 1 Field SOPv4-C-2 reformatted mak_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - 03 MONITORS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
address into the table, inputting similar to the serial number. Repeat for all analyzers being
calibrated.
It is important to make sure that unique IP addresses are entered for each analyzer connected to the
logger.
6.1.6 To begin an audit of a transfer machine, select the CalStart under the PS parameters and change
the logic to "true". This will begin a sequence that cycles through all six target levels
automatically. The sequence takes approximately 2 hours to run. A report can be generated
through an Access script loaded on to the Loggernet computer which can be accessed from any
of the other computers in the shop.
6.2 Adjusting the levels
6.2.1 If the transfer was found to be out of criteria, it is necessary to perform a full calibration. To do
so, connect the transfer as in steps 1 through 5, if not already connected. Once the parameters
are adjusted for the particular analyzer, first, turn the CalAdjust parameter to "true" under the
appropriate analyzer's setting. Next, turn on the CalStart parameter to "true". This performs an
automatic sequence that adjusts the Background and Coefficient variables. A report can be
generated through an Access script loaded on to the Loggernet computer which can be accessed
from any of the other computers in the shop.
Below are equations to check the accuracy of the analyzers.
Correct the PS averages to actual (observed average minus the y-intercept and divided by the
slope generated when the PS was certified).
actual =
^average reading- intercept^
slope
Calculate percent differences ( %A) and perform a regression analysis of the transfer averages
versus the 49PS values.
%A:
unknown — known
known
x 100
6.2.2 After 6 days, calculate the average for all 6 days from the printed reports.
Note: After completing the calibration, place the calibration
form, and 03 analyzer on the "ready to ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
Thermo Electron Corporation. 1997.Model 49C UV Photometric Analyzer Instrument Manual
P: ECM P CASTNET 4 - transitionQAPP 6.0Ap - 1 Field SOP.4-C-2 reformatted mak_MS.doc.\
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - 03 MONITORS
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
8.0 FIGURES
None
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P-CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP 4-C-2 reformatted mak MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
3. MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
I f /1/loo 1
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Calibration/Certification Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-3 reformaited.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. C. 3. MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of all mass flow controller (MFC) units to Clean Air Status and
Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of MFC units administered by the
CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
All MFCs are inspected and calibrated prior to site installation according to the procedure listed
in Section 6.0.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Lowflow [0.01 liters per minute (Lpm)-30.0 Lpm] MFC
BIOS DryCal® DC-Lite Flow Meter
BIOS DryCal® Nexus data logger/communications module
Balston filter
Latex flow tubing
Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
MFCs and power supplies are returned to the manufacturer for repair.
5.1.1 Maintenance
Clean the inlet screen and inspect the o-ring when performing a bench calibration.
Replace the o-ring if necessary.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Allow the DC-Lite/Nexus and the MFC to warm up for at least 30 minutes. Make sure DC-Lite
and Nexus are properly connected with the supplied electronic cable. Connect tubing from the
bottom nipple (outlet) of the DC-Lite to the Nexus.
6.2 Connect the tubing from the vacuum needle valves to the outflow side of the MFC station. Put a
Balston filter on the inflow side of the MFC, and connect tubing from this filter to the remaining
air boss of the Nexus. The DC-Lite inlet should remain open.
6.3 Attach a DVM to the voltage output terminals on the MFC display.
6.4 With the vacuum valves closed, check the zero on the MFC display. Adjust to zero if necessary.
Notice the voltage output under conditions of no flow.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - tiansition QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-3 refonmatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
6.5 Switch the MFC to full OPEN and adjust the needle valves wide open to allow full flow
through the system, and switch the MFC to AUTO to check that it can control flow. If it can,
switch the MFC back to full OPEN, and adjust the flow throughout the rest of the calibration
with the needle valves.
6.6 Adjust the flow (with the needle valves) so that the MFC display shows the expected level of
flow at which the instrument will be used [e.g., 1.50 Lpm for CASTNet eastern sites; 3.00 Lpm
for CASTNet western sites).
6.7 Measure this flow through the DC Lite/Nexus, obtaining an average of five good runs. Correct
this average to STP to get actual flow (as described in step 9) and compare with the MFC
display. If the actual flow differs from the MFC reading by more than 5%, the MFC span should
be adjusted (refer to the MFC manufacturer's manual for this procedure). If the MFC display is
within 5% of actual flow, continue with the calibration.
6.8 Generate a range of flows around the expected flow setting for that instrument. For MFCs to be
used at 1.5 Lpm, for example, do respective flows at 0.75, 1.00, 1.25, 1.50, 1.75, 2.00, and 2.25
Lpm. At each level of flow, record the MFC display, the voltage output, and the DC Lite/Nexus
measurement (average of five good runs) on the Mass Flow Data Form (Figure 2).
6.9 Record the ambient barometric pressure (P) in inches and temperature (T) in degrees Celsius
(°C) in the room. Correct each DC Lite/Nexus measurement to STP with the following
formula:
STP flow {LPM) = DC- Lite/ Nexus flow (LPM) x
29.92x(T + 273)
6.10 Perform a linear regression on the STP flow (independent variable) vs. the MFC display reading
(dependent variable). Record the y intercept, slope, and correlation coefficient. Calculate the
MFC display for whatever actual flow the instrument is to monitor (i.e., 1.5 Lpm for CASTNET
eastern sites).
y = mx + b
(where m = slope, b = y intercept, and x = STP flow)
6.11 If the MFC is being calibrated to be sent to a site, divide all the voltage output values by 5 (as
the 3260 does onsite), and perform a linear regression on actual flow versus this corrected
voltage. Record the y intercept, slope, and correlation coefficient. Calculate the DSM setting
for full scale and zero:
Full scale = (1.00 - b)
m
Zero = (0.00-b)
m
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\FieId SOP to be updated\4-C-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC. Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
6.12 Set the MFC to the calculate set point and measure this flow through the DC-Lite/Nexus,
obtaining an average of five good runs. If the actual flow differs from the desired reading by
more than 3%, then MFC must be re-calibrated.
After completing the calibration, place the calibration form, and MFC in a plastic bag and put
on the "ready to ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
BIOS International Corporation. 2001. DryCal® DC-Lite Manual,
http://www.biosint.com/pdfs/lite man b.PDF.
BIOS International Corporation. 2001. Operating Instructions DryCal® Nexus DC-Lite Accessory model
DCNS http://www.biosint.com/pdfs/nexus nss man.PDF
BIOS International Corporation. 2001. Operating Instructions DryCal® Nexus DC-Lite Accessory model
DCNL http://www.biosint.com/pdfs/nexus nsl man.PDF
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECMVP\CASTNET 4 - transilion\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
Figure 1: BIOS DRYCAL® DC-Lite
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-3 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
FIGURE 2:
| EnvironmertJl
|Sck*x*&
y Engineering. l»K.
FLOW CALIBRATION DATA FORM?
Site Name/Number:
MFC Mfg: :—
VPT > 2 o
Transfer MFM Mfg:
TVL /*+>
Transfer Last Calibration Date:,
Transfer MFM Calibration Slope:.
/.oz?y
. Site Location: tfuxiS, {//?.
MFC 10 Number:.
£>~Z~7 Ft*
Readout ID Number:.
MFM ID Number:
Ot,0 9'f
£> toi,r
ReadoutiONumben C?Q~7\ O
Intercept: O
TRANSFER FLOW
MFC
3260
-> •/ 3260L
Display
STP*
DISPLAY
VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
Leak Chock
.—.
o.o Ur
t.zr
0.-L5-V ¦
0,'zr?
i.ro
O.-3 02
<9.303
•l.?l
LIS
i.lT
0<1ST2
¦ O. JST3
1,QS~
/i-J 7
2.DO
o.uoX
0- YO J.
2,?o
?.U
2.zr
¦ o-vsz.
• OrYrz
Post CalBxa&M Check
/ 2.3 3
Intercept:.
Zero <= {0.00 - lntercept)/S!ope
- O. 02.? J
r2. J, QOQ Q
MFC Display for 1.50 jpm w?,00 Ipw:.
/. iT/
i. MFC Potentiometer Setting:..
Final3260Output = (
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - WETNESS SENSOR
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
4. WETNESS SENSOR
Effective Date:
l\/l/2voct
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
L
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - iransition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-4 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - WETNESS SENSOR
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. C. 4. WETNESS SENSOR
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the wetness sensor to Clean Air Status and Trends Network
(CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of wetness sensor units administered by the
CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
All wetness sensors received from the field are inspected, cleaned, and repaired if possible.
Test jacks allowing application of a standard resistance are permanently installed on all new
wetness sensors prior to use in the field.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Wetness sensor grid
Integrated circuit (IC) chips
Electronics tool kit including:
Soldering tool
Solder
Screwdriver
Wire cutters
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
Replace damaged grid by removing the nut on the inside of the sensor box, which secures the
grid support arm. Remove the grid wires from the circuit board. Remove the grid from the
support arm. Install a new grid using the reverse of this procedure. Replace any damaged IC
chips or calibration jack, which may cause the sensor to always indicate closed, or "on" output.
5.2 Maintenance
5.2.1 Clean and inspect the sensor grid. Adjust the grid angle to between 30° and 45° with respect to
the top edge of the sensor box.
5.2.2 Clean and inspect all solder joints and wire connections.
5.2.3 Clean and inspect the box lid seal, and replace if necessary.
5.2.4 Seal translator box with silicon sealant where the arm enters.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Installing a Test Jack
6.1.1 Disconnect wires from grid to board.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-4 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - WETNESS SENSOR
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
Note: It will be necessary to remove the nut from the grid arm to unscrew one side of the sensor card
from the box. When reinstalling the grid arm, set at a 45° angle to the box top.
6.1.2 Solder a short red wire (about 2 inches long) from the "sensor +" to the single tab on top of the
jack.
6.1.3 Solder a short black wire to the "sensor return" on the card. Solder the other end of the short
black wire and the black wire from the grid to the bottom tab of the jack.
6.1.4 Solder the red wire from the grid to the top tab on the side of the jack with two tabs.
Note: Use the heat sink on the jack tabs when soldering wires, as plastic on the jack melts easily. In
addition, ensure that the calibration jack hole in the faceplate is large enough for the jack to fit properly.
6.2 Sensor Calibration
6.2.1 Using a regulated direct current (DC) power supply and a 75-foot (ft) 4-conductor wire, connect
the red wire to "+" on the power supply, connect black wire to on the power supply, and the
white wire to the red terminal on the voltage meter. Connect the black banana plug from the
on the power supply to the on the voltage meter.
6.2.2 The red wire on the 4-conductor wire attaches to the "+ pwr" on the sensor card, the black wire
attaches to the "pwr refand the white wire attaches to "sig out." (See Figure 1.)
6.2.3 Set the voltage meter to volts DC (VDC), 20 V.
6.2.4 Wet the grid. The red light on the card should come on and register 1.000 V on the voltage
meter. Adjust the voltage potentiometer if necessary. Ensure that the calibration jack is not
plugged in. Record voltage at ON and OFF on a "Precipitation Data Form" (see III.A. Figure
12).
6.3 Testing the Calibration Jack
To test the calibration jack, push the test jack from the decade box into the test jack socket, and
set the decade box to 235 kQ (the light should come on). Set the decade box to 245 k£2 (the light
should go off). Adjust the sensitivity potentiometer, if necessary:
Grid wet should be ~ 1.0000 V.
OFF (dry) should be ~ 0.0000 V.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-4 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - WETNESS SENSOR
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition^QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-4 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Figure 1: Wetness Sensor Test Circuit
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - WETNESS SENSOR
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
DC Power Supply
set to 12v
Multimeter
TRANSLATOR
CARD
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2YField SOP to be updated\4-C-4 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - WETNESS SENSOR
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
9.0 APPENDICES
None.
P:\ECMyP\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Field SOP to be updated\4-C-4 reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
5. TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
it~
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP.4-C-5 final.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. C. 5. TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance and handling of the tipping bucket rain gauge to Clean Air Status and Trends
Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of tipping bucket rain gauge units
administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
All tipping bucket rain gauge units are calibrated prior to shipment, after repair, or upon receipt
from the manufacturer.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Texas Electronics Model 5251 or Climatronics Model 100508 tipping bucket rain gauge
Data logger
Cleaning materials
Multimeter
Graduated cylinder and separatory funnel both capable of measuring 231.5 milliliters water
Replacement reed switch
Freeze spray
Tool kit
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
If 5 volts direct current (VDC) is not registered at the reed switch, the CR3000 status terminals
P2 and Ground should be checked to verify if 5 VDC is being sent. If the 5 VDC is present at
the CR3000, a voltage break has occurred and should be traced line by line to the destination
until the break or bad spot is found.
5.1.1 Proximity Switch Replacement
See Enclosure #1 of the manufacturer's manual (included with every installation kit) (See
Figures 1 and 2).
5.2 Maintenance
Clean the internal bucket area with a firm brush and/or water to remove dirt build-up and
evidence of insects. (Spiders can stop the rocker arm from its rotation.)
5.2.1 Ensure the summer screen is not clogged; clean if needed with a firm brush and/or water.
5.2.2 Clean the funnel and ensure that the lower opening is not clogged.
P: ECM\P>CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ] Field SOP'4-C-5 final.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
5.2.3 Check the bull's eye level to ensure that it has not frozen and cracked the site glass. Replace if
necessary.
5.2.4 Check the proximity switch for +5 VDC.
5.2.5 Check the 120-volt (V) thermostat with freeze spray to activate the heat wrap.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Place the tipping bucket rain gauge in the white pan next to the sink at the calibration station.
6.2 Attach the proximity switch wires to the terminal strip on the wall labeled "tipping bucket
signal".
6.3 "Down" the precip channel on the PC200 software on the laptop located underneath the
datalogger by double clicking on the "false" value and double clicking again to change the
value to true. Remove the funnel and rotate the rocker arm assembly to each side five times.
This will give a 10-count total, or .10, for the manual check that will show up on the far right
hand column of the PC200 program to the right of Precip Check.
6.4 Measure 231.5 ml of water into a graduated cylinder. (This will equal .5 inch of rain.)
6.5 Pour the water into the separatory funnel (ensure the petcock is closed).
6.6 Reset the Precip Check value by toggling the precip_down value from false back to true. Then,
hold the separatory funnel over the precipitation bucket funnel and slowly open the petcock. As
the tipping bucket rocker arm assembly rotates, count the intervals in seconds. Each interval
should be approximately 13-15 seconds.
6.7 Allow the separatory funnel to dispense the 231.5-ml of water.
6.8 When the water is dispensed, record the value to the right of the Precip Check label.
6.9 A total of 0.50 ± 0.02, should be achieved.
6.10 For averages totaling 0.52 or more, a counter-clockwise adjustment of the rocker arm stops
must be made. Rotate the screws counter-clockwise to correct. One turn of these screws (360°)
will equal 2 tips. (Each screw will affect the adjustment 2 tips.)
6.11 For averages totaling 0.48 and below, a clock-wise adjustment must be made. A clockwise
rotation of either rocker arm stop of 360° equals 2 tips.
6.12 Repeat steps 4 through 11; when 0.50 ± 0.02 is achieved, the unit is calibrated. Both screws
should be adjusted by the same amount of turns.
6.13 Attach the calibration and maintenance form to the instrument, and place it on the "Ready to
Ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-5 final.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of6
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM-.P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-5 final.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
Figure 1. Model 525 Switch Conversion
MODEL 525 SWITCH CONVERSION
To Convert From The SI-112 Switch
To The SI-128 Hermetically Enclosed Reed Switch
Kit Contents:
I Each S1-I28 Switch, with adapter plate installed.
1 Each TS-101 Barrier Strip.
;2 Each No, 2 Spade Lugs,
2 Each Cable Ties
Mounting Tape
Instructions:
1. Remove the two 6-32 mounting screws that hold tipping bucket assembly inside
- the main housing.
2. Lift assembly out of housing.
3. Remove old switch and cut cable at the switch.
4. Mount new switch (Sl-128) in same mounting hole as old one.
5. Install two spade lugs supplied on end of old cable.
6. Attach switch wires and cable to terminal strip.
7. With mounting tape and cable ties, attach barrier strip to outside of main
bracket as shown,
8. Re-position switch and-magnet by loosening set screws in the two collars on
either side of tipping bucket. Set the gap between switch and magnet to
approximately 3/16", Leave at least 20-25 thousandths play between collars
and tipping bucket.
9. To check; Connect ohmmeter to end of cable and manually tip bucket back and
forth. Make sure switch closes when in the top center position and opens when
in the down position on both sides. If ij does not, adjust accordingly.
10. Re-install assembly in housing and check calibration, if necessary.
P:\ECM\FvCASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOFM-C-5 final.docxMACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - TIPPING BUCKET RAIN GAUGE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
Figure 2. Model 525 Switch Conversion Diagram
9.0 APPENDICES
None.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 -transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-5 {maliocMACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND DIRECTION
November 2009
Revision No. 3
Page 1 of 4
/ /
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
6. CLIMATRONICS
a. WIND DIRECTION
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
11 ' Ky^l<
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P: ECM P' CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - ] Field SOP.4-C-6-a reformattedM.lS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND DIRECTION
November 2009
Revision No. 3
Page 2 of 4
IV. C. 6. a. WIND DIRECTION
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance, handling, and calibration of the Climatronics F-460 wind direction sensor to Clean
Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNet) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance, handling, and calibration of Climatronics F-460 wind
direction sensor units administered by the CASTNet Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Climatronics F-460 wind direction sensors are calibrated upon receipt from the manufacturer
and at the request of field technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Climatronics F460 wind direction sensor
Multimeter
Data logger
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Insulated screwdriver
Allen wrench set
vacuum grease
wire cutters
24 and 22 gauge wire
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
5.1.1 Check the potentiometer using a Fluke multimeter by testing the resistance between pin #1 and
pin #3. The resistance should be approximately 10K ohms.
5.1.2 Test the resistor and fuse with the multimeter. The resistor should be approximately 2.34K
ohms, and the fuse should be approximately 0 ohms.
5.1.3 Replace the potentiometer, resistor, and fuse if necessary. Refer to the maintenance section for
the potentiometer replacement procedures.
5.2 Maintenance
5.2.1 Remove the sensor cover by pulling it toward the base with a slight twisting motion.
5.2.2 Loosen the setscrews in the potentiometer coupling with a 1/16 Allen key.
5.2.3 Remove the shaft that connects the potentiometer to the cap through the top of the sensor
column.
P:\ECM.P CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP 4-C-6-a rcformatiedMJS MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND DIRECTION
November 2009
Revision No. 3
Page 3 of 4
5.2.4 Remove the old bearing from the shaft and discard it.
5.2.5 Remove the two screws that secure the sensor support from the upper (column) portion of the
sensor.
5.2.6 De-solder the wires from the potentiometer, and (if fuse needs replacement) de-solder the fuse
from the sensor base.
5.2.7 Loosen the three retaining clamps that secure the potentiometer. Remove and discard the
potentiometer and fuse.
5.2.8 Install a new potentiometer by reversing the above steps. Solder the common (white and black
wire) to pin #1, the resistor to pin #2, and a new fuse to pin #3 as well as the sensor base.
5.2.9 Place the new bearing on the shaft and guide the shaft back into its hole from the top until the
bearing is seated.
5.2.10 Tighten the coupling set screws.
5.2.11 Inspect and replace any setscrews, fastening screws or o-rings that show signs of fatigue.
5.2.12 Lubricate the o-rings with vacuum grease.
5.2.13 Install the sensor cover, and cap if it was removed. Do not tighten the cap set screws until after
the calibration procedure.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1.1 Use the test data logger for values.
6.1.2 Place the sensor on the test stand pedestal with a clamp on the top of the shaft. The cap on the
top of the sensor, held two small hex screws, should be loose.
6.1.3 Set the wind direction wheel on top so that the half circle on the bottom of the wheel fits on the
other half circle on the sensor's top.
6.1.4 Turn the wheel to 270°. Rotate the shaft with pliers until the degrees read 270.
6.1.5 Tighten the set screws on the cap (top of the sensor). Record this value.
6.1.6 Turn the wheel counter-clockwise to 180°. Record this value.
6.1.7 Turn wheel counter-clockwise to 90° (this setting is East 1). Record this value.
6.1.8 Turn wheel counter-clockwise to 0° (North). Record this value.
6.1.9 Turn wheel clockwise back to 90° (this setting is East 2). Record this value.
6.1.10 The readings must agree with the wheel to within ± 3° at all points. If not replace the
potentiometer (see maintenance section).
6.1.11 Remove the sensor from the test stand.
6.1.12 Attach the calibration form to the sensor and place them on the "Ready to Ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
Climatronics Corporation. Climatronics F460 Ten Meter Meteorological Monitoring System Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
P: ECM P',CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-a reformattedMJS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND DIRECTION
November 2009
Revision No. 3
Page 4 of 4
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. 1, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol.11, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
None
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P: ECM P CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-6-a refoimattedM.IS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND SPEED
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 4
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C SITE INSTRUMENTATION
6. CLIMATRONICS
b. WIND SPEED
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECMP\CASTNHT 4 - transition QAPP 6.0-Ap - 1 Field SOP 4-C-6-b ref'ormattedMJS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND SPEED
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 4
IV. C. 6. b. WIND SPEED
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance, handling, and calibration of the Climatronics F-460 wind speed sensor to Clean
Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory
personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the calibration, maintenance, and handling and calibration of Climatronics
F-460 wind speed sensor units administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration
Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Climatronics F-460 Wind Speed Sensors are calibrated upon receipt from the manufacturer and
at the request of field technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Climatronics F-460 wind speed sensor
Climatronics power supply
Digital multimeter
Factory certified synchronous motor
Data logger
Screwdriver
Vacuum grease
Thread-locking compound
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Wire cutters
24 and 22 gauge wire
Spare screws and o-rings
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
5.1.1 Set a multimeter to read hertz, connect the red lead to PI and the black lead to the logger ground
where the green/yellow wire is connected.
5.1.2 Set the sensor on the test fixture with the sensor cover removed.
5.1.3 Install the synchronous motor and turn at 2100 rpm.
5.1.4 Adjust the potentiometer on the sensor circuit board until the multimeter reads 1050Hz
5.1.5 If this cannot be accomplished replace the sensor circuit board.
5.2 Maintenance
P:\ECM P CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-b reformatted MJS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CL1MATRONICS - WIND SPEED
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 4
5.2.1 Remove the sensor cap and the sensor cover.
5.2.2 Remove the two screws that secure the circuit board to the sensor.
5.2.3 Remove the top two Phillips head screws from the sensor support. This will allow the sensor to
be separated into two portions.
5.2.4 Remove the retainer clip, spacer(s), and bearing from the tip of the shaft.
5.2.5 Remove the shaft assembly from the upper portion of the sensor from the chopper wheel end of
the shaft.
5.2.6 Replace the lower shaft bearing and reinstall the shaft assembly into the sensor.
5.2.7 Reinstall the circuit board and internal support (use service removable, thread-locking
compound on the support screws).
5.2.8 Replace the upper bearing, spacer(s), and retainer clip.
5.2.9 Reinstall the sensor cap and secure the setscrews.
5.2.10 Inspect and replace any setscrews, fastening screws, and o-rings that show signs of fatigue.
5.2.11 Lubricate the o-rings with vacuum grease.
5.2.12 Replace the sensor cover.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Use the test station Data Acquisition System (DAS).
6.2 Mount the wind speed sensor on the test stand without the shaft holder on top, using the set
screws at the bottom of the sensor to ensure a secure mount.
6.3 Slip the synchronous motor holder over the sensor, then attach the synchronous motor to the
holder and sensor. Use the slow speed motor for the 100 rotations per minute (rpm) range.
6.3.1 Using a multimeter, attach the red lead to PI and the black lead to the logger ground where the
green/yellow wire is connected.
6.3.2 Set the voltmeter to hertz (Hz).
6.4 Turn on the motor and set to 100 rpm. Allow m/s to become steady (frequencies will jump
around). Average the low and high frequency reading, then record this value on the Wind speed
Calibration form.
6.5 Record the m/s on the Wind speed Calibration form.
6.6 Remove slow speed synchronous motor and install standard synchronous motor.
6.7 Repeat above steps for 200, 300, 400, 800, and 1800 rpms.
6.8 At slower rpm (up to 200 rpm), output values must be within 0.2 m/s of the equivalent wind
speed. At wind speed test points above 5 m/s, the sensor accuracy must be better than ±3%.
6.9 After calibration, attach the calibration form to the sensor, and place it on the "Ready to Ship"
shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
Climatronics Corporation. Climatronics F460 Ten Meter Meteorological Monitoring System Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
P:\ECM PCASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-b refonnattedMJS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - WIND SPEED
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 4
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatoiy Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
None
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transit ionQAPP 6.0'Ap - I Field SOP4-C-6-b reformattedM.lS_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRON1CS - TEMPERATURE/DELTA TEMPERATURE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
1 of 5
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
6. CLIMATRONICS
c. TEMPERATURE/DELTA TEMPERATURE
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-6-c reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - TEMPERATURE/DELTA TEMPERATURE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 2 of 5
IV. C. 6. c. TEMPERATURE/ DELTA TEMPERATURE
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
calibration, maintenance, and handling of the Climatronics temperature/delta temperature
sensors to Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration
Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the calibration, maintenance, and handling of Climatronics
temperature/delta temperature sensors units administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment
Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Temperature sensors utilized at Climatronics sites are blank R.M. Young RTD probes modified
for use at Climatronics sites. The modification consists of the addition of a Bulgin water-tight
connector applied directly to the probe leads. These probes are modified and calibrated upon
receipt. Once deployed, they are calibrated at the request of field technicians. Repairs and
maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
R.M. Young RTD Temperature probe Configured for Climatronics Site
Multimeter
Data logger
Certified NIST traceable Dostmann Precision Digital Thermometer with Probe
Magnetic stir plate
Magnetic stirrer
Device to heat water > 50.0 C°
Water
Ice
Insulated vessel large enough to accommodate temperature probes, with fitted lid
Small screwdriver
Temperature iForm
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
Using a certified DVM check the sensor resistance. Each probe should read between 998.5 and
1001.5 ohms. If within the specified resistance range the probe will calibrate properly. If not the
probe may not calibrate properly in which case return probe to the manufacturer for repair or
replacement. Clean probe and probe body.
P:\HCM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-6-c reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CL1MATRONICS - TEMPERATURE/DELTA TEMPERATURE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 3 of 5
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION
6.1 Connect the sensors to the CR3000 calibration station.
6.2 Crush ice and make ice water bath in large cooler cup. Insert magnetic stirrer to bottom of the
cup and place the cup on the stirring device. Turn the stirring device to setting 3 or 4 making
sure the magnetic stirrer is in the center of the cup. Place the Styrofoam lid with holes for
thermometer and probes on the cup. Insert the Temperature Primary Dostmann Electronic
Precision Digital Thermometer (PDT) probe into center hole of the lid with the black ring at
water level. Insert the probes to the same depth.
6.3 Allow the temperature to stabilize. Record the temperature in engineering units as output by the
DAS in one of the columns of the "Temperature Data Logger Output" columns of the AS LEFT
section of the temperature iForm. Record the Primary PDT output as displayed on its LCD in
the iForm in the RTD column of the AS LEFT section of the iForm.
6.4 Make another bath without ice using aliquots of hot and cold water to adjust the temperature.
Use magnetic stirrer as above and insert probes. Insert the Primary PDT. Record data on iForm
as above.
6.5 Repeat the calibration procedure above using water baths at the following temperatures:
6.6 -10° C
6.7 -20° C
6.8 -30° C
6.9 -40° C
6.10 -50° C
6.11 Inspect the iForm for computed rho and alpha values for the probe(s). The Temperature iForm
will flag these values if not within specification. If the probes meet specification continue.
6.12 Print two copies of the Temperature iForm for each probe. Place the probe in a sealing bag with
one certification form and place on the ready to ship shelf.
6.13 File the remaining iForm copy in the instrument file by Property I.D. number.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiorAQAPP 6.0\Ap - i Field SOP.4-C-6-C reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - TEMPERATURE/DELTA TEMPERATURE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 4 of 5
7.0 REFERENCES
R.M. Young Company. Model 41342/41372 Temperature Probe Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. 11, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-c reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - TEMPERATURE/DELTA TEMPERATURE
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 5 of 5
Figure 1: Temperature/Relative Humidity Data Form
/ MACTEC
Temperature
Site M:umr
("alibi -ltd
Calibration Pale
Data Logger
iKorms Ver.
MACTEC099
RSM
11/33/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:489 - Campbell 3000 ID:489
1.1.0.0
.-Trr^Tiv1 :
2 Meter (TO
As Found
As Left
As Found
As Left
ilBllillllll
:07334: '
' i. .
RTD
Manufacturer
R.M.Young
Model
43347
Ro
1000.08
0.00375
Translator Tjpe
Transfer Sfcmdard
ID#
Manufacturer
Modd
Date of Last Cert.
Correction ]
"actors
it® ft
10°
20°
30?
illfl
50°
0.00
0.00
0.00
O.OO
0.00
0.00
~^^^M^^Trmpgratur^T72m)"Ou^u^"
Shelter Temperature
Temperature
1Qm) Output
Delta T.
Corrected
rerop, c°q
;
Corrected
Temp. (('C)
Diff (*C)
Corrected
Diff l°C)
Rfw
Temp. f'C]
erected
V :?&>#;}£;
Temp; i?C};
Diff (°C)
Corrected.
Diff pcjv
Diff (0C).
Temp. fC) Diff iX\.
i\'. . !l
1
i'unpiMPiu Output
RTD 1 Ci
Temperature
10ml Output
Temperature 2 (2m) Output
D«.ltn 1
5he(ter Temperature
Uncorrected
Temp. pC)
Correction
Factor
Corrected
Temp (°C)
Raw
Temp fC)
Corrected
Temp; (°C}
Raw
Diff (°C)
Corrected-
Diff (PC)
Raw
Temp. pC)
•.Corrected:
Temp, (?.c)
R5W !:V
• Diff{°C)
Coifeeted
Oiff {^C}
Diff t®C)
Temp. ?C\
' 't I
^ O.co ;
0.00
0.00
Ti': 0.(32
0.00
0.02
0.00
: :io.oo:
0.00
10.00
10,04
10.02
0.04
0.02
20.00
0.00
20.00
20.11-
20.09
0.11
0.09
• :';'30^00:. •
0.00
30.00
29.92
29.89
-0.08
-0.11
;;>'4O-0pA:V
0.00
40.00
40.14
40.11
0.14
0.11
C 50.00 :
0.00
50.00
50,03
50.00
0.03
0.00
LAB CALIBRATION: Primary Standard: Dostmann Electronic P655 SN 65507072328, ID#06499, Probe Model 6000-1018, SNP100 080224. Annual Cerification 11/21/2008.
Reviewd By:
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-c reformatted RSM_MS.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 1 of 11
IV. CALIBRATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
6. CLIMATRONICS
d. RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
/ //1/2oc> 7
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
/I \Cp^LdJlf
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition.QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 2 of 11
IV. C. 6. d. RELATIVE HUMIDITY
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
calibration, maintenance, and handling of the Climatronics relative humidity (RH) sensors to
Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory
personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the calibration, maintenance, and handling of Climatronics RH sensor units
administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Climatronics RH sensors are calibrated upon receipt from the manufacturer and at the request of
field technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Vaisala Model HMP50 UAB1A1A RH sensor equipped with Bulgin PX041/04S/4550
connector.
Data logger
Vaportron H100CL Precision Humidity Laboratory or Aqueous saturated salts
(Note: use salts only as a last resort)
Insulated screwdriver
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Small flashlight
Plastic storage bag
Indicating silica gel - spherical, mesh grade 48
Kimwipes®
Wire cutters
Sonic cleaner
Deionized (DI) water
Alcohol
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
Inoperative sensors are returned to the manufacturer for repair or replacement. Upon receipt the
sensors are calibrated using the procedure described in Section 6.0.
5.2 Maintenance
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP.4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 3 of 11
5.2.1 Clean the removable filter in the sonic cleaner with DI water.
5.2.2 Clean the sensor if necessary with DI water or alcohol.
5.2.3 Cut and trim the sensor wires as necessary.
5.2.4 Replace damaged or suspect inline cable connector. See Figure 4, item 7/K for wiring pin-out.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Vaportron H100CL Series Precision Humidity Laboratory
6.1.1 Check the desiccant cartridge located on back of the unit; the indicating silica gel must be a blue
color above the red line on the cartridge. If the indicating silica gel is pink at or below the red
line on the cartridge please refer to the Vaportron maintenance SOP IV.A.5. for instructions on
changing indicating silica gel.
6.1.2 Check the water level by lifting up on cap end of cartridge and looking into the large window
near the left desiccant hanger hook. Use a small flashlight to locate the water level. The water
level must be between the lower and upper red lines on the fill level decal. If the water level is
not between the lines, refer to the Vaportron maintenance SOP for instructions on water level
service procedure [see attached photos (Fig. 1A and IB)].
6.1.3 Turn the POWER on (lower left). The RH LCD (center top) and TEMPERATURE displays
should come on and read the approximate room conditions.
6.1.4 Set the TEMPERATURE display using the up or down arrows to 22.5 degrees Celsius (°C).
6.1.5 Set the RH LCD display using the up or down arrows to the first test point of 10.0% RH.
6.1.6 Obtain a Temperature/RH Data form and record the serial numbers of the sensor.
6.1.7 Install the sensor into the appropriate port on the Vaportron. Lightly tighten the port fitting to
hold the port plug securely in door.
6.1.8 Attach the inline connector on the RH Probe to the inline connector on the calibration bench.
6.1.9 Turn the CONTROL switch on. A faint, high-pitched sound will indicate the proper operation
of the air circulator fan inside the chamber. The Vaportron displays should begin to ramp
toward the values that were set. Normally, the RH and temperature readings will stabilize within
2 to 5 minutes.
6.1.10 Let the RH sensor equilibrate for one hour at the set point and then record the output from the
Vaportron RH controller and the DAS system on the calibration form.
6.1.11 Set the RH LCD display using the up arrow to the next point of 30.0% RH and repeat step 12.
6.1.12 Repeat step 12 for set point of 50.0%, 70.0%, 85%, 95%.
6.1.13 After completion of the final point, loosen the aluminum port fitting on the door and remove the
Climatronics sensor from the chamber. Install the yellow port plug and set the RH LCD display
using the down arrow to 50.0% RH. Let the unit run for 5 minutes at this setting.
6.1.14 Turn the CONTROL switch off, and then turn the POWER off (lower left).
6.1.15 Check that the calibration form is completed (see the Vaportron sample form, Figure 2). Have
the Calibration Laboratory Manager review and sign the calibration form. After review, place
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 4 of 11
the form, sensor and translator in a plastic bag and put them in the appropriate box on the
"ready to ship" shelf.
6.2 Aqueous Saturated Salts [NOTE: Use only as a last resort.]
Note: Take care not to contaminate the probe or the sensor support cap
with salt solution. If this happens, see Section 5.1, Repair.
6.2.1 Obtain a Temperature/RH Data form and record the serial numbers of the translator and sensor.
(Note: The translator and sensor are a matched system and must be kept together.)
6.2.2 Install the RH translator in the slot marked RH in the Climatronics test mainframe and plug the
RH sensor into the corresponding test cable.
6.2.3 Turn the Climatronics test mainframe power supply on using the power switch.
6.2.4 Check the data acquisition system (DAS) for an output from the sensor with translator card
switch in the OPER position.
6.2.5 Turn translator card switch to the ZERO position and check DAS system for an output of 0.000
volts direct current (VDC). Adjust the zero potentiometer to achieve 0.000 VDC, if needed.
6.2.6 Turn the translator card switch to the SPAN position. Check the DAS for an output of 1.000
VDC. Adjust the span potentiometer to achieve 1.000 VDC, if needed.
6.2.7 Return the translator card switch to the OPER position.
6.2.8 Using a Climatronics sensor support cap, insert the Climatronics RH sensor 1 inch into the
rubber grommet.
6.2.9 Starting with MgCl2 (32.8%) salt solution, lightly swirl the solution of DI water and salt. Screw
the Climatronics sensor support cap and sensor onto the bottle. Place bottle/sensor in the blue
bottle caddy.
6.2.10 Let the Climatronics RH sensor equilibrate for 2 hours at the set point, then record the output
from the DAS system on the proper calibration form.
6.2.11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for salt solutions of: Mg (N03)2 (52.9%), NaCl (75.3%), and KN03
(93.6%).
6.2.12 After completion of the final point, remove the RH sensor from the Climatronics sensor support
cap, wipe the sensor with a clean Kimwipe® and install a clean filter.
6.2.13 Check that the calibration form is completed (see sample form, Figure 3). And have the
Calibration Laboratory Manager review and sign the form. After review, place the form, sensor,
and translator in a plastic bag and put them in the appropriate box on "the ready to ship" shelf.
6.3 Six week certification update procedure
6.3.1 Perform calibration steps 6.1 through 6.1.10. Record Vaportron H100CL and Vaisala RH
Probe response to target set-points of 10%, 50% and 90%.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-tiOTsition\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP 4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 5 of 11
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
Climatronics Corporation. Climatronics F460 Ten Meter Meteorological Monitoring System Manual
8.0 FIGURES
P: ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP 4-C-6-d reformatted RSM MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 6 of 11
Figure 1A. Vaportron H-100CL
Vaportron H-100CL Front Panel
REAR PANEL WITH DESICCANT CARTRIDGE CORRECTLY INSTALLED
P:\ECM\P CASTNET 4 - transition'\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP 4-C-6-d reformatted RSM MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 7 of 11
Figure IB. Water Gauge Window Location
WATER GUAGE WINDOW LOCATION
GUAGE DECAL DETAIL
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition'.QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRONICS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
: 8 of 11
Figure 2. Relative Humidity Sample Form for Vaportron
Qitr*
TEMPERATURE/RELATIVE HUMIDITY DATA FORM
Site Name/Number: QST /le^
DSM 3260 SM:
.Site Location: I* ^ Fi
DSM 3260L S/N:.
tG-m Sensor 6
TEMPERATURE 2.m SenSorS/
>/N: Translator S/N:
N: f
RTO Temp. Ze
S/N: T(»mn, Rn
ro' /
iTemp. Zero:
iTerrsp. Span:
/
arr /
/¦
THERMOMETER
READING (°G)
Uncorrected Corrected
OAS TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
DAS ATgMFfERATURE OUTPUT
3260 Voitage
3260L Voltage
Temp. {°C}
326£u¥oftage
3260L Voftage
'Temp. (°C)
f. i
RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
Sensor S/N
Transfer S/
• JUDDiO^ Oooc-i
translator S/N:
JOODK) * rt/wO
N:
GTL
SALT
EQUIVALENT
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Otfs DAS OUTPUT
3260 Voltage
3260L Voltage
% Rel. Hum.
iSfe33/8%
3D °l %
I
7
5*a.^ %
o.sy*
t
^33%
\
\
is 3%
a.TSif
\
IT. 1 7n
)
)
33. t %
c>.«m
/
11.1%
/
/
t
Remarks:
Ten^p. Se.'tf • wj
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRON1CS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 9 of 11
Figure 3. Sample Form for Salts
TEMPERATURE/RELATIVE HUMIDITY DATA FORM
Site Name/Number: QST -
DSM 3260 S/N:
, Site Location: Ft-
DSM 3260L S/N: ftlloW
RELATIVE
HUMIDITY
TEMPERATURE
10-m Sensor S
2-m Sensor S/t
M:
Translators
/N:
«J:
RTD Temp. Zer
S/N- Te»mr> <5n.
cv Atftmn 7cm-
*rv A
Temp. Span:
THERMOMETER
READING (°C)
Uncorrected Corr&cled
DAS TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
JJA^aTEMPERATURE output
3260 Voltage
3260L Voltage
Temp.pzf
3260 Voltage
3260L Vol! age
Temp. (°C)
y >1
y
y
Sensor S/N: Coi^
Translator S/N; C>o\3M
Transfer S/N- Of/,C»"2- Translator 7em/Span: <3• 00$//• OOP
O.WvtroK.-cS
GTL
SALT
EQUIVALENT
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
DAS OUTPUT
3260 Voltage
3260 L Voltage
% Rel Hum.
oiA
33 ,<8%
o.HCH —
4o. l
/
J
%>
0..S-.3O
T3.0%
\
M1
75.3%
\
0-
lL.^%
/
Kuo>
J
0-9 H2
/
/
Remarks: S&f "F.^e
S^tVcW o\^"T
mnskfb^-
Periormad by: Date: H~ I - Calibrated: JkTU
Reviewed by: ^ Date: Audi{ed: ~
WHITE: Site File YELtOW; OST P!«K:£PA Cr/toot? t&aa*
P:\ECM\P\CASTNHT 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CL1MATRON1CS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 10 of]1
Figure 4. Climatronics 9 meter Met Wiring with Vaisala RH Probe Pinout
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ! Field SOP\4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
SITE INSTRUMENTATION - CLIMATRON1CS - RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Revision No. 4
November 2009
Page 11 of 11
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-6-d reformatted RSM_MS .docx MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Climatronics Solar Radiation
Revision No. 3
November 2009
Page 1 of 1
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
6. CLIMATRONICS
e. SOLAR RADIATION
This SOP has been retired.
P: \ECMP \CASTNET 4 - transition \QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP \4-C-6-e Retired. docxMACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 1 of 8
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
7. R.M. YOUNG
a. WIND DIRECTION
Effective Date:
'/A*
o
1
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by: Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Approved by: Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Calibration Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
A?J>
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - lransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP lo be updated\4-C-7-a reformaued.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 2 of 8
IV. C. 7. a. R.M. Young - Wind Direction
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance, handling, and calibration of the R.M. Young Wind Monitor model AQ wind
direction sensor (AQ) to Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment
Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance, handling, and calibration of AQ wind direction sensor
units administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
Wind direction sensors are calibrated upon receipt from the manufacturer and at the request of
field technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Wind direction sensor and translator card
Multimeter
Data logger
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Insulated screwdriver
Allen wrench set
vacuum grease
wire cutters
24 and 22 gauge wire
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Remove potentiometer coupling on top of the AQ. Remove the thumbwheel.
5.2 Take the cover off the terminal housing. Unscrew the terminal bracket. (For the new model, just
remove the wires from the terminal.)
5.3 Cut the wires close to the terminal, then de-solder the wires from the terminal.
5.4 Remove the transducer from the shaft.
5.5 Remove the old bearings (two) and replace with new ones.
5.6 Unscrew the top of the transducer, and push out the old potentiometer. Remove the shaft
extender, and discard the old potentiometer.
5.7 Put the shaft extender on the new potentiometer.
5.8 Using the modified ty-wrap (with the hole on the end) as a tool, pull the potentiometer wires
through the bottom of the transducer housing. Screw the transducer and housing back together,
coating the threads and bottom where the wires come through with silicon sealant.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-a refonnatted.doex
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 3 of 8
5.9 Insert the ty-wrap through the hole at the top of the terminal housing and pull the wires through,
placing the transducer back on the top of the unit. Using the R.M. Young gauge, set the distance
between the transducer and the housing to 0.5 mm. Tighten the set screws.
5.10 Set the distance between the thumbscrew and the transducer to 0.030 inch using a feeler gauge.
Tighten the set screws.
5.11 Place the potentiometer coupling on top of the thumbscrew, but do not tighten (this will be done
during calibration).
5.12 Solder the wires to the terminal block as shown on Figure 1. (For the models with serial
numbers 28000 and above, just connect to the terminal strip.)
5.13 Solder a small lug to the end of the small red wire.
5.14 Screw the terminal strip back onto the terminal housing, slipping the lug with the small red wire
under one of the mounting screws.
5.15 Replace the housing cover. The unit is now ready for calibration.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Installation/Setup
6.1.1 Loosen the potentiometer coupling on top of the wind unit.
6.1.2 Mount on the vane angle bench stand.
6.1.3 Set the vane, aligning the potentiometer coupling to the back. (Note: It will click when properly
in place.)
6.1.4 Loosen the V-support and drop it down so it doesn't hamper the movement of the vane.
6.1.5 Torque test the AQ by setting the torque gauge on the top with the pivot point of the sensor and
gauge aligned, and gently pull the string to one side and then to the other side. Apply enough
force to move the vane. The gauge should not exceed 10 grams per centimeter (g/cm). Be sure
that wind currents in the room do not influence this procedure.
6.1.6 Raise the V-support to firmly hold the vane, and tighten the thumbscrew.
6.2 Calibration
6.2.1 Turn DAS to Channel 2.
6.2.2 Each wind AQ must have a matched translator card. Attach the translator card to the power
supply and a 75-ft four-conductor wire which connects the sensor, as shown in Figures 2 and 3.
6.2.3 Turn on the power supply.
6.2.4 Disconnect the WD SIG (green wire) on the translator card. The voltage output should be
0.986. Adjust the azimuth (AZ) potentiometer on translator card, if necessary. This is the full-
scale voltage, and is the first point checked and recorded in the Vane Direction column of the
data form. '
6.2.5 Turn the vane to 180° as indicated by the calibration disk. Reach inside the vane (where the
nosecone would attach to the vane) and turn the potentiometer coupling thumbwheel until the
voltage reads 0.500 volts direct current (VDC) on the multimeter. Tighten the set screw on the
potentiometer coupling. If the voltage changes while doing this, remove the vane from the wind
AQ; remove the potentiometer coupling; remove the thumbwheel; revolve it slightly. Reset the
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - fransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - J Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-a reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 4 of 8
thumbwheel with a 0.030-inch feeler gauge. Reset the potentiometer coupling (without
tightening). Replace the vane and repeat the procedure to set the thumbwheel to 0.500 VDC at
180°.
6.2.6 Revolve the vane to 90°. The voltage should read 0.250 VDC. Record this information on the
data form. Multiply the voltage by 360 to convert the output to degrees.
6.2.7 Swing the vane to 180° (south). Record the voltage and degrees as above.
6.2.8 Turn the vane to 270° (west). Record the voltage and degrees as above.
6.2.9 Turn the vane to 355°. Record the voltage and degrees (it should read -0.986 VDC).
6.2.10 Slowly revolve the vane toward 360° (north). When voltage drops to near zero, this is the
crossover point. Record the voltage (it should be approximately 0.006 VDC) and position
(degrees) on the vane stand.
6.2.11 The recorded output should not exceed ±2% of the desired values.
6.2.12 After completing the calibration, place the sensor, translator card, and calibration form into a
plastic bag, and place the bag on the "Ready to Ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
Climatronics Corporation. Climatronics F460 Ten Meter Meteorological Monitoring System Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol.1, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-a reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 5 of 8
Figure 1. R.M. Young Wind Monitor (model AQ) Terminal Block (Serial Numbers below 28000)
R.M. Young Wind Monitor (model AQ) Terminal Block (Serial Numbers 28000 and above)
SPARE
WSREF
AZ REF
AZ SIG
AZ EXC
WS SIG
oooooo
~ O O ~ 0 ~
/
Small Red
Big Black
Small Black
Green
White
Biq Red
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-a reformaited.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 6 of 8
Figure 2. R.M. Young Wind R.M. Young Wind Monitor (model AQ) Wiring Diagram (Serial Numbers
below 28000)
12v Power Supply
& DAS
i
4-cond.
1 2 3 4 5
Translator
Card
T3
2
75*
4-cortd.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - J Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-a refonnatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 7 of 8
Figure 3. R.M. Young Wind R.M. Young Wind Monitor (model AQ) Wiring Diagram (Serial Numbers
28000 and above)
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\OAPP 6.0\Ap - / Field SOP to be itpdaied\4-C-7-a reformatted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. YOUNG WIND DIRECTION
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 8 of 8
Figure 4. R.M. Young Wind Monitor Cable and Wiring Diagram Model 05103V/05305V/05701V
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - trans\tion\QAPP 6.(Mp - J Field SOP to be updaied\4-C-7-a reformalted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 1 of 7
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
7. R.M. YOUNG
b. WIND SPEED
Effective Date:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 Purpose
2.0 Scope
3.0 Summary
4.0 Materials and Supplies
5.0 Repair and Maintenance
6.0 Calibration Procedure
7.0 References
8.0 Figures
9.0 Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature: .
A7J
And*v
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 5.2\Fie!d SOP to be updated\4-C-7-b refonnattted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 2 of 7
IV. C. 7. b. R.M. YOUNG WIND SPEED
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
maintenance, handling, and calibration of the R.M. Young wind speed sensor to Clean Air
Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the calibration, maintenance, and handling and calibration of R.M. Young
wind speed sensor units administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration
Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
R.M. Young Wind Speed Sensors are calibrated upon receipt from the manufacturer and at the
request of field technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
R.M. Young wind speed sensor and translator card
R.M. Young power supply
Scopemeter- oscilloscope/ multimeter integrated test tool
Factory certified synchronous motor
Data logger
Screwdriver
Vacuum grease
Thread-locking compound
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Wire cutters
24 and 22 gauge wire
Spare screws and o-rings
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Coil
5.1.1 Remove junction box cover to expose terminal block, unscrew terminal block from housing and
cut the two larger wires (black and red).
5.1.2 Unscrew the two set screws at the base of the coil which hold it to the transducer assembly and
remove.
5.1.3 Unscrew the wind direction potentiometer from the top of the coil (these two pieces are sealed
with silicon sealant, so it may be slightly difficult to unscrew).
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transuion\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP (o be updated\4-C-7-b reformaitted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 3 of7
5.1.4 Slide a modified ty-wrap with a hole in the end up through the new coil, and pull the
potentiometer wires back through the coil. Then screw the potentiometer back onto the coil
housing, applying some silicon sealant to the threads.
5.1.5 Slide the modified ty-wrap up through the back of the terminal block housing and pull all the
wires into the terminal block housing. Apply some silicone sealant to the base of the coil, set it
onto the base of the transducer assembly, spacing it with the large round end of the RM Young
spacing tool (0.5mm) and reset the two set screws.
5.1.6 Re-solder the two wires back onto the terminal block. (Solder onto the back of the terminal
block)
5.1.7 Screw the terminal block back into the housing and replace the cover.
5.2 Nose Cone
5.2.1 Remove prop nut (if present).
5.2.2 Remove magnet on top of nose cone with 1/16 inch alien wrench, and cap front bearing (plastic
ring). Pull shaft out and remove bearings on either side of nose cone housing.
5.2.3 Install new bearings (they will only fit in one way).
5.2.4 Replace cap front bearing (it will only fit in one way) on top of nose cone housing.
5.2.5 Replace shaft and prop nut.
5.2.6 Replace magnet on other side of housing. Set gap with small end (0.5 mm) of R.M. Young gap
tool.
5.2.7 Be sure the O-ring is in place (up inside the housing behind the magnet).
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 Turn scopemeter to channel 3.
6.2 Attach nose/cone assembly to vane. Be careful not to cross-thread.
6.3 Attach synchronous motor drive unit to vane.
6.4 Record voltage to zero with the synchronous motor turned to OFF. Voltage should read 0.004
VDC. This reading may be lowered by adding resistors (which remain with the translator card
when installed in the field).
6.5 Turn the motor ON and set at 1800 rotations per minute (rpm). Voltage should read 0.176 VDC.
Adjust the wind speed potentiometer on the translator card, if necessary.
6.6 Turn the motor speed to 200 rpm. Record voltage and multiply by 50 for an output of meters per
second (m/s). Perform this step for each of the following speeds:
Note: Output measurement cannot be off by more than 0.2 m/s at
speeds <5.0 m/s.
6.7 Remove the synchronous motor drive unit and attach the slow speed synchronous motor drive
unit.
6.8 Set synchronous motor for 100 rpm and record the response as above.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - iransiiioti\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-b reformattted.doex
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 4 of 7
6.9 The equivalent wind speed multiplier is determined by the serial number of the propeller being
used in the field. If the serial number is 53404, or greater multiply the rpm by 0.00512. If the
serial number is less than 53404, multiply the rpm by 0.0049.
6.10 Nose Cone Torque Test
See R.M. Young manual (See Figure 1-3).
7.0 REFERENCES
R.M. Young Company. Model 05305 Wind Monitor AQ Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - ! Field SOP to be updated\4-C~7-b refonnatited.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 5 of 7
Figure 1. Approximate Propeller/Cup Wheel Torque versus Wind Speed
<&)
Ld
3
o
a:
O
x
s
Ol
Z>
o
a.
o
a:
a
—H-f
—H-f
// /
// /
' /
' A/ /
/
/
' / >/-
/
/
h
A
/
'!
/
/
/
/
c
•-
4-i
L
i
/
f
/
f
-
/
/
/
/
t
v
t
/
/
/
/
7
/
/
/
' /
t
/
y
VSNV
V s
//.
i
/
/
//
/
'"•s
//
/ /
/ /
!/
/
:) f>.s oe oj oao.9 i 2 3
WIND SPEED - meters/second
APPROXIMATE
PROPELLER/CUPWHEEL TORQUE
VS. WIND SPEED
NEAR THRESHOIO/NON-ROTATING
T = kU5 U = fT/k
T=T0RQUE gm—err,
U=WIND SPEED meters/second
k=CONSTANT
No, 08274 22 x 30 cm
PROPELLER - GRAY EPS
No. 08254 20 x 30 cm
PROPELLER - GRAY CFT
No. 08234 18 x 30 cm
PROPELLER - BLACK PP
No. 12170C
CUPWHEEL -
10Ocrn
BLACK PP
No. 03110 WIND SENTRY
CUPWHEEL
k
5.0
3.8
2.4
1.4
1.0
M00ZIS 183W 1 &3J2
CWC A
PRO 0J-SS
TCH00E DISC
0WH XL
0WG 07- 96
CHK%1,
OTRQCHRT
R.M. YOUNG CO. TRAVERSE OTY. Ml 49686 U.$.A,v$J6-$4$-39dQ
:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - iransition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to beupdated\4-C-7-b refonnattted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 6 of 7
Figure 2. Typical Torque Values
R. M. YOUNG COMPANY
TYPICAL TORQUEVALUES
For Checking Anemometer Bearing and Transducer Condition
'New Instrument
:Max torque for
threshold of:
Instrument (Standard Models)
Sensor
Transducer
Torque Threshold
gm-cm m/s
0.5 m/s
gm-cm
1.0 m/s
gm-cm
03101-5 Wind Sentry Anemometer
03110
AC Coil
0,3
0.5
0.3
1.0
05103 Wind Monitor
08234
AC Coil
2.4
1.0
2.6
05106 WindMonHor-MA
08234
AC Coil
2.6
1,0
2.6
05305 Wind Monitor-AQ
08254
AC Coil
0,3
0,3
1,0
3.8
05701 Wind Monitor - RE
08274
AC Coil
0.3
0.2
1.3
5.0
12102 Cup Anemometer
12170C
2400 mV Tach-Gen
0.4
0.5
0,4
1.4
12102DCup Anemometer/Photo Choper
12170C
Photo Chopper
0.1
0.3
0.4
1.4
21003 Anemometer Bivane
08274
2400 mV Tach-Gen
0.6
0.3
1,3
5.0
27106 Propelter Anemometer
08274
500 mV Tach-Gen
0.5
0.3
1.3
5,0
27106T Propeller Anemometer
08254
500 mV Tach-Gen
0.5
0.4
1.0
3.8
27106D Propeller Anem / Photo Chopper
08274
Photo Chopper
0.3
1,3
5.0
NOTES:
1. New instrument torque and threshold specifications are maximum values
2. Values shown are maximum torque to maintain instrument threshold at or below 0.5 m/s and 1.0 m/s respectively,
3. EPA and NRC instrument specifications designate 0.5 m/s wind speed starting threshoid. ASTM 05096-90 "Standard
Test Method for Determining the Performance of a Cup Anemometer or Propeller Anemometer" defines "starting
threshold" and outlines a method for its determination.
SENSORS:
03110 Wind Sentry 75 cm Cup Wheel Assembly
08234 18 X 30 cm Polypropylene Propeller (PP)
08254 20 X 30 cm Carbon Fiber Thermoplastic Propeller (CFT)
08274 22 X 30 cm Expanded Polystyrene Propeller (EPS)
12170C 100 cm Cup Wheel Assembly
STANDARD BEARINGS:
Model 05103 Wind Monitor - DouMe.Tefton seals & lubricated with M-28 low torque grease
Model 0S10S Wind Monitor - MA - Double Teflon seals & lubricated with "Sta-lube" waterproof grease,
Alt other models - Double metal shields & lubricated with LOt instrument oil jvo-wsw
TOtSKSlJM
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to be updated\4-C-7-b reformattted.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM YOUNG WIND SPEED
Revision No.3
November 2009
-.1 of 7
Figure 3.Anemometer Torque Disc
ANEMOMETER TORQUE DISC
S£50 V£*G«TS TO TORQUE D;SC TO fcOUAL fHtS TC*QU£ VAlUf.
KMOVt PPK£*!.L£S, Ok CvP WEB.. fftOM AN£wOM£T£ft ANO INSTAU. TGSOUE OiSC
*1TH V£tCHTS SfJ MO=?f2CN?AL POS?>0&, DlSC SHOUlO ROTATC DOWNWARD VWCN* RSXf.AStG.
f«££ SO*AnON 1N02CA.TCS OOOO CON&TiOti. ~AiWH£ ^0 ROTATE
SNCrCATSS N£E0 fC$ SERVsCC
AN£WGM£7£/? TOfitOUtClSC
10VV5 A
PKD 05-34
model mjo f#op£u£r move Disc
iDm XL
OttC 06-9$
MODEL 18312 CUP #tt££L TGR'JE DISC
jCKV^fC..
WfSJJtf
RM YWNG CO. TRAVERSE OTYt M 49686
U.S.,A. 61$
-34S-JSS0
9.0 APPENDICIES
None.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - ira>isition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP to be npdated\4-C-7-b reformamed.docx MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. Young Temperature/ Temperature 2
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 1 of 6
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
7. R.M. YOUNG
c. TEMPERATURE
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\EC\1\P\CASTNET4 - transition\OAPP 6.0\Ap-1 FieldSOP\4-C-7-c reformatted RSM FINALdocx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. Young Temperature/ Temperature 2
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. C. 7. c. Temperature
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance for
calibration, maintenance, and handling of the R.M. Young temperature/delta temperature
sensors to Clean Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Equipment Calibration
Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the calibration, maintenance, and handling of R.M. Young RTD
temperature sensors administered by the CASTNET Field Equipment Calibration Laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
R.M. Young R.T.D. temperature sensors are calibrated upon receipt and at the request of field
technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
R.M. Young RTD Temperature probe
Multimeter
Data logger
Certified NIST traceable Dostmann Precision Digital Thermometer with Probe
Magnetic stir plate
Magnetic stirrer
Device to heat water > 50.0 C°
Water
Ice
Insulated vessel large enough to accommodate temperature probes, with fitted lid
Small screwdriver
Temperature iForm
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
Using a certified DVM check the sensor resistance. Each probe should read between 998.5 and
1001.5 ohms. If within the specified resistance range the probe will calibrate properly. If not the
probe may not calibrate properly in which case return probe to the manufacturer for repair or
replacement. Clean probe and probe body.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION
6.1 Connect the sensors to the CR3000 calibration station using the diagrams shown in Figure 1 or
Figure 2. Figure 1 is for R.M. sensors, Figure 2 is for Climatronics sensors.
6.2 Crush ice and make ice water bath in large cooler cup. Insert magnetic stirrer to bottom of the
cup and place the cup on the stirring device. Turn the stirring device to setting 3 or 4 making
sure the magnetic stirrer is in the center of the cup. Place the Styrofoam lid with holes for
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4 - mnsition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 FieldSOP\4-C-7-c reformatted RSM FINALdocx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
R.M. Young Temperature/ Temperature 2
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
thermometer and probes on the cup. Insert the Temperature Primary Dostmann Electronic
Precision Digital Thermometer (PDT) probe into center hole of the lid with the black ring at
water level. Insert the probes to the same depth.
6.3 Allow the temperature to stabilize. Record the temperature in engineering units as output by the
DAS in one of the columns of the "Temperature Data Logger Output" columns of the AS LEFT
section of the temperature iForm. Record the Primary PDT output as displayed on its LCD in
the iForm in the RTD column of the AS LEFT section of the iForm.
6.4 Make another bath without ice using aliquots of hot and cold water to adjust the temperature.
Use magnetic stirrer as above and insert probes. Insert the Primary PDT. Record data on iForm
as above.
6.5 Repeat the calibration procedure above using water baths at the following temperatures:
6.6 -10° C
6.7 -20° C
6.8 -30° C
6.9 -40° C
6.10 -50° C
6.11 Inspect the iForm for computed rho and alpha values for the probe(s). The Temperature iForm
will flag these values if not within specification. If the probes meet specification continue.
6.12 Print two copies of the Temperature iForm for each probe. Place the probe in a sealing bag with
one certification form and place on the ready to ship shelf.
6.13 File the remaining iForm copy in the instrument file by Property I.D. number.
7.0 REFERENCES
R.M. Young Company. Model 41342/41372 Temperature Probe Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. 1, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiorixOAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 FieldSOP\4-C-7-c refonnatted RSM FINAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
8.0 FIGURES
R.M. Young Temperature/ Temperature 2
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'\Ap -1 FieldSOP\4-C-7-c reformattedRSM FJNAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Temperature/ Temperature 2
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
Figure 1. Wiring Diagram Calibration Wiring, RM Young Temperature Probes
RM YOUNG Temperature Probe Calibration Wiring Schematic
1000 Ohm PUtlnun RTD
1.5 Ohns
CALIBRATION STAT TON
WRING HARNESS
1000 Ohm Platinum RTD
1.5 Ohns
CALIBRATION STATION
WIRING HARNESS
CASTNET IV
RMY CAL WIRING
MACTEC
ENGINEERING
Rsn
Rev 1.0
Page 1 of 1
11/30^2009
P:\EC\1\P\CASTSET 4 - transition\QAPP 6A)\Ap -1 FieldSOP\4-C-7-c reformatted RSM FINALdocx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Temperature/ Temperature 2
Revision No.3
November 2009
; 6 of 6
Figure 2. Temperature iForm for Laboratory Calibration
IfMAGTEC ' Temperature
Site N.ihib
Calibrator
Calibration Date
Data Logger
ihoinr- Yci
MACTEC099
RSM
11/35/2009
Campbell 3000 ID:489 - Campbell 300010:489
1.1.0.0
UMeterdM)
As Left
As Found
As Left
07334
R.M. Young
43347
Transfer Standard
ID#
Manufacturer
Date e£ Last Cert
Correction
actors
lu
40*
0.00
0.00
0.00,
: 0.00..
0.00:
i 11:7. 1 i'ci!inci:itiuc 11 ;»1 o'j i-ci Unlpiil
RTD I CI
Temperature
10m) Output
Temperature 2 (2m) Output
Dolt.-»T.
Shelter Temperature
Uncorrected Correction Corrected
Temp. fC) Factor Ternp. pC)
Raw Corrected
Temp, {°CJ Temp. (°C)
Raw Corrected
Diff(°C) Diff (®C)
Raw Corrected Raw Corrected
Temp. fC) Temp. (°C} Diff f>C) Diff(°C)
Diff (°CJ
Temp. fC) Diff f°C)
As Left
I
i'cniULiHlmc
RTD fcC)
Tempo rnture
10m) Output
Temperature 2 (2ml Output
Delta T.
5he(t&r Temperature
* i
Temp", (°C)
Correction
Factor
'Corrected-
Temp. (°C)
Raw
Temp, fC)
Corrected
Temp,.pC)
Raw
Diff J°C)
Olff l°C)
Temp. (°C)
: corrected
Temp. (°C)
Oiff (°C)
Diff (°C)
Diff j°C)
Temp. t°C)
Diff (°C)
0.00
0.00
0.00
. 0,02
0.00
0.02
0.00
10.00
0.00
10.00
10.04;
10.02
0.04
0.02
20.00
0.00
20.00
• 2p,i 1
20.09
0,11
0.09
30.00
0.00
30.00
. :29:.92- "- :
29.89
-0.08
•0.11
40.00
0.00
40.00
; 40.14
40.11
0.14
0.11
50.00
0.00
50.00
50.03
50.00
0.03
0.00
Remarks
LAB CALIBRATION: Primary Standard: Dostmann Flectronic P655 SN 65507072320, ID*06499, Probe Model 6000-1018, SN P100 080224. Annual Cerification 11/21/2008.
Reviewd By:
9.0
Appendices
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\OAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOPU-C-7-e reformatted RSM F/.XAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
Page I of 8
l/2^oOc|
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
7. R.M. YOUNG
d. RELATIVE HUMIDITY
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Certification Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOP\4-C-7-d fmal.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
Page 2 of 8
IV. C. 7. d. Relative Humidity
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance
maintenance and handling of the Vaportron H-100L Precision Relative Humidity Lab to Clean
Air Status and Trends Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and handling of Vaportron H-100L Precision Relative
Humidity Lab units administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
The Vaportron's internal water reservoir is capped and refilled routinely every 1 to 6 weeks and
is returned to the manufacture annually for routine maintenance and certification.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Rotronic RH sensor or Vaisala RH sensor
Campbell CR3000 Data logger
Vaportron H100CL Precision Humidity Laboratory or Aqueous saturated salts
(Note: Use salts only as a last resort)
Insulated screwdriver
Soldering tool
Solder/flux
Small flashlight
Plastic storage bag
DRIERITE desiccant
Kimwipes
Wire cutters
Sonic cleaner
Deionized (DI) water
Alcohol
RH iForm or RH/Temperature Paper Form
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Repair
Return inoperable sensors to the manufacturer for repair.
5.2 Maintenance
5.2.1 Rotronic
Replace filter tip and O-ring, as necessary. Otherwise clean Rotronic filter caps in ultrasonic
cleaner.
Check and re-solder both ends of signal wire as necessary.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-7-d final.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
Page 3 of 8
5.2.2 Vaisala
Replace filter tip as necessary.
6.0 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Using the Vaportron H100CL Series Precision Humidity Laboratory
6.1.1 Use either iForms or Paper forms for this calibration. If using iForms populate the "Site" and
"Data-Logger" pages to reflect the type of equipment used. Also indicate on the RH iForm what
type of sensor is being calibrated and its I.D. If iForm is used record the VAPORTRON I.D. in
the "Transfer Standard" column and enter 0 for each correction factor.
6.1.2 Check the desiccant cartridge located on the back of the unit; the DRIERITE must be a blue
color above the red line on the cartridge. If the indicating DRIERITE is pink at or below the red
line on the cartridge, refer to the maintenance SOP (IV.A.5.1) for instructions on changing
DRIERITE. Check the water level by lifting up on cap end of cartridge and looking into the
large window near the left desiccant hanger hook. Use a small flashlight to locate the water
level. The water level must be between the lower and upper red lines on the fill level decal. If
the water level is not between the lines, refer to the maintenance SOP (IV.A.5.1) for instructions
on the water level service procedure (see the Figure IV.A.5.1 for help).
6.1.3 Switch the power to ON (lower left). The RH LCD (center top) and TEMPERATURE
displays should come on and read the approximate room conditions.
6.1.4 Set the TEMPERATURE display, using the up or down arrows, to 25.0°C (Rotronic) 22.5°C
(Vaisala).
6.1.5 Remove the plug from the white chamber access door (right side) and insert the Rotronic RH
probe so approximately 1.5 inch of the probe is left outside the aluminum port fitting on the
door. Lightly tighten the port fitting to hold the probe securely in the chamber.
Vaisala goes into smaller port on access door - wrap parafilm around port and sensor to seal.
6.1.6 Set the RH LCD display, using the up or down arrows, to the first point of 10.0 % RH.
6.1.7 Plug the RH sensor into the proper test cable and check the data logger for an output from the
sensor. Obtain a Temperature/ RH Data form or RH iForm and record the serial number of the
sensor and all relevant data.
6.1.8 Switch CONTROL to ON. A faint, high-pitched sound should indicate proper operation of the
air circulator fan inside the chamber. The Vaportron displays should begin to ramp toward the
values that were set. Normally, the RH and Temperature readings will stabilize within 2 to
5 minutes.
6.1.9 Let the Rotronic RH sensor equilibrate for lhour or until stable at the set point, then record the
output from the Vaportron RH controller and the data logger on the proper calibration form or
iForm. If iForm is used record Vaportron Data in the "Portable Hygrometer" column of the "As
Left" block. The iForm will automatically populate the corrections factors with zeros. Record
the sensor output as read from the CR3000 in the "% Relative Humidity" column of the "Data-
Logger Output" block of the iForm.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - 1 Field SOPVl-C-7-d flnal.docx
MACTEQ Inc.
-------
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
Page 4 of 8
6.1.10 Set the RH LCD display, using the up arrow, to the next point of 30 % RH and repeat step
6.1.8.
6.1.11 Repeat step 9 for set points of: 50%, 70%, 85%, and 95.0%.
6.1.12 The sensor output must be within 10% RH. . If these criteria are not met, return the sensor to the
manufacturer for repair along with a copy of the calibration form.
6.1.13 After completion of the final point, loosen the aluminum port fitting on the door and remove the
sensor from the chamber. Install the port plug. Set the RH LCD display, using the down arrow,
to 50.0 % RH. Let the unit run for 5 minutes at this setting.
6.1.14 Switch the CONTROL to OFF. Switch the power to OFF (lower left).
6.1.15 Check that the calibration form is completed (see Figure 1) and see Calibration Lab Manager
for review and sign off of the calibration form. After review, place the form and sensor in a
plastic bag, and put them in the appropriate box on the "ready to ship" shelf. Be sure to file a
copy of the calibration form in the sensor calibration file.
6.2 Using Aqueous Saturated Salts [NOTE: Discontinued practice ]
6.2.1 Plug Rotronic relative humidity (RH) sensor into the proper test cable and check data logger
system for an output from sensor. Obtain a Temperature/RH Data form and record the serial
number of the sensor
6.2.2 Carefully remove filter cap from the sensor and, starting with Silica Gel, (0.0%) gently screw
sensor into opening of bottle (use great caution not to hit or contaminate strain gauge or
RTD when inserting in bottle. Place bottle/sensor in the blue bottle caddy.).
6.2.3 Let the Rotronic RH sensor equilibrate for 1 hour at the set point and then record the output
from the data logger on the proper calibration form.
6.2.4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the solutions of deionized (DI) water and salt: MgCl2 (32.8%),
Mg(N03)2 (52.9%), NaCl (75.3%), and KN03 (93.6%). Lightly swirl the solution of DI water
and salt, being careful not to get salt solution into the bottleneck. If salt solution gets in
bottleneck, clean with a Kimwipe before inserting the probe.
6.2.5 The sensor output must be within 10% at points less than 85% RH and within 3% at points
above 85%. If these criteria are not met, return the sensor to the manufacturer for repair.
6.2.6 After the completion of the final point, remove RH sensor from bottle and wipe sensor housing
and O-ring with a clean Kimwipe and install a clean filter.
6.2.7 Check to see that the calibration form is completed (See Figure 2) and see the Calibration Lab
Manager for review and sign off of calibration form. After review, place the form and sensor in
a plastic bag and put them in the appropriate box on the "ready to ship" shelf.
7.0 REFERENCES
R.M. Young Company. Model 41372 Relative Humidity Probe Manual
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transitiomQAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-7-d final.docs
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
Page 5 of 8
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1997. National 8-Hour Primary and Secondary Ambient
Air Quality Standards for Ozone. 40 CFR 50, Appendix I.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1979. Transfer Standards for Calibration of Air
Monitoring Analyzers for Ozone, Technical Assistance Document. EPA-600/4-79-056.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0 Ap - 1 Field SOPv4-C-7-d final.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Figure 1. Temperature/Relative Humidity Paper Calibration Form Using Vaportron
Example
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
; 6 of 8
TEMPERATURE/RELATIVE HUMIDITY DATA FORM
Site Name/Number: FSF -
_ Site Location: F7
PSlyt3Pfin.fi/N: Fluked Oo3\'?
DSM 3260L S/N:
10-m Sensor S
TEMPERATURE 2.mSensorS/l
iH:
Translators
/N-
M-
/
RTD Temp. Ze
S/N- Tfinin Sn
rv A
Temp. Zero:
Temp. Span:
/
an- A
/ -
THERMOMETER
READING (°C)
Uncorrected Corrected
DAS TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
DAS AjHSl^ERATURE OUTPUT
3260 Voltage
3260L Voltage
Temp. (°C)
^2«tfVoltage
3260L Voltage
Temp. (°C)
" -f.y%
)
\
-o
O. ftb
v
S L /£,
/
)
-7*^/0
0. 7s
I
/
13.5VS
Remarks: I krt, sell-
V ' I f V7, Q
S 0 V?"\ { O r
Date: o Calibrated: 1 I
Date:. Audited:
Performed by: _
Reviewed by:.
WHITE- Site FBe YELLOW: OST PINK- FPA
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition QAPP 6.0,Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-7-d final.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Figure 2. Temperature/Relative Humidity Paper Data Form Using Salts
Example
QS7s
TEMPERATURE/RELATIVE HUMIDITY DATA FORM
Site Name/Number: F"SE -
DSM 3260 S/N: OOQO^ i
. Site Location:
DSM 3260L S/N:
tcmocoatiidc 10-m Sensor S/N:, Translator S/N:
TEMPERATURE 2-m Sensor S/N:
RTD Temp. Zet
S/N- T«m Rn
"
THERMOMETER
READING fC)
Uncorrected Corrected
DAS TEMPERATURE OUTPUT
DAS^"fEMPERATURE OUTPUT
3260 Voltage
3260L Voliags
Temp. (°Gy
*3260 Voltage
3260L Voftage
Temp. pC)
t 1
, ^ r
s r
RELATIVE Sensor S/N
HUMIDITY Transfers/
¦ o4o*>
GTL
SALT
EQUIVALENT
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
DAS OUTPUT
3260 Voltage
3260L Voitags
% Rei. Hum.
5;ho-,6?
-------
Relative Humidity
Revision No.4
November 2009
Page 8 of 8
Figure 3: RH iForm
^ MACTEC Relative Humidity
RH Sensor
Humidity Chamber
Transfer Standard
As Found li'
iV.: Li:l!
-.0(:.784 - •
". 06784
ID#
ID#
00116
RH
RH
Manufacturer
VaporPak
Manufacturer
Rotronics
• :--: :Ro.tronKS. .
: Rotromcs
Model
: H-110L •
MP-101-A
WP-101-A
Date of Last Cert
Date of Last Cert
. .. 6/17/2009
Correction Factors
M ¦. .
30%
70%
85°/o
95%
0.00
0.00
.0.00
0.00
0.00
0 .00 .
| vtt \.imt
Calibrator
| Calibration Bate
| Data Logger
[ MACTEC099
RSM
| 11/30/2009
| Campbell 3000 10:489 • Campbell 3000 10:489
1.1.0.0
As Found
Relative Humidity Datalogger
Qiitpi
ditTp
Pa rtabb Hygrometer:
.Correction Factor
Equivalent Relative Humidity
^.Re.Utfrg.Huriridrty f
rmmi
As Left
Relative
HiMditvDataloss
>ef::Gui
put
Portable Hygrometer
Correction Factor
.... I
Catalog?
*'jr- Output
: %JfefetTW:Htttridity
1 ow
10.0%
0.0%
10.00%
11.20%'
1.2%
30.096
0.0%
30.00%
33:i'0%
3.1%
50.0%
0.0%
50.00%
• 49170%
•0.3%
'70.0%
0.0%
70.00%
68.90%
•1.1%
35.035
0.0%
85.00%
'84.00% :
•1.0%
90.0%
0.0%
90.00%
92.10%
2.1%
Remarks ;
Prvnary Standard used for Lab Calibration: VAPORTRON "000116
Re view d By:
9.0 APPENDICES
None
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0'vAp - 1 Field SOP\4-C-7-d final.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM Young Solar Radiation
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page I of 6
IV. CERTIFICATION LABORATORY
C. SITE INSTRUMENTATION
7. R.M. YOUNG
e. SOLAR RADIATION
Effective Date:
Reviewed by:
Approved by:
Reviewed by: Mark G. Hodges
Field Operations Manager
Marcus O. Stewart
QA Manager
Holton K. Howell
Project Manager
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0
Purpose
2.0
Scope
3.0
Summary
4.0
Materials and Supplies
5.0
Repair and Maintenance
6.0
Calibration Procedure
7.0
References
8.0
Figures
9.0
Appendices
Annual Review
Reviewed by:
Title:
Date:
Signature:
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET4-rransition\QAPP6.Q\Ap' 1 FieldSOP\4-C-7-e tefonnatted JEM-MSRSMFINAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM Young Solar Radiation
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 2 of 6
IV. C. 7. e. SOLAR RADIATION
1.0 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard Operating procedure (SOP) is to provide consistent guidance
maintenance and handling of the Solar Radiation system to Clean Air Status and Trends
Network (CASTNET) Field Calibration Laboratory personnel.
2.0 SCOPE
This SOP applies to the maintenance and calibration of the Solar Radiation systems
administered by the CASTNET Field Calibration laboratory.
3.0 SUMMARY
R.M. Young solar radiation systems are calibrated upon receipt and at the request of field
technicians. Repairs and maintenance are performed as necessary. All CASTNET sites
administered by E.P.A. utilize R.M. Young S.R. sensor systems.
4.0 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES
Li-Cor Model LI-2000SA pyranometer (transfer standard)
Eppley Precision Spectral Pyranometer (certified primary standard)
Hukseflux LP02 Pyranometer (certified primary standard)
Fluke Multimeter and cable
Light source
Tool kit including screwdriver, soldering flex, soldering iron, and wire cutters
Campbell datalogger, computer with PC200W program
SR Calibration Form
5.0 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE
5.1 Testing the sensor (photodiode and accessories)
5.1.1 Connect the Fluke multimeter to the double banana-style cable with BNC connector on the other
end. Insert the double banana style cable into the p. Amp (A) and common receptacles on the
multimeter. Connect the BNC end of the cable to the Li-Cor sensor BNC connect (use a barrel
connector as a union). Set the multimeter for Amps, DC, and 200 |iA.
5.1.2 Shine a flashlight or other light source directly on the sensor. The multimeter readout should be at
least ~ 35|iA. If there is little or no response, repair the sensor as follows:
5.2 Repairing the photodiode
5.2.1 Unscrew the back of the sensor housing. Unscrew the small setscrew near the top of the sensor
housing to release the photodiode inside. Cut off the old sensor.
5.2.2 Strip ~ 1/8 inch of insulation from the cable end. Unwrap the shield and wind it into a single
strand. Strip — 1/8 inch of plastic covering on the central wire. Slip a 2 inch piece of shrink wrap
onto the cable.
P:\ECWP\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-C-7-e reformatted JEM-MS RSM FINAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM Young Solar Radiation
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 3 of 6
5.2.2.1 Install old (or new) indulating ring on the new photodiode. Insert photodiode pin legs into
miniature PC board. Solder and snip excess. The pin leg closest to the tab on the rim of the
photodiode housing is the shield. Solder the woven wire of the coaxial cable to the trace in
continuity with this pin. Solder the signal (core wire) of the coaxial cable to the trace in
continuity to the other pin.
5.2.3 Test the new photodiode with the multimeter as above.
Inspect the white sensor housing eye for crazing on the vertical surface. Excess crazing will
require replacement of the housing eye.
5.2.4 Insert the black plastic ring that came off the old photodiode onto the new photodiode and insert
the new sensor into the housing. (Clean the housing inside first, and also be sure not to touch the
surface of the new photodiode with your fingers.) Be sure the new photodiode is flush with the
inside surface of the housing. Tighten the set screw.
5.2.5 Seal the back cover of the housing with silicon sealant before screwing back on. Put a dab of
sealant in the set screw hole as well.
5.2.6 Retest with the multimeter as above. If repairs are not possible, replace the photodiode sensor.
5.3 Maintenance
5.3.1 Clean the sensor housing.
5.3.2 Inspect the cable for damage and repair if necessary.
5.3.3 Check records and verify that the correction factors in the data logger for the primary standards
are current and correct.
6.0 CALIBRATION/CERTIFICATION
6.1 Install the Li-Cor sensor on the solar radiation test stand outside of the solar radiation trailer. Be
sure it is level. Connect the BNC connectors at the stand with a barrel connect as a union.
6.2 Connect the R.M. Young translator box to the corresponding station inside the solar radiation
trailer.
6.3 Do not adjust anything prior to the post calibration (if a post-calibration is necessary).
6.3.1 Post-Calibration
6.3.2 Allow the site instrument to operate for at least one full day. Record data on a sunny day with
high solar radiation values if possible.
6.3.3 When retrieving data, record the ID number of the primary sensor and data logger.
6.3.4 Total the columns of the primary and the site instrument using the values from the morning
(values above ~ 0 watts) until the evening when the values go back to ~ 0.
6.3.5 Average the total of each column by the number of hourly averages being used.
6.3.6 Calculate the percent differences between the primary and site instrument for the total averages
and the hour at which the highest hourly averages occurred. Record on the Solar Radiation
Calibration Form.
6.3.7 Perform a linear regression on the two columns. Record the R2 (correlation squared) and intercept
on the Solar Radiation Calibration Form.
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4- transi/ion\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-C-7-e reformatted JEM-MS RSM FINAL, does
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM Young Solar Radiation
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 4 of 6
6.4 Calibration
6.4.1 Following a post calibration, or to calibrate when a post calibration was not possible or necessary
perform the procedure below.
6.4.2 Install the site sensor as outlined above.
6.4.3 Wipe dew from each sensor on a daily basis.
6.4.4 Adjust the gain potentiometer in the translator circuit when total insolation as measured by the
Primary Standard is above 700 w/m2.
To adjust the gain potentiometer remove the translator housing cover.
Remove the translator PCB retaining screws.
Lift up and fold the translator PCB down and out to expose the gain potentiometer.
Turn the gain potentiometer screw until the instantaneous Primary Standard values match the
site sensor values as displayed by the data-logger.
Continue the calibration by recording a full day of data on a sunny day. Maximum insolation
values should be above 700w/m2.
6.4.5 Total the columns of the primary and the site instrument using the values from the morning
(values above ~ 0 watts) until the evening when the values go back to ~ 0.
6.4.6 Average the Primary and Site Sensor values.
6.4.7 Calculate the percent differences between the primary and site instrument for the total averages
and the hour at which the highest hourly average occurred. Record results on the Solar Radiation
Calibration Form. Repeat the procedure or repair as necessary if the sensor does not meet the
criteria below.
Site SR Sensor Calibration Criteria
Intercept
±10 W/M2
Average Difference
±5%
Difference at Maximum Insolation
±5%
6.4.8 Perform a linear regression on the two columns. Record the site sensor R2 value (correlation
squared) and intercept on Solar Radiation Calibration Form. If the intercept does not meet the
criteria above recalibrate the unit.
6.4.9 After completing the calibration, remove the sensor and matching translator from the test facility.
Place them together with the calibration form into a plastic bag. Place the bag on the "Ready to
Ship" shelf in the appropriate box.
6.4.10 Place a second copy of the calibration form in the sensor calibration file.
7.0 REFERENCES
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998a. Quality Assurance Requirements for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSD) Air Monitoring. 40 CFR 58, Appendix B.
P:\ECMP\CASTNET4-transition\QAPP6.0\Ap- I Field SOP\4-C-7-e refonnatted JEM-MSRSMFINAL.doc.x
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
RM Young Solar Radiation
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 5 of 6
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1998b. Quality Assurance Requirements for State and
Local Air Monitoring Stations (SLAMS). 40 CFR 58, Appendix A.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1987. On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for
Regulatory Modeling Applications. EPA-450/4-87-013.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986a. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. I, Principles. EPA-600/76-005.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1986b. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurement Systems, Vol. II, Ambient Air Specific Methods. EPA-600/4-77-027a.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 1989. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution— —
Measurement Systems, Vol. IV, Meteorological Measurements. EPA-600/4-82-060.
Li-Cor, Inc., Environmental Division. LI-200SA Pyranometer Sensor Manual.
8.0 FIGURES
P:\EC\t\P\CASTNET 4 - transition\QAPP 6.0\Ap - I Field SOP\4-C-7-e reformatted JEM-MS RSM FJNAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------
Figure 1: Solar Radiation Data From
RM Young Solar Radiation
Revision No.3
November 2009
Page 6 of 6
SOLAR RADIATION DATA FORM
SITE NAME/NUMBER: MACTEC
SITE LOCATION: GAINESVILLE, FL
Sensor Number: 04257
Translator Number:
04345
Date/Time
HUX
Eppleyl
Eppley2
PS Avg
Sile/Trans
11/19/2009 0 00
0
0
0
<
PS Number: (Huxseflux;
06490
11/19/2009 1 00
0
¦
tllflllllll
0
'
PS Number: ' (Eppley 1)
01745
Ipffeil
tlitgiiiil
0
0
¦HSpmi
m-MMiS
0
0
PS Number: (Eppley 2)
000108
,11/19/2009 5:00 '
0
0
11A9/2C096G0
iisiiii
liSim
1 0
0
Datalogger Number:
000331
11/19/2009 7:00
0
0
0
0
1
11/19/2009 8:00
30
28
29
29
27
Channel:
3
11/19/2009 9:00
226
208
215
216
221
11/19/200910:00
418
3S1
405
405
409
11/19/200911:00
569
538
553
553
551
SLOPE
0.9837
11/19/200912:00
659
627
643
643
633
11/19/2009 1 3:00
681
650
666
666
653
INTERCEPT
3.2841
11/19/200914:00
623
594
603
607
600
11/19/200915:00
362
329
350
347
338
CORR COEF
0.9998
11/19/2009 16:00
300
281
291
291
290
11/19/200917:00
134
121
125
127
134
AVG % DIFF
-0.5
11/19/200918:00
10
7
7
8
13
11/19/200919 00
0
0
0
0
0
MAX % DIFF
-1.9
11/19/2009 20 CO
illlilill
13
'
Hour may vary
11/19/200921 00
liESlfiSn
0
0
0
11/19/2009 22 00
flMSio®
0
0
a
11/19/2009 23 00
0
0
0
0
0
HUX Std Avg
Eppleyl Std Avg
Eppley2 Std Avg
PS Avg
Site/Trans Avg
309
290
299
299
298
Data reduced from rion-shaded values
REMARKS:
Calibrated By: dme
Date: November 20,2009
9.0 APPENDICES
P:\ECM\P\CASTNET 4- fransition\OAPP 6.0\Ap -1 Field SOP\4-C-7-e reformatted JEM-MS RSM FINAL.docx
MACTEC, Inc.
-------